Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCONTRACT DOCUMENTS A=COM F.Y. 2010 River Renaissance Lower Plaza City Contract No. 763 AECOM #84050.22.000 Prepared For: City of Waterloo -' 715 Mulberry Street Waterloo, Iowa 50703 Prepared By: AECOM 501 Sycamore Street, Suite 222 P.O. Box 1497 Waterloo, Iowa 50704-1497 `� February 2010 F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA CITY CONTRACT NO. 763 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Prepared For: City of Waterloo, Iowa Prepared By: AECOM February 2010 I hereby certify that this engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and hat I am a duly licensed Professional Engineer `````` �pES S 1 pH' under the laws of the state of I a ���� �- 12 h :• DOUGLAS W. •:C = Z SCHINDEL ;z = DOLMLAS W'SCHIN E. Date i 11457 License No. 11457 My license renewal date is December 31, 2010 Pages or sheets covered by this seal: All Pages Date Issued: FY 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA —' CITY CONTRACT NO. 763 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS P-9_ 1. NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING AND NOTICE TO BIDDERS .........................NPHB-1 to NPHB-4 2. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS.........................................................................IB-1 to IB-9 3. FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL........................................................................BF-1 to BF-12 4. SALES TAX EXEMPTION INFORMATION FORM...........................................STE-1 5. FORM OF BID BOND........................................................................................BB-1 6. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS.......................................................................NCA-1 to NCA-2 — 7. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE ....................................................................EOC-1 to EOC-2 8. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE AND —. RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION .............................................................RR-1 to RR-2 9. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM.................................................................1 to 9 10. POTENTIAL ITEMS OF WORK FOR MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION.................M-1 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM.....................................M-2 LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES. ........................M-3 MBE/WBE SCOPE LETTER. ...............................................................M-4 MBE AND/OR WBE PREBID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM.......M-5 to M-6 11. CERTIFIED MBE/WBE CONTRACTORS -CITY OF WATERLOO .................1-5 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS..............................................SQ-1 to SQ-2 13. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS..................................................................GSP-1 to GSP-4 14. SPECIAL PROVISIONS ....................................................................................SP-1 to SP-3 Section 100 - Removals........................................................................100-1 to 100-2 Section 101 - Earthwork........................................................................101-1 to 101-3 Section 102- Granular Materials..........................................................102-1 Section 103- Engineering Fabric..........................................................103-1 Section 104- PCC Pavement...............................................................104-1 to 104-2 Section 105-Colored, Tooled PCC Pavement, 6-In............................105-1 to 105-3 Section 106- HMA Pavement...............................................................106-1 to 106-2 Section 107 - Pavement Markings........................................................107-1 Section 108 -Storm Sewer...................................................................108-1 Section 109-Subdrain .........................................................................109-1 Section 110 -Structural Elements ........................................................110-1 Section 111 - Railing.............................................................................111-1 R R Lowe rPl aza-#763-84050.22.000 Section 112- Erosion Control...............................................................112-1 Section 113 - Mobilization.....................................................................113-1 Section 114 -Traffic Control.................................................................114-1 Section 115- Dock Equipment.............................................................115-1 Section 116- Fountain..........................................................................116-1 Section 502 -Sanitary Sewers..............................................................502-1 to 502-5 Section 512 -Gatewells........................................................................512-1 to 512-7 Section 01316- Engineer's Status During Construction.......................01316-1 to 01316-5 Section 01457 -Testing Pressure Mains..............................................01457-1 to 01457-2 Section 02316-Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting.....................02316-1 to 02316-6 Section 02510 - Disinfection of Potable Water Mains...........................02510-1 to 02510-4 Section 02538-Testing Sewer Systems..............................................02538-1 to 02538-6 Section 02723-Water Main Systems ..................................................02723-1 to 02723-8 Section 16050-Basic Materials and Methods......................................16050-1 to 16050-15 Section 16060 -Grounding...................................................................16060-1 to 16060-5 Section 16070-Supporting Devices.....................................................16070-1 to 16070-4 Section 16075- Electrical Identification................................................16075-1 to 16075-4 Section 16135- Underground Ducts and Manholes.............................16135-1 to 16135-4 Section 16210- Electric Service...........................................................16210-1 Section 03 30 00-Cast-In-Place Concrete..........................................03 30 00-1 to 03 30 00-10 Section 05 31 00 -Steel Decking..........................................................05 31 00-1 to 05 31 00-2 Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing...................................05 40 00-1 to 05 40 00-2 Section 05 50 00 -Metal Fabrications ..................................................05 50 00-1 to 05 50 00-4 Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry ....................................................06 10 00-1 to 06 10 00-4 Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation..................................................07 21 00-1 to 07 21 00-4 Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers ....................................................07 25 00-1 to 07 25 00-3 Section 07 42 13-Metal Wall Panels...................................................07 42 13-1 to 07 42 13-3 Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing.............................07 53 00-1 to 07 53 00-5 Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim...............................07 62 00-1 to 07 62 00-3 Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories....................................................07 72 00-1 to 07 72 00-2 _ Section 07 76 00 - Roof Pavers............................................................07 76 00-1 to 07 76 00-2 Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers...........................................................07 90 05-1 to 07 90 05-3 Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames............................08 11 13-1 to 08 11 13-3 Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware .......................................................08 71 00-1 to 08 71 00-3 Section 09 90 00 - Paints and Coatings................................................09 90 00-1 to 09 90 00-3 Section 32 36 23-Stone Fabrications..................................................32 36 23-1 to 32 36 23-5 Section 32 37 00 -Steel Bench Seating Assemblies............................32 37 00-1 to 32 37 00-2 Section 32 80 00 - Irrigation System.....................................................32 80 00-1 to 32 80 00-11 Section 32 91 00 -Soil Preparation......................................................3291 00-1 to 32 91 00-6 Section 32 92 23-Turfgrass Sod.........................................................32 92 23-1 to 32 92 23-3 Section 32 93 00- Plant Material..........................................................32 93 00-1 to 32 93 00-12 15. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION....................................GS-1 to GS-13 16. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION......SGS-1 17. FORM OF CONTRACT.....................................................................................C-1 to C-4 18. FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND..................................................................PFB-1 to PFB-2 19. FORM OF PAYMENT BOND.............................................................................PB-1 to PB-2 RRLowe rP laza-#763-84050.22.000 NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING On Proposed Plans, Specifications, Form of Contract, And Estimate of Cost and the NOTICE TO BIDDERS For the Taking of Construction Bids For the F.Y.2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA CITY CONTRACT NO.763 In the City of Waterloo, Iowa RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City +' Hall of the said City on the 22"d day of February 2010, until 4:00 p.m. for the construction of the F.Y.2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA, CITY CONTRACT NO. 763, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in open Council meeting to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 22"d day of February , 2010, at 5:30 p.m. , and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed. PUBLIC HEARING Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on February 22, 2010 , said hearing to be held in the Council Chambers in the City Hall in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for said improvements heretofore prepared by AECOM are now on file in the office of the City ._ Clerk for public examination, and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set forth. SCOPE OF WORK The extent of the work involved is the construction of retaining walls, steps, sidewalk, handrails, water main, storm sewer, sanitary sewer, lighting, electrical and other incidental items for the F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA along the Cedar River in downtown Waterloo. _ BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and all items shall be completed on or before December 31, 2010 The ... completion date will be administered based on 150 working days. NPH13-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR The Contractor will be paid against bi-monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety-five percent (95%) of the work as it is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is _ made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material, men and laborers have been paid. The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment may be made by anticipatory warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by AECOM, which plans and specifications and also the prior proceedings of the City Council referring to and defining said proposed improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. Plans and Specifications are obtainable by a qualified bidder from the offices of the City Engineer, 715 Mulberry Street, upon payment of $25.00. The payment is not refundable. The prime contractor, subcontractors, or suppliers working on the project shall retain their own set of plans and specifications for — use on the project. The prime contractor will be supplied with the needed number of reduced sets of plans and specifications at no additional cost. — CONTRACT AWARD A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest bid. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in the bids submitted that might be in the best interest of the City. '- Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed thirty(30) days from the day of the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of bidders, prior to awarding the contract. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced with the State of Iowa and preference will be given to local domestic labor in the construction of the improvement. PROPOSALS SUBMITTED — The bidder shall submit bids on the items listed in the proposal. The bidder shall clearly write or type the unit bid price and the bid item extension (Unit Price x Estimated Qty) in numerals on the blanks provided. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price and extension, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price as being the valid unit bid price. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form — of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spreadsheet, the — NPHB-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bonds, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish Performance and Payment Bonds within ten (10) days after forms are presented to him in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bonds to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor. MAINTENANCE BOND Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM /SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least ten percent (10%)for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. A goal of at least two percent (2%) for WBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. Any project funded in part or in total with federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The VIBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid. PREDETERMINED WAGE RATE Predetermined wage rates shall apply to all work on this project in accordance with General Decision No. IA 20080001. In addition, the Prime Contractor shall submit certified payrolls for itself and each approved subcontractor weekly to the Project Engineer. The Contractor may use the Iowa DOT Certified Payroll form or other approved form. The Contractor shall list the craft for each employee covered by the Predetermined Wage Rates. The Prime Contractor shall sign each of the subcontractor's payrolls to acknowledge the submittal of the Certified Payroll. NPHB-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of five hundred dollars ($500.00) per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same — shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the — following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. — PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before the work is commenced on this contract, a conference shall be held for the purpose of discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended by the prime contractor, subcontractors and City Officials. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE — Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Reciprocal Resident Bidder Preference requirement. — Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification in the form herein provided, to the effect that he will not have as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site. SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES Contractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales Tax Exemption Certification to — purchase building materials or supplies in the performance of construction contracts let by the City of Waterloo. Published pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the Code of Iowa and upon order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the day of 2009. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA BY: Suzy Shares — City Clerk N PHB-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient time allowed for a reply to reach bidders before submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding. 2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or the cost thereof. Failure to do so will not relieve bidders from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or related documents. i 3. PREPARATION OF BIDS a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the bid. _ The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price, and Total Bid. The computer- generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spread- sheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for one or more items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices, schedule items resulting in a bid on a unit of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form explicitly requires that the bidder bid on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space — provided for any item on which no price is submitted. C. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered. -- d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids. Telegraphic modifications will be considered, but should not reveal the amount of the original or revised bid. e. In preparing his bid, the bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with the typewriter, at which he proposes to do each item of work. The unit price shall be stated in figures in the blank space provided (i.e., $7.14). In items where unit price is required, I13-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the blank space provided. — If the bidder chooses to submit the unit prices, total bid price, and total bid on a computer-generated spreadsheet, all numbers shall be easily legible. f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto, may cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded him by the city Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS -- a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by — mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of Waterloo at his office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids. b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed. The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid arrives by mail after — the time fixed for opening, but before the reading of all other bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which the bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered. — C. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to _ misinterpretation, shall make the bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. 5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered. However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful bidder, and which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from bidders prior to the time set for closing of bids. 6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in the Notice to Bidders. Their — content will be made public for the information of bidders and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. 7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft _ drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into I13-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 the Contract and furnish the required bond, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. 8. COLLUSIVE AGREEMENTS a. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he as not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. b. Each bidder submitting a bid shall have each proposed subcontractor, if any, execute and submit to the City Contract Compliance Officer by 5:00 P.M. the business day following the day bids on this project are due, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he has not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. Before executing any subcontract, the successful bidder shall submit the name of any proposed subcontractor for approval by the City. 9. MINORITY AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SUBCONTRACTORS a. CITY OF WATERLOO AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PRE-BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM The City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposal. Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is proposed by the prime contractor. 10. MBEIWBE CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM PURPOSE The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called Program) is to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority and women disadvantaged —' business enterprise (MBE/WBE) in City awarded construction contracts. The Program does not propose to eliminate any bonafide contractor or subcontractor from bidding on City contracts, but it will hopefully serve as a needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE's grow and eventually become mainstream contractors and subcontractors. This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE subcontractors. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their "good-faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than $50,000. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE firms. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo awarded construction contracts. 1 B-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 DEFINITIONS Goals: A flexible numerically expressed objective which contractors are required to make "good- faith efforts." The key to the requirement is to make documented efforts. Goals are neither set-a-sides nor a device to achieve proportional representation or equal results. — Numerical goals do not create set-a-sides for specific groups, nor are they designed to achieve proportional representation or equal results. Rather, the goal-setting process in affirmative action planning is used to target and measure the effectiveness of affirmative — action efforts to eradicate and prevent discrimination. Quota: A flat numerical requirement that the contractor is required to meet in order to obtain the benefit or be in compliance. The numerical goal component of affirmative action programs is not designed to be, nor may it properly or lawfully be interpreted as, permitting unlawful preferential treatment and quotas with respect to persons of any race, — color, religion, sex, or national origin. The regulations at 41 CFR 60-2.12(a), 60-2.15 and 60-2.30, specifically prohibit discrimination and the use of goals as quotas. (U.S. Department of Labor) Set-Aside: An arrangement in which a particular contract is reserved for competition solely among minority and women business enterprises. — Contractor: As used in this document means contractor, subcontractor, supplier, vendor, and professional service provider. Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) Any business, which is at least 51%, owned by one or more minorities and whose — management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 Women Business Enterprise (WBE): Any business which is at least 51% owned by one or more women and whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals and is on the current State Unified Certification List, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002 Minority: — Any person or persons who are considered as socially and economically disadvantaged because of their identity as a group member without regard to their individual qualities. The groups include: Black American, Hispanic American, Native Americans, Eskimos, — Aleuts, and Asian-Pacific Americans. 13 C.F.R. 124-1.1(c)(3)(ii)(1 983). Lowest Responsible Bidder: _ Bidder who has offered the lowest bid and who has exhibited skill relative to the type of work bid on, judgment, financial responsibility, and evidence of working with the Affirmative Action Employment Program and the Contract Compliance Program. Broker: One buying or selling for others on commission or other fee basis without maintaining a warehouse or other similar inventory storage facility. Mayor's Advisory Committee: I B-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 Mayor's Advisory Committee for Minority, Female, and Disadvantaged Business Enterprise. Good Faith Efforts: The successful bidder shall be selected on the basis of having submitted the lowest responsible bid. The obligation of the bidder is to make good faith efforts. The bidder can demonstrate that it has done so by the following: 1. The Prime Contractor met the project goal - No Action necessary 2. If the Prime Contractor failed to meet the goal, they must submit documentation of good faith efforts. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections or goals regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as subcontractors in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least 10% for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000 or more and projects under $50,000 where applicable at the Contract Compliance Officer's discretion. There is at least 2% WBE goal on City funded projects. Any project which is funded solely or in part with Federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. Any project which is funded solely or in part with State funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Program is for City awarded construction contracts only. The prime contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. Administrative Reconsideration: As part of this reconsideration, the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to discuss the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: * Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE subcontracting Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE firms MBE/WBE quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE quotes used Reasons agreements were not reached Follow-up after initial solicitations Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. I13-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 RESPONSIBILITIES 1. City of Waterloo A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. — B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBENVBE/DBE contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo.C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE firms. _ D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBE/WBE firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE Letter(s) of Intent to Bid and within two (2) business days forward the complete list of MBE/WBE bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. ll. Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime contractor —' must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO-3) to appropriate MBE/WBE (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7) working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBENVBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBENVBE contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBENVBE/DBE Certifications from another government agency. B. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBE/WBE firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted _ for assistance immediately. C. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBE/WBE proposals by telephone or personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2). D. If any MBE/WBE business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, - documentation must accompany the "MBE/WBE Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBE/WBE was not selected. These reasons could include: I B-6 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 — a. Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for verification. _ b. MBE/WBE did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive. C. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE business for a subcontract. d. Prime contractor self performs work. e. Any other reason relied on by prime. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above(supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. lll. MBE/MBE Firms A. MBE/WBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002. B. MBE/WBE firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. C. Each MBE/WBE firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid (Form CCO-5) to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven (7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE in which the MBE/WBE promises not to provide subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are prohibited. NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. B. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to use certified MBE/WBE firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. NOTICE TO PROCEED Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good-faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. -- CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract Compliance Programs. 1 g-7 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 11. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers owning — businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this project, shall to the greatest extent '— feasible be made available to lower income persons residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document his efforts in securing lower income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding subcontracts to, businesses owned by persons residing in the project area. 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Each bidder shall, upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form furnished for — that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a statement of bidder's qualifications, his experience record in constructing the type of improvements embraced, and his organization and equipment available for the work contemplated; and, when specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall have the right to take — such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform his obligations under the contract, and the bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an — investigation of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract. 13. AWARD OF CONTRACT — a. Award of contract will be made to that responsive and responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo; price and _ other factors considered. The intention is to award the contract at any time of opening bids, but the right is reserved to postpone such action for a reasonable time, not exceeding thirty(30) days. b. The City Council may, when in its interest, reject any or all bids or waive any informality in bids received. C. The bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price in words as being the valid unit bid price. A computer-generated spreadsheet as herein provided shall also be acceptable. Proposals requiring mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the _ lowest total bid as indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. 14. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT, BONDS, AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE a. Subsequent to the award and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, an agreement in the form included in the contract documents in such — number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require. b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these documents, the successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a '— surety bond and a payment bond in a penal sum not less than the amount of the contract IB-8 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 as awarded, as security for the faithful performance of the contract and terms and conditions therein contained and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment, or services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. The bonds shall protect and save harmless the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bonds shall be in the same form as that included in the contract documents and shall bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to such bonds. C. The successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No. 4 "Liability Insurance," Pages GS-10 to GS-11. The certificate of insurance shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. The City of Waterloo shall be named as an "Additional Insured." The contractor shall similarly submit his subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or require that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees and those of his subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State Workmen's Compensation Laws. d. The failure of the successful bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the required bond or bonds within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may either award the contract to the next lowest bidder or re-advertise for bids, and may charge against the bidder the difference between the amount of the bid an the amount for which a contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re- advertising, the defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a refund. 15. RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE Attention of bidders is called to the requirement of complying with the provisions of the Reciprocal Resident Bidder Preference requirement. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification in the form herein provided, to the effect that he will not have as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site. IB-9 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL F.Y.2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA CITY CONTRACT NO. 763 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Honorable Mayor and City Council Waterloo, Iowa Gentlemen: 1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of a Partnership consisting of the following partners: , having familiarized (himself) (themselves) (itself) with the existing conditions on the project area affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda (if any), as prepared by AECOM now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes to furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA, CITY CONTRACT NO. 763, all in accordance with the above- listed documents and for the unit prices for work in place for the following items anc quantities: BF-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 cl m W JU FCL 0 pa o H N N _ £f3 Ef} Ef3 Efl ER EA 64 EA (�-? EA ER EA fR Efl O LO O OP m V M m za N EFT (A EA EfJ EA EA EA ER ER f!T 69 ff3 EA EA d. ❑ O O r- O O O O O O O O O O O � W r m LO N co CO CD N O r- O O 2� QH � coN OLO N LO 0) O C) O 0 y C W M 0 Ye IX � Qa Im Z ujN ui w N O H vJQOin W 3: O Q Oz � U) T- OF � Q LL N LU UQ vJQOm co � cn Q V o o r o 0 o O o O o 0 0 0 0 O) LO N co CO O O N O r- O O Z } Z Z co O N N O Ln r O 0) LO Lf) LLJ N r- LO V (/J V_J Q co N W > > > 0 F- } } Q Uj Z J (n (n J W J U U U U U U U U z O 0 �. W C N Y p O O a CD N 0 m � a_ r C ` � N O U) N m W (D m a C7, m m m m _m t- 'aa cn U ) U U U c U U U 0 0 0 0 c c c m 7 m m O O O cn U- 0 0 0 c > > > > > io iv is = = m io iv 'C O O O O O > > > O O > > > m E E E E E m m m (n cn m m m O O O O O N X X X O O X X X W W W f— f— W W LU W Z N co LOCO r- GD m O N c) V 0 m W o J V o - o F C N 0 �' N LO EA Efl f!T ffl EA (f) Efl EF3 Ef3 Ef3 Ef? fA ffT d9 H3 ER ER O O 0' .. OJ 2LU M m U It z d N CD CD O O r CD co O CD0 O CDLf) r O O a) co o 00 0 o r` o Ci co o co ao cm 00 3 J cc CD r- W N 00 O 00 00 M O tC) Cl) N ti M NCo J O CO H a z r N N M O N Q W -- o 0 M co N N 0 Ye maa 0 m � m 0Wuj cew An < oul) TT 0 M N 0: U) Y M ZUJYZ LL O W m m to Q O O O O O t- O M 0 O O O O Lr) t- O O �t co co o 00 o o r` o o ri o co m CO o0 Z ZN 00 O 00 O Cl) O co V N t� a) ON � O Co 0 0 N M N _ in in 0 0 U U J cn (n vj W W J J J J J U O a) T C C LL V) Lt') .0 Q Q Q d• C N a) 00 Z o O Q > C aj C C 'O CO C N N C - N It (L4 CL4 U C t t�- a�i U - o o a) E E E o 0 U Y 0 0a) o cn U) a�i ca U cu 2 in W 'o o U aEi Q Q Q n 0 � 2 � co X a� o0 0 0 -0 "0 L) o •� �, a) � E o LL 0 0 0 o c C W LL = U) U) +'�' U a) a) O p C N N N (q 4 O ~ o @ U E > � a) m a) cn cn U o cn E co 0- > IL a) C c m '0 m C6 O lzt a) 47 •.:. ca � CL a) a) cn �> O O O C a) ,�0, 7 O C6 O -O U U W C� U)U U U 2 cn Q CO W O rl- 00 O O N M d' tf7 co f� 00 m CDr- _. H Z LO N N N N N N N N N N M M G m W _ J C.) H CL O 0 o F- N N ER ER ER 64 ER ER Eft 6 EA EF? 64 64 EA ER d} 64 64 O -_ Ln O 0 � m V co F_ w CD - za N ffl 64 ER 60J Gf ffl 69> bl) E!T ffl EA va ER 64 (� 6g 6G, @ 0 �-- O O O O O O O O O O O O O OLO O W cli o rn o Sri o o O o o QF.. V 00 p O N CDO CDO O M J N 0 z O C _ W 0 0 M O o ORGY o m _ Q N LU W I- OWMW v� Q0in 0 M O W Z x ,r LL o a LI? o 0 0� o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 r Cl) o of o LO LO o 0 0 0 0 z z LOO CO N O O O O O O Q j CO O O O LO to LO m N c- U) U) O F- Z 0] m LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL LL 0 0 0 0 0 LL J J (n J J J J J J J J J J J J J J z 7 L O d U c m V ocn IL 0 W C: a) LL > _ LU Q c 75 LL U •C C O •� C V OE U UN O 7 N UL.L O O n >( J N LJp C a- :ID� 'a LL C U r (n S (U U)I LL LL C) LL fn 0� N M UJ O ti � m O N M V LO (D f� CO F- z C7 Ch C7 C7 co M M co It V m W o JU O (L N O N F- 0 CISE» e3 e3 V). GO. F» 69, (19 LO 0 v m m W (oo U_ = a N 69 Gl� a 0 0 0 0 0 0 o Ln o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o m LO LO CO N N N W CA COJ/ Q O Z QC ..r r r LL r V/ W 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Z N r 01 � NQa 0 LU f �ON LLI Q M a. 0 p p O O Q In C4 N 'IT 04 N O Ln ZLLJYZ LL 0 Q0 Co m cQ o LO o LC) CO N � 7 O 00 � » O 0 ~ Q LL Q Q Q LL LL LL Z W J W W W J J J W W W W W Ws W W W � 1 — N U Z O U) N 7 Cn d 0 U Z 3 m U a) m (n Cn fn Cn O C C C C U ED C C > CD m W (n (n C N (O N Q QCT CO m O U O O x O > C to t!7 C ~ LO 0 C U > W ; O W W d. m a N T V 0 rf' to cn x 0 0 O 0 > > = x x x x x C C C C i C C C C C C N C C C C C C O co - 00 d' 00 U 0p CO 4 4 CO � LL V V' �' CO Cfl CO d7 O r N Cl) �t Lf) CO f� OJ O O r N CO 't If) FZ cF' LO LC) LO LO LIB LO Lf) LO lf) LO CO CO CO Co CO CO 0 m W J U Q � o Q d o F N N Ef3 Ef3 64 Ef3 fA Ef} EA Ef3 Eft EfT EA 64 fA Ef3 Efi so3 LO O m V co H 2 c Z d M N Eta EA ER EA Eft Ef3 ffJ Ef} Ef} Efj Ef3 Efj EA N? EA Eta Ef! m a O O O O O O O O O O O O OW O O O `- N CDN O LO cli CO a0 co1 Q F M CO l00 coN� LO coN O CD co O C W 0 0 0 0 0 o rn M O Y OV co CO N O CL c m F o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 NFU) W O (COO N Cn LO O W 0 w to Q 0 > � 3a � M Q O O O O N N ti Y 0 c0 � Q0 m 0 T 00 o � y 0 >_ > 0 ~ Q Q fn Cn cn LL L EB Y @ @ O cn Z > c t 0 r > a E V,^ Z � U MO @ O ,O_ uj C � C @ co -Q '0 > Y Y O _ N O N N C a) O Cn c6 m -O U o T co 2 c a Q U a�i a�i m o 0 ai m a) O O U 0 m 0 T >o o >o L o >o cv E 2 2 _ CL to cn > Lo " c E E w E o E E r > c c c c c c c 2 co col � �U � i i � o) co co COCD of I co c0 I-- m O O N M �P LO CO (— w Cn O T N F- Z CO CO CO CO r— ti r ti ti r— r - ti 00 OJ NO mW JU O o0 0 a N � N E9 E9 EA EA Efl ff-} Ef3 6e, Efj 6f3 (fl ff3 b5 (fT knd to (f! O LO Cb W co Fo 20. N @ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 N 'IT 00 tl- N c`') LC) co O N Cn �t O CO 3 W d LO 0o co 00 N 00 N (D r CD N co LO O JQ H N r M M M N M N M CO J Q F- � Z � 0 c W M N 0 Ye V5W < 5; 0 m F- 0 LU cr v� Q 0 Q M Q o it CO W � Z Q0 co m 0 O o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 'IT N Oj r N M In M O N (n d' O co V (C) Co co co N 00 N O r d' CD N N LO Z Z N r C'7 Ch M N M N _ CO (D 0 0 r inNO C F ti U- LL ti U- LL. U) L Q LL LL ti LL ti U- U- LL Z J J J J J J J U) W J J J J J J U) U M L •D L -O �— M V) N @ N @ C�L6 = CO = Cl E r r @ to U cn U o � 2 x a L Q L L) vi vi v v U) t f- (n U I- y o Z s (6 m @ (0 'm ~ N ai ai m J 0 U U) - -a U CL c L o n@ 4- o n (6 M O C6 Q' a") O O N @ d ,c' m m c U c C� C� J C7 0 @ � @ o C — _ _ _ i C4 _@ C O C O C L C � O L N m U v) m U p c [L 0� oLL o am OJ a) �c > c Wo o m a� a� a� -6 a- a- CL te a`) 0.� 0. t� v L) a> a) a� a3 G� 0- E of E m - 2 X cn � � cn a- ( � Cl)U) U) � Q U) Q 7 o o E W e c c c c cN W"` ~ o•EC��CD UoC�= o = 02 ' 0 � � a) � m � � r� d�ia@� o (o o O o o or o E U) U) c U U U U x @ >N O �oN -0 -6 '0r O -0 M: C CC a) a) O (ll 0 -"- OC O x O O C.5 O xC) E - x0) U COx U U U � C-) 'D 0o x x x x�= C UMNx CL a 'S Cfl a) (o a) C) T)C) a CZ o a) = N a) o �� Q)N ( a) of a> r JL@NE M � co r 00 m O N M X) CCU t-- co O W Z 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 C O fA CA CA 0) 6� O a m W — JU Q � o ~Oa o � N N EA EFT fA EA fA Ef3 EFT EFT fA Ef3 ER ER 64 EF1 fA EFT EFT O LO O m W co U Za N fA ER 6ej EA Efl 1 EFT '.Sl EA EA ER EA (,Sl EA EA EA ER 64 � Q O O O O O O O O O O O O CO LO O O O Q) O) c N LO CD O N (O (O M Lo LO W O O (+') J Ln co O (M O Ln p Q H p O N N O c- O V' J �— QZ N N N � Q U) _ W � Cl) O Y Y � Qa 0 w OW � � NQO � - � M 04 Q ZWYZ co Q Li v5QOm m 0 o O o 0 o O o 0 0 0 0 0 (O Lq o rn o �- o 0 LO o co (o 00 0 LO o a) co Z Z N N CD CD0 _O O y N r- N N ' N N U 0 ~ LL LL LL LL U) U) Q Q Q Q LL LL Q Q Z U J J J J J W W W W J U) U U W U) W U 0 U C _ (Z m — LL m cz > Z c > N C p U N C C Ln a. N N co N U) UJ � C C V1 Vl (� (A ( U U to to n N a) L Q U) Q O E C J Q cr, C C Q M .0 -0 v N c @ 3 c c c o cn LU c m c � Q of co co � � r UO � o o � o m o c m v a) Lu c cA .o � 0 0 � c� o U c o c c c U U � c E (D p M O (4 o N a) a3 Q a N N p (Cp N _, _ 2 _ :E I Ua_ 2E w U) _, U) o (n =I U ao i O N M 1�1' Lf> CO f— CO O O N CO � LO CO �. W O O O O O O O O O O O c- g cu � o / « � 0 \ a a a a a a a _ a e a a a a e a a / \ � w \ E � ® qa N a a e a be a e _ a a _ a _ a a + e E c CDg c g R R g 9 R g R g R g CD R ¥ c a w z 5 o c o o # o # o a a 0 q f ® / ^ ? \ ? ® = a a # I ry � � 0 w 0 � & � ■ Q w . . \0 � / � 7 � 2� c � CM Zi2Z / ge <■ co \ � 0q O g R R c g g R c R c c R R R R R g ® \ % \ / % / \ \ \ ® \ ? z z z # r # mU) \ .. § > - 0 E < < < < < < < < m < < < < < < 3 m / u u w . w w E E w u u w u u u 2 = u & . o / @ c 2 o � £ z \ \ / 2 } 0 / / \ ƒ } § $ S = k \ % \ \ \ . \ \ CCLL \ m e z \ \ \ \ \ 0 5 G ° q 0 / � 3 a- / ® « 4 ® ■ \ 0 a a a 3 3 a g / \ \ @ § § § § § §o ƒ $ e — y ) E { a—. E E y a. E m 2 = « a a z o 0 0 > 0 5 5 t 5 0 5 7 / c 3 E ± 2 = _ = ) / « s U e 3 0 3 0 a a ) 2 ® ® / _ _ = c cO c -- � : % G 3 \ / \ \ \ e ® E ¥ E = a E ± s e f c /§ UaaUamaDa0a2l < 4 R m w E w = = o a n # z = » = c CD a cow B Q Q Q / / 2 2 2 2 2 2 / 2 / / / / a m w JU Fa o Oa 0 ~ N d3 Ef3 Ef9, ER LO O Z t- mU Cl) z a a ,, M o m N O O O Q 0 CO F N Q H 0z of J Q 0 _ of CO C f W M N 0 Ye NQa 04 0 m � NW 0P w v, aov, _ 0 M Z W Y Z o Q H a c_na00° m 0 0 0 OOP > ; O 0 ~ cn cn Q Z J J W D O L C O U Z CLCL 0 = x I- cn O a m N V L .L) a W g a a o H cc �j �L U C co J ^^O C V/ LL W Z m M co 2. It is understood that the quantities set forth are approximate only and subject to variation and that the unit bid price for the work done shall govern in the actual payment to Contractor. 3. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within thirty(30)days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten (10) days after "Notice to Proceed"is issued. 4. Security in the sum of Dollars ($ ) in the form of is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 5. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. 6. Attached hereto is a Resident Bidder Certification. 7. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 8. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC,within ten(10)days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 9. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date 10. The bidder shall list the MBE/WBE subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women Business Pre-bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s) —. to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s). The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts. 11. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none" or"NA". 12. The bidder has attached all applicable forms. i BF-11 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 13. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. (Name of Bidder) (Date) w BY: Title Official Address: (Including Zip Code): I.R.S. No. BF-12 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA WATERLOO ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT ~ 715 Mulberry St. Waterloo,IA 50703 (319) 291-4312 Fax (319) 291-4262 ERIC THORSON,P.E. City Engineer Mayor INFORMATION NEEDED ERNEST G. FOR CLARK IOWA CONSTRUCTION SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATE COUNCIL MEMBERS CONTRACTOR NAME: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DAVID JONES ADDRESS: Ward I CAROLYN COLE Ward 2 HAROLD (Check One) PRIME: SUBCONTRACTOR: GETTY Ward 3 QUENTIN FEDERAL ID#: HART Ward 4 RON PROJECT NAME: WELPER Ward 5 -- BOB DESCRIPTION OF WORK: GREENWOOD At-Large ❑ Brickwork ❑ Landscaping STEV EN SCHMITT ❑ Carpentry ❑ Painting At-Large ❑ Concrete ❑ Paving ❑ Drywall-Plaster-Insulation ❑ Plumbing ❑ Electrical ❑ Roofing-Siding-Sheet Metal ❑ Excavation/Grading ❑ Windows ❑ Flooring ❑ Wrecking-Demolition ❑ Heavy Construction ❑ Other (Please Specify) ❑ Heating-Ventilating-Air Cond. ❑ WE'RE WORKING FOR YOU! An Equal Opportunity/Affirmative Action Employer STE-1 RRLower Plaza-#763-84050.22.000 BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, as Principal, and as Surety are held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF WATERLOO Iowa, hereinafter called "OWNER," in the penal sum Dollars ($ ) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum will and truly be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. The condition of this obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted the accompanying bid dated the day of 200_, for NOW, THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shall be rejected, or in the alternate, (b) If said Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the form specified and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of said contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, and shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, Then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain in force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall, in no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. By virtue of statutory authority, the full amount of this bid bond shall be forfeited to the Owner in liquidation of damages sustained in the event that the Principal fails to execute the contract and provide the bond as provided in the specifications or by law. The Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said Surety and its bond shall be in no way impaired or affected by any extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid or execute such contract; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Principal and the Surety, have hereunto set their hands and seals, and such of them as are corporations, have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these pres- ents to be signed by their proper officers this day of A.D. 200_. (Seal) _ Principal By (Title) (Seal) Witness Surety V BY Witness Attorney-in-fact 1313-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER ._ State of ) )ss County of ) being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner, Partner Officer Representative, or Agent) of the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid; 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or, _ to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the Proposed Contract; and -- 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) ._ Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 2010. Title My commission expires Y NCA-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR State of ) ss: County of ) being first duly sworn, deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner, Partner, Officer, Representative, or Agent) of hereinafter referred to as the"Subcontractor;" 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the subcontractor's proposal submitted by the subcontractor to contract pertaining to the project in ; (City or County and State) 3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal; 4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, _ connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to refrain from submitting a proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the price of prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the proposed contract; and 5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of its agents, representatives, owners, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 2010. Title My commission expires NCA-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE •- (As provided in Executive Order No. 11246) All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City i and value of said business equals or exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as follows: 1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disability, political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Employment b. Upgrading c. Demotion or Transfer d. Recruitment and Advertising e. Layoff or Termination f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation g. Selection for Training Including Apprenticeship 2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will, in all solicitations or �-' advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities, political opinion or affiliations. 3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers' -� representative of the contractor's commitment under this section. 4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will comply with all published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Program Contract Compliance Provisions. 5. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file -- compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action Officer. Said forms will elicit information as to the policies, procedures, patterns, and practices of each subcontractor as well as the contractor himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will permit access to his/her employment books, records and accounts to the City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this contract and with rules and regulations of the City's Affirmative Action Program—Contract Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664. 6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council. 7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every contract, EOC-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier. 8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non-discrimination in _ employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities. (Signed) (Appropriate Official) (Title) (Date) EOC-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 RECIPROCAL RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE In response to Illinois' law concerning resident preference and in accordance with Section 73A.21 of the Iowa Code, all non-federal-aid public improvement projects, which include road construction, shall be performed by a qualified resident bidder. The resident bidder has been further defined as follows: To be a qualified resident bidder, the person, corporation, partnership, or firm shall not have, as employees, Illinois laborers on the work site of a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. An Illinois laborer is any person who has resided in Illinois for at least 30 days and intends to become or remain an Illinois resident. This applies to all labor on the project, whether skilled, semi-skilled, or unskilled; whether manual or non-manual. This also applies to work subcontracted by or to the resident bidder on a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. The resident bidder may place on such work no more than three residents of Illinois who are his regularly employed executive and technical experts. As noted, this definition gives a preference as to whom the contractors or subcontractors can employ. The contractor shall provide the City with a certification that he is a qualified resident bidder according to the above definition. The Certification shall be submitted with the contractor's bid. A copy of the form of "Resident Bidder Certification" is included in the Contract Documents. If it is determined that the contractor does not meet this qualification after he begins work, a shutdown notice shall be issued and the voiding of the contract shall begin unless the contractor becomes qualified. DJG/cs -- 01/13/97 RR-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION CONTRACT NO: PROJECT NAME: DATE OF LETTING: To be a qualified resident bidder, the person, corporation, partnership, or firm shall not have, as o, employees, Illinois laborers on the work site of a non-federal-aid project within Iowa. An Illinois laborer is any person who has resided in Illinois for at least 30 days and intends to become or remain an Illinois resident. This applies to all labor on the project, whether skilled, semi-skilled, or unskilled, whether manual or non-manual. This also applies to work subcontracted by or to the resident bidder on a non- federal-aid project within Iowa. The resident bidder may place on such work no more than three residents of Illinois who are his regularly employed executive and technical experts. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the contractor and his subcontractors at the work site until this project is completed. I hereby certify that no Illinois resident laborer as defined above will be employed at the work site during the contract period from the start of the project until its completion. COMPANY NAME CORPORATE OFFICER TITLE DATE RR-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 Revised February 2003 - CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM Check box that applies to party completing program: ( ) General Contractor ( ) Subcontractor I. Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only: A. Name of Company Address of Company Zip Telephone Number( ) Federal ID Number(if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer Name of Project Project Contract Number Estimated Construction Work Dates / Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only: B. Name of General or Prime Contractor Name of Subcontractor Subcontractor's Address Zip Subcontractor's Telephone Number( ) Subcontractor's Federal ID Number(if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer - 1 - C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, either Prime or Subcontractor. 1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company: Ethnic Name Address Position Sex Origin 2. Other Areas of Interest: If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your company is a branch or subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information: Type of -� Name Address Affiliation Degree II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY(Please read carefully.) A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap. B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training, upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and other subsequent orders that may pertain to equal employment opportunity and merit employment policies, fully realizing that our qualification and/or merit system should be evaluated and revised, if necessary. D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employment and utilization of capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard to race, creed, color, sex, .> national origin, economic status, age, and mental or physical handicap. E. will give training (Name of Company) and employment opportunities to local residents of Waterloo, Iowa, to the greatest extent feasible. -2 - III. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION ._ A. recognizes that the (Name of Company) effective application of a policy of merit employment involves more than just a policy statement, and (Name of Company) will, therefore, re-evaluate our Affirmative Action Program to ensure that equal employment opportunities are available on the basis of individual merit, and to actively encourage minorities, women and local residents to seek employment with our company on this basis. B. will undertake the (Name of Company) following six (6) steps to improve our Affirmative Action Program: 1. Minority Recruitment and Employment; 2. Local Recruitment and Employment; 3. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Recruitment and Employment; 4. Handicapped Recruitment and Employment; -- 5. Female Recruitment and Employment; and 6. Training, Upgrading and Promotional Opportunities. C. will take -` (Name of Company) whatever steps are necessary to ensure that our total work force has adequate minority, female, and local representation. We will utilize the following methods in our recruitment �. attempts: 1. Local advertising media (newspapers, radio, TV); 2. Community organizations (churches, clubs, schools); 3. Public and private institutions in the area (UNI, Hawkeye Community College); 4. Job Service of Iowa; and 5. Other. D. will seek qualified minority, (Name of Company) female, and local group applicants for all job categories and will make asserted efforts to increase minority, female and group representation in occupations at the higher levels or skill and responsibility. E. All sources of employment used shall be aware that we are an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Labor organizations representing our employees will be notified of our Equal Employment Opportunity Policy and Affirmative Action Program. F. Training, upgrading, promotion and transfer activities at all levels will be monitored to ensure that full consideration has been given to qualified minority, female, and local group employees. G. will encourage other (Name of Company) companies with whom we are associated and/or do business, to do the same and we will -- assist them in their efforts. -3 - H. has taken the following (Name of Company) — Affirmative Action to ensure that minority, female, local contractors and/or suppliers were provided opportunities to negotiate and/or bid on this project: (if none, write -NONE") 1. 2. I. As a result of the above efforts, we have involved minority, female, and local contractors and/or suppliers in the following areas of subcontracting: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. J. will require approved (Name of Company) Affirmative Action Programs from all nonexempt contractors who propose to work on this project and will take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that non-minority contractors have adequate representation of minority, female and local persons in their total work force. K. In further accordance with rules and guidelines issued pursuant to Executive Order 11246 as amended, we establish the goals for our company, based on parity percentages supplied by the City, and we realize these goals will be reviewed on an annual basis. L. will keep records of (Name of Company) specific actions relative to recruitment, employment, training, upgrading and promotion and will provide the City of Waterloo with any information relative to same, including activities of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers as necessary or when requested. M. Parity figures for companies located in Waterloo are as follows: Minority Parity= .08 (8%) N. Affirmative Action (Name of Company) Employment Goals: The definition of Affirmative Action Goals is as follows: "Goals may not be rigid and inflexible quotas which must be met, but must be targets, reasonably attainable by means of applying every good faith effort to make all aspects of the entire Affirmative Action Program work." For the year 200_, please submit percentage targets for employing minorities and women. If you already have reached your target for hiring minorities and women, please ^� submit that percentage. *Goals for Minorities: % Goals for Women: % *Your affirmative action goals should be between 1% and 10% or more for minorities and 1% and 5% or more for women. -4 - 9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and related instruction to learn a trade or craft which is traditionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is registered with a Federal or State agency. 10. Trainees (on-the-job): Production, persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations. White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managerial, professional, technical, sales, office and clerical occupations. b1 -9 - ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: The following are items from the F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA, CITY CONTRACT NO. 763, project that have a potential for MBE/WBE Participation. This listing, however, is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a Prime Contractor. BID EST.QTYJ ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT 1 Clearing and Grubbing 1.0 LS 2 Removal of Pavement 389.0 SY 3 Removal of Sidewalk 65.7 SY 4 Removal of Curb 222.0 LF 5 Removal of Light Poles 8.0 EA 6 Removals,As Per Plan 1.0 LS 32 Reinforcing Steel 65,453.5 LB 33 Reinforcing Steel, Epoxy Coated 40.1 LB 34 Piles,Steel Sheet 819.0 SF 35 Safety Fence 2,000.0 LF 38 Silt Fence 1,000.0 LF 39 Removal of Silt Fence 1,000'0 LF 40 Clean-Out of Silt Fence 500.0 LF 41 Filter Sock 500.0 LF 42 Filter Sock Removal 500.0 LF 111 Weed Barrier Fabric 7,085.0 SF 112 Hardwood Mulch 65.6 CY 113 Compost Soil Amendment 191.5 CY 114 Planter Soil System Includes Soil, Fabric, Drainage Mat,A 2,800.0 EA 115 Turf rass Sod 2,459.9 SY 116 Tree(Japanese Tree Lilac, 2.5"Cal. B&B 3.0 EA 117 Tree Thornless Cocks ur Hawthorn,2"Cal. B&B 6.0 EA 118 Shrubs Gro-Low Sumac, 5 Gal. Cont. 27.0 EA 119 Perennial Plants K.F. Feather Reed Grass, 1 Gal. Cont. 585.0 EA 120 Perennial Plants Flame Grass, 1 Gal. Cont. 120.0 EA 121 Perennial Plants Warrior Switch Grass, 1 Gal. Cont. 490.0 EA 122 Perennial Plants Hamelin Fountain Grass, 1 Gal. Cont. 389.0 EA 123 Perennial Plants Prairie Dro seed, 1 Gal. Cont. 400.0 EA 124 Perennial Plants Prairie Blues Little Bluestem, 1 Gal.Cont. 180.0 EA 125 1 Irrigation System 1.0 LS MBEIWBE GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that ten percent (10%) MBE goal and two percent (2%)WBE goal is attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no longer needed with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors, but the Pre-Bid Contact Information Form must be filled out completely. City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, Iowa 50703 Phone: (319)291-4429 M-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 T SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD ^# Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on (project name) in the area of(description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor) has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by(date)and (time). Subcontractor's Company Name Date Subcontractor's Signature Date Prime Bidder's Signature w M-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No.: Dear (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in connection with the above referenced project. (Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer, and all qualified bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin. If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) Form CCO-3 (11/28/2001) M-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBEIWBE LETTER) According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 2002, all MBE/WBE Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven (7) days prior to bid opening. T The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/WBE Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name: Address: Phone: Date: List of Specific items to be bid: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) ' Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)291-4429 Form CCO-5(06-20-2002) M-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 a) (1) o co ccnm a) m� � �c E o c0 � a o a) oo o a) 0 c UUo2 nE � 0cn cvmi � � ° Z UUm Cc mo ` om U w () Qm � Q) Y ca 0 0 o a) 3 0 0 w a o �n CL ai m = - Z o c . ° o U) LO a) B c m o o O0M c p m (D U 'a = o nn. : mm� o W wm EcD 3 o ° 0 Z U � 3 c o o E t .o- co aa a m w cnw E O a) m c °m L E m ° o� , a o° o2 Q m CD m0 � 2 2 i o (n a0 - Mo OL wOf d mC ° CO (? LL O 4) Q0w U 5 O c >, CO C wo cn Q) O U m E O OO U a) c cm ZO (nn c � E � n .c o o Z 0 L) c m � w O v, a) - a - c p cn m ' -2 m m 0) CD ~ c a) @ w °� � c o U C m 0. � � ma 3 0 c ° m aa)) m � = E o _o mm E o LU w 'c � c Imo m 0 � cc a) � a0 Ny m � — O m ° m w c o 0 o U) E m o Z O m o U ce) w a io O c 0 ° O 0 a) i. Q) a) CO m O c N •in N c w LL c a) L : c cn Wp � � ui s Y`o 3t U)) W o c°n Zti mw N N c a cm 3 W ' UL m cn v) 3 0 WZO CO a) g -0 � � r` W � w ° ~ E `� E � n m N cn vci E ma c Z w m a°) W ° O a) a) m ° CO Za c CD w = mow- w gw 3 a) c"a cLi �w � � m cn m m -o cn ° O w a) a a) 0) 0 mZ � � CJ E Z E c L c ° � o � OWp m 2 •S a) a�i > E U) o o m o o.E'ti � V � �� Oc co m � c � 3 � > N au� t m ~ 0 0 u- E E o 0 E w - v°)) gym •= c o a) o Tacit 2p m `6 'n Z c -0w T m m a"i o - aa ` o a) 3 w a) — a) a w 0 .: 0 L c c C U aj U U c O N O m U CO OU 0 Z •0 � m •Z m -cOo �°n 5 Q) m C W C a) V :o N W m c � cn O � � a) a) c E U) a) O c � ow a cmwi _ C nw w o o � : 02�Oa) o m m �4- 0 y Qaa) o � E oo= � mm > o m� m � 'n� m• •- � a ma co m `m � 3 �� � o �ccdoLn c av m �'0 m m w y c a) LLIU c in -0U _ 00C = ° c o ,.��+ m d N Q1 m E 'O -o U O O-N N O O a U U C w O v0 C C U O Q) 0H O .0L w . N N m3 U � v> ° •� F 0. W a) W O > rn Q w o m = c c o coo wo 22M o co -0m o v 0 � wwao o c co � mCo � o p �mj cgoa) Na) 0) : c � CD a) OO co <°na) 5 acc � o N N C U.O 0co CA ,--a c°a v°iw wco uv)) a) c m � m E c c � Z D ° � � � � p E CD mom o � Y m Zo c_ ;v c°) ca o c0i y- 3 Q -0 � w c c � • h c� � � c o L cn co ° � to > cn @ a ° � � Q�'i wU 3 � °) o = E m c c a) Q5) m E o 0° co o E am) o C)u o o O Fa- aw :3 E �U U) D! ca voom w mo o o ° cc Zomocc vA o 0 -6 Q c 0 0 m � a M 0 0 .J a) o 0Q •-- m0Z2DaQ 5 o c�� � o v 0 0 C:c � 02 E cn � o U m — 0 cd - ci 20 cd .ri 3 -6 Qiw � w � c c c ;a O V U m .@ n W c co m E m-0 � � m > � o f c t m m Q) t U E a) `° •a ° E ° E m � w oo c m °o V c� o ° a'a � Q U E`EoE -- Lm Q C U >, F '� w a) o) wEEo E IL a na-°)0 � Li 'D c�z 0- c riU v � cries H a �% � UUQ m U- M-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 / § - � � 4- 2 0 2 m \ 77 a m 0 a / ° $ ■ o � f = c co 0 0 \ 3 � oc b o _ 0 § CN � $ 2 « $ % 3 � _ o §k E f S / / / k 0 1 _ e c = / � f / § / / § E E G 2 '� U c « ■ f k a 6 / 0) \ 5 = ( k f J ® 2 ƒ o / / 0 = § S c \ o e ° f o \ Mn ƒ / rn E % & �\ � 0 [ % g m m 0 \/ L $ E o �\ \ / /c 2 5 a 7 om @ $ E c \ / ) / / � / / k � ® � 3 = ' 22M 22 ( k E � \ 0 � R ° i / / [ E � f w2 2 LL k as 2 S o oS ■ 2 _ LLJ o : & o o_ © ■ ch u a 0 co ) / / � E � k0 � < - � RE ak 22 t / & � m / 2 / -2 0 \ \ � & 7 � E b £ \ / \ U) Ef $ $ J . Z Z ' 20 § z \7 / f7 cnw $ 0 : b � >1 $ % 0) 2 ® 2 0 LU CL ƒ 0 /% � 7 / o � 0 2 kz � �.� 0 2 [ / bk � � � o = / / c % k2 \ (D � q E£ 0 ) � & 20 Qm � / -0 ) / � tm 2 LL O & f % & m e / - 2 wIL 2q ? % \ f � \ % ow # f g Ea 7 § 0 § « a mk qq � o � � ( t0 � k \ � k < o = m $ R _ ^ S 0 a9 L £ * » c 3 L = c & / w k a- 7 5 \ b %L \ ® / 0 o = « u2 »� � \ v@t \ 0tea ƒ / N zk a7 \ % mot / / - LU \ _ e o ® « ° 00 2 2 % § 6 2 Co / � » / / / & � \ o L \ 2aE f ^$ _0E g2 ƒ � Uj « 2 C: e3 / � ® � \ m E f ±[m $« § 22 � / LU \/ ) [ca . \ [ - o � % § E Eo q - \ Rf a \ƒ 2@ E U m U) (1) ¥ & gy m 5 E CERTIFIED _ MBE / WBE CONTRACTORS CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA CONTRACT COMPLIANCE OFFICE Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, Iowa 50703 City WEB Site: www.ci.waterloo.ia.us — Contract Compliance WEB Site for listing updates: http://www.wplwloo.lib.ia.us/contractcompliance/ Contact: Louis Starks, Contracts and Grants Coordinator Email: louis.starks(fi)waterloo-ia.org Phone: (319) 291-4429 Fax: (319) 291-4431 MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List Page 1 of CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS - CARTER ELECTRIC _ 725 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 232-9808 — Pager: (319) 235-4021 Contact: Derrick Carter Specializing in: _ ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CULPEPPER ELECTRIC 1731 Cottage Grove Avenue Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 235-0885 Fax: (319) 236-8177 _ Contact: Martin Culpepper Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Licensed Electrician Specializing in: _ ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 339 Albany Street Waterloo, IA 50703 — Phone: (319) 961-1659 Contact: Sammy Daniels Specializing in: — ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS D.C. CORPORATION 426 Beech Street Waterloo, IA 50703 _ Phone: (319) 236-9075 FAX: (319) 236-0515 Contact: Terry Phillips — Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVEWAYS, TRUCKING (ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION GREER'S WORKS 2003 Plainview Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 233-4701 Contact: Willie Greer Specializing in: DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION LOVE'S ENTERPRISE _ 835 West Fifth St. P.O. Box 246 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319) 233-3260 Contact: David Love Certified: Iowa DOT, City of Waterloo Certified MBE Specializing in: CONCRETE PAVING, ASPHALT, DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, TRUCKING OLD GREER'S WORKS 2309 Springview Street Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 233-2150 Contact: David L. Greer, Sr. Specializing in: GENERAL CONSTRUCTION PAULINE COMPANY, INC. 139 Clark Street P. O. Box 1623 Waterloo, lA 50703 Phone: (319)236-2345 FAX: (319) 236-1568 MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List Page 3 of 5 email: DJToay aol.com Certified: Targeted Small Business, Iowa DOT, City of Waterloo Certified MBE — Contact: W.C. Stokes, Owner Specializing in: — EROSION CONTROL, TRUCKING, GUARDRAIL, CLEARING AND GRUBBING CONCRETE PAVING, ASPHALT, CURB AND GUTTER, DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, MASONRY WORK, ROOFING, CD BASKETS, ROAD WAY PIPE, TILE LOCATING, _ REVETMENT, SHOULDERS, FIELD FENCE, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION WORK QUICK CONSTRUCTION - 217 Bates Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 215-4166 — Contact: Leroy Harrington Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION -' CHARLIE SCHAUF TRUCKING 627 Adams Street Waterloo, IA 50703 — Phone: (319) 232-4717 Contact: Charles Schauf Specializing in: — TRUCKING CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS - ATLAS PAINTING, INC.* 911 Sycamore Street — P.O. BOX 65 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319) 232-9164 Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING MBE„WBL Certified Contractors List Page 4 of 5 L PETERMAN & HAES CARPET ONE* 4003 University Avenue Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone : (319) 233-6131 FAX: (319) 233-6133 email: JR11486&cfu.net Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact : Carol Reese Specializing in: FLOOR COVERING WATCO CONSTRUCTION, INC.* 2920 Texas Street Waterloo, IA 50702 Phone : (319) 233-7481 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact : Patricia J. Kimball Specializing in: STORM SEWER, INLETS, DRAIN TILE, WATER MAIN, SANITARY SEWER, INTAKE STRUCTURES * DENOTES WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE MBE/WBE Certified Contractors List Page 5 of 5 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.) -- All questions must be answered and the date given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of bidder. 2. Permanent main office address. 3. When organized. 4. If a corporation, when incorporated. 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. General character of work performed by your company. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, an the month and year completed. 11. List your major equipment available for this contract. 12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project. 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers. 14. Credit available: $ 15. Give bank reference: 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa? SQ-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this _ Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at this day of , 200_. (Name of Bidder) By: Title: — State of ) ss: — County of ) being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of 200_. — Notary Public — My commission expires SQ-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work covered by this contract consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all operations, in connection with the F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA, CITY CONTRACT NO. 763, as shown on the contract drawings and in accordance with these specifications. ` The contract drawings, which accompany and form a part of this contract and specifications, are dated January 11, 2010 . They have the general title of F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA, CITY CONTRACT NO. 763. The drawings are numbered and separately entitled as follows: -- SHEET NO. DESCRIPTION C-1.1 Title Sheet and Plan Certifications _ C-1.2 Legend Sheet and Utility Contacts C-1.3-C-1.5 Typical Cross Sections and Details C-1.6-C-1.11 Quantities, Estimate Reference Information, Standard Notes C-2.1 -C-2.2 Removal Sheets C-3.1 -C-3.10 Plan Sheets C-4.1 -C-4.8 Utility Sheets C-5.1 -C-5.7 Structural Sheets C-6.1 -C-6.3 Staging Notes C-6.4 Pollution Prevention Plan C-6.5-C-6.6 Geometric Details C-6.7 Traffic Control Plan C-6.8 Right-of-Way Information E-0.0-E-1.7 Electrical Sheets X-1.1 -X-1.7 Cross Sections A1.00-A1.03 Architectural Site Plans A2.01 -A2.02 Building Plans A3.00-A3.18 Sections A4.00-A4.02 Elevations A5.00 Details L-1.1 -1-1.3 Landscaping Details L-2.1 -L-2.3 Irrigation Details The Iowa Department of Transportation English Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series 2009 (as referenced) are to be used along with the special provisions and General Specifications for Construction described herein and shall be considered as part of the contract documents. 2. CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS All requirements of other specifications contained in the contract documents which conflict with the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void. 3. DUMPING AREAS Excess material resulting from construction operations shall be hauled to the County Landfill or other area secured by the Contractor and approved by the City Engineer. Rubble, rubbish, trees, brush, and other unsuitable backfill material, as designated by the City Engineer, shall be hauled GSP-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 to the County Landfill. All Landfill charges are to be considered incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the Contractor. — 4. CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE The Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure the safety and — protection to existing features located near or within the limits of construction. Damage caused by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by the Engineer, shall be considered the Contractor's responsibility. — 5. REMOVED MATERIALS All materials removed, as part of this Contract shall remain the property of the City unless the City determines that he materials are not salvageable and the City does not want to retain ownership of the materials. Materials designated in the field by the Engineer as non-salvageable shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All other materials shall be — transported to locations as directed by the Engineer. No separate measurement or payment will be made for hauling or disposing of removed materials and it shall be considered incidental to applicable items. — 6. MAILBOXES The Contractor shall notify the United States Postal Department of mailboxes that interfere with — any part of the work before removing them, and the Contractor will relocate them as required by the Postmaster. The removal and replacement of mailboxes will not be considered for direct payment, but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. 7. PAY ITEMS All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials, delivery of — these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant and miscellaneous work needed to make the item complete. All such cost shall be incidental to the proposed item to which it applies and shall not be considered for separate payment. 8. BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE ITEMS The Contractor shall, immediately upon execution and delivery of the contract, before the first estimate for payment is made, deliver to the City Engineer a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the lump sum contract prices. The submitted breakdown shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to any payment of any lump sum price item. 9. PERMISSION TO HAUL OVER STREETS, RAILROADS AND HIGHWAYS The Contractor will be required to secure, from the proper authorities, permission or permit which — may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property, and any hauling operations of the Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of such permits, permission, and to all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement of equipment over streets, railroads, highways and private property. Any costs or inconvenience caused by obtaining any necessary permits or permission shall be considered completely covered by the price bid for the items in the proposal. 10. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING The City Engineer shall approve Contractor's work schedule prior to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. The City Engineer may change the schedule to accommodate changing construction conditions. GSP-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this contract with contractors performing work .-. under other contracts,which may be performed concurrently. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Police, Fire, Street and Engineering Departments of the closing and opening of streets. The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed" and diligently execute the work of the contract to completion. 11. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before any work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Engineer to hold a pre- construction conference to discuss problems and schedules of contracts. 12. UNDERGROUND UTILITIES It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the location of gas lines, water lines, electric, telephone, and cable television cables or wires from the various utility companies and the City electrician before starting any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any underground utilities. The Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on the plans so -' that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered incidental to other items of work. If the Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly located, the resolution of the additional costs incurred shall be made between the Contractor and the respective utility company. 13. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STREET SIGNS The Contractor shall contact the City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department to have any street sign that will be affected by construction removed and replaced when the work has been completed. 14. TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall provide erect and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, keep and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the Engineer, to ensure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. The Engineer shall review all barricading plans. The Contractor shall determine, provide and obtain approval from the City Engineer on all detour locations for all street closings, barricades and posting prior to construction. These shall meet requirements of the City Police Traffic Department. The Contractor shall notify the City Engineer's Office and the Police, Fire and Street Departments when the street is closed for construction. All barricading shall be in accordance with the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Street and Highways." Encapsulated lens sheeting is not required on this project. 15. GRADES, LINES, LEVELS AND SURVEYS All necessary grades, lines, levels and surveys shall be established by AECOM and maintained by the Contractor. GSP-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels and dimensions as sown on the drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the same to AECOM before commencing work. — 16. SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC The Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect the life and health of all — persons employed on this project and the public. He shall provide necessary safety devices and safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident prevention practices. All such protection shall be furnished to employees without cost. — No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection, but shall be considered incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work area. 17. WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing forty-eight (48) hours in advance if work on — Saturday is planned. By noon the Friday before the planned Saturday work, the Contractor shall confirm the Saturday work schedule with the project inspector. Work on Sunday requires prior approval of the Engineer in accordance with the Waterloo — Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2010 due to City holidays: September 4-6, November 25-29, December 23-27 and December 31; and the following days in 2011: January 1-3, May 28-31 and July 2-5. — GSP-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1. TRAFFIC CONTROL—IMPROPER MAINTENANCE -- The Engineer, or authorized representative, shall periodically review traffic control that has been put in place by the Contractor. If traffic control devices are found to be without proper maintenance, penalties shall be assessed. Improper maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, the following situations: A. Less than 100 percent of lights in working order. B. Any barricade or sign moved or tipped over. C. Fencing not supported in a vertical position. D. Fencing not placed around excavations when workers/equipment are not working at the location. E. Lack of proper barricades or signage. Each incident is treated as a separate citation on an individual basis. It is not intended that minor deficiencies be price adjusted if corrected the day notification is given. In addition to a price adjustment, the Engineer may suspend work for irresponsible and/or repeated failure to construct the project using proper traffic control procedures. Penalties: 1st Offense Written warning given by City. 2nd Offense $ 100 3rd Offense $ 250 4th Offense $ 500 5th Offense $1,000 6th Offense Engineer's discretion (amount or more equal or greater than $1,000) 2. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the Contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of$500.00 per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the Contractor does, or could have worked from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sundays if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list item do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for such work, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in writing a request that working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed the following construction season. This amount is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. SP-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 3. HAUL ROUTES Haul routes to and from the project site shall be submitted for review by the Engineer. In general, the Contractor shall request haul routes over the main streets in the area, staying on streets within the project as much as possible and should not include truck-embargoed streets. 4. STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS The Standard Specifications, which are referenced in the contract documents, are designated as _ follows: [DOT STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - "Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Iowa Department of Transportation, Ames, Iowa, Series 2009" (unless otherwise noted)and current revisions thereof. WATERLOO STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS - "Standard Specifications for Municipal Public Works _ Construction, City of Waterloo, Iowa." 5. PERCENT OF CONTRACT TO BE PERFORMED BY CONTRACTOR A. The prime contractor shall be required to perform at least 35 percent of the total contract amount of the project. 6. SPECIAL PROVISIONS — Standard Specifications are amended by the following additions. These are Special Provisions and shall prevail over those published in the Standard Specifications. — Section 100 - Removals Section 101 - Earthwork Section 102 -Granular Materials Section 103 - Engineering Fabric Section 104 - PCC Pavement Section 105 -Colored, Tooled PCC Pavement, 6-In. -- Section 106 - HMA Pavement Section 107 - Pavement Markings Section 108 -Storm Sewer Section 109 -Subdrain — Section 110 -Structural Elements Section 111 - Railing Section 112 - Erosion Control — Section 113 -Mobilization Section 114 -Traffic Control Section 115- Dock Equipment _ Section 116 - Fountain Section 502 -Sanitary Sewers Section 512 -Gatewells Section 01316- Engineer's Status During Construction Section 01457-Testing Pressure Mains Section 02316-Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting Section 02510- Disinfection of Potable Water Mains Section 02538-Testing Sewer Systems — Section 02723-Water Main Systems Section 16050 - Basic Materials and Methods Section 16060-Grounding -- Section 16070- Supporting Devices S P-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 Section 16075- Electrical Identification Section 16135- Underground Ducts and Manholes _ Section 16210- Electric Service Section 03 30 00-Cast-In-Place Concrete Section 05 31 00 -Steel Decking Section 05 40 00-Cold-Formed Metal Framing -- Section 05 50 00- Metal Fabrications Section 06 10 00- Rough Carpentry Section 07 21 00-Thermal Insulation Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers Section 07 42 13- Metal Wall Panels Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim -- Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories Section 07 76 00- Roof Pavers Section 07 90 05-Joint Sealers Section 08 11 13- Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Section 08 71 00- Door Hardware Section 09 90 00- Paints and Coatings Section 32 36 23-Stone Fabrications Section 32 37 00-Steel Bench Seating Assemblies Section 32 80 00 - Irrigation System Section 32 91 00-Soil Preparation Section 32 92 23-Turfgrass Sod Section 32 93 00 -Plant Material 7. QUANTITY ADJUSTMENTS ~ The following Bid Items are exempted from consideration under the provisions of Section B. "Scope of Work," paragraph 7 of the "General Specifications for Construction" concerning the variance of the "As- Built" quantity of the listed item by more than twenty (20%) percent from the estimated quantity specified in the contract. -- BID ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. QTY. 17 Engineering Fabric 1,000.0 .,, 22 HMA Pavement 650.0 29 Subdrain, Standard, Perforated, 4-Inch 968.0 30 Subdrain, Standard, Perforated, 8-Inch 206.0 35 Safety Fence 2,000.0 38 Silt Fence 1,000.0 39 Removal of Silt Fence 1,000.0 40 jClean-Out of Silt Fence 500.0 —. 41 Filter Sock 500.0 42 Filter Sock Removal 500.0 SP-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 100 REMOVALS Clearing and Grubbing Removal of Pavement Removal of Sidewalk Removal of Curb Removal of Light Poles Removals, As Per Plan 100-1 GENERAL A. Description: 1. Removal of a►I items needed to complete the work, as indicated in the plans. 100-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications: 1. In accordance with IDOT specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series 2009, Sections 2101, 2510, 2511 and 2514 and as amended herein. 100-3 EXECUTION A. Disposal: -- 1. Construction shall be in accordance with Sections 2401, 2510, 2511 and 2514 of the IDOT Specifications. Disposal shall be made in accordance with all applicable federal, state, county and local laws and regulations. 100-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Clearing and Grubbing, will not be measured individually. Upon completion of removals indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall be paid the Contract amount. 2. Removal of Pavement. The area of pavement removed will be measured to the nearest square boot by the Engineer. Upon completion of removals indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall be paid the Contract amount. 3. Removal of Sidewalk. The area of sidewalk removed will be measured to the nearest square boot by the Engineer. Upon completion of removals indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall be paid the Contract amount. 4. Removal of Curb. The length of curb removed will be measured to the nearest foot by the Engineer. Upon completion of removals indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall be paid the Contract amount. 5. Removal of Light Poles. The number of light poles removed in accordance with the Plans will be counted by the Engineer. Upon completion of removals indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall be paid the Contract amount. 6. Removals, As Per Plan, will not be measured individually. Upon completion of removals indicated in the plans, the Contractor shall be paid the Contract amount. 100-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. _- *** END OF SECTION 100-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 101 EARTHWORK Excavation, Class 10 --- Excavation, Class 10,Waste Excavation, Class 12, Rock Topsoil, Strip Topsoil, Furnish and Spread Excavation, Class 20 Excavation, Class 22, Rock Excavation, Class 22, Unsuitable -- Compaction With Moisture and Density Control 101-1 GENERAL A. Description: 1. This section shall cover all earthwork to be encountered in this project. Any work not specifically listed as a bid item or mentioned in the method of measurement will be considered as incidental to the work to which it pertains and will not be paid separately. 2. Class 20 Excavation shall consist of excavation, grading, borrow, construction of slopes and embankments necessary for the construction of the retaining walls and slabs to the lines, grades and dimensions shown on the drawings and in accordance with these specifications. Compaction shall be as indicated in the plans. 3. Class 2 Excavation shall consist of the excavation of weathered limestone material discovered during construction of footings. 101-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications: 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 2. Construction shall be in accordance with Sections 2102, 2104, 2107 and 2402 of the IDOT Specifications, except as amended herein. 101-3 EXECUTION A. Class 10 Excavation: 1. The work described under Class 10 Excavation shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2102 and shall be finished in a workmanlike manner to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the drawings. 2. Overhaul will not be measured or paid for separately for this project, but will be considered incidental to this bid item. 101-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Class 12 Excavation: 1. The work described under Class 12 Excavation shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2102 and shall be finished in a workmanlike manner to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the drawings. _ 2. Overhaul will not be measured or paid for separately for this project, but will be considered incidental to this bid item. C. Class 20 Excavation: 1. The work described under Class 20 Excavation shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2402 and shall be finished in a workmanlike manner to the lines, grades _ and elevations shown on the drawings. 2. Overhaul will not be measured or paid for separately for this project, but will be considered incidental to this bid item. D. Class 22 Excavation: 1. The work described under Class 22 Excavation shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2402 and shall be finished in a workmanlike manner to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the drawings. 2. Overhaul will not be measured or paid for separately for this project, but will be considered incidental to this bid item. — E. Topsoil: 1. The work described under Topsoil shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2105 — and shall be finished in a workmanlike manner to the lines, grades and elevations shown on the drawings. 2. Overhaul will not be measured or paid for separately for this project, but will be -- considered incidental to this bid item. F. Compaction With Moisture and Density Control: Compaction of backfill material shall be in accordance with Section 2107.03.H. 101-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Excavation. Class 10. Class 10 Excavation will be measured in cubic yards per IDOT Standard Specifications. 2. Excavation, Class 12. Class 12 Excavation will be measured in cubic yards per IDOT Standard Specifications. 3. Excavation, Class 20. Class 20 Excavation will be measured in cubic yards per IDOT Standard Specifications. 4. Excavation. Class 22. Class 22 Excavation will be measured in cubic yards per IDOT Standard Specifications. — 5. Topsoil. Topsoil will be measured in cubic yards per IDOT Standard Specifications. 6. Compaction With Moisture and Density Control. Compaction With Moisture and Density Control will be measured in cubic yards per IDOT Standard Specifications. 101-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION 101-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 102 GRANULAR MATERIALS Modified Subbase 102-1 GENERAL A. Description: 1. Modified Subbase shall be in accordance with Sections 2115 and 4123 of the IDOT Specifications. 102-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. Referenced Specifications: 1. Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Iowa Department of Transportation, Series of 2009, and all current supplemental specifications (Iowa DOT Specifications). 2. Construction shall be in accordance with Sections 2115 and 4123 of the IDOT Specifications, —. except as amended herein. 102-3 MATERIALS A. Modified Subbase material shall meet the requirements of Section 4123 of the IDOT Specifications. 102-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Modified Subbase: Modified Subbase will be measured in cubic yards per the IDOT Specifications. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity(as determined in the Method of Measurement)by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION 102-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 103 ENGINEERING FABRIC Geogrid Reinforcement 103-1 DESCRIPTION A. This work shall include the installation of engineering fabric as directed by the Engineer. B. This work shall include the installation of geogrid reinforcement as indicated in the typical sections. 103-2 SPECIFICATIONS C. IDOT SPECIFICATIONS 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 103-3 EXECUTION A. Engineering Fabric shall be installed in accordance with Section 2524 of the IDOT Specifications and the Contract Documents. B. Geogrid Installation: .._ 1. The geogrid shall be laid at the proper elevation and alignment as shown on the construction drawings. 2. The geogrid shall be installed in accordance with the installation guidelines provided by the manufacturer or as directed by the Engineer. 3. The geogrid may be temporarily secured in place with ties, staples, pins, sand bags or backfill as required by fill properties, fill placement procedures or weather conditions or as directed by the Engineer. 103-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 1. Engineering Fabric. The quantity of Engineering Fabric will be measured in accordance with the IDOT Specifications. 2. Geogrid Reinforcement. The Engineer will measure the area of geogrid reinforcement placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Measurement shall not include areas where geogrid is overlapped during installation. B. BASIS OF PAYMENT 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. * *" END OF SECTION 103-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 104 PCC PAVEMENT PCC Pavement, 6-In. PCC Pavement, 8-In. Curb and Gutter, 2.5-In. Sidewalk, PC Concrete,4-In. Sidewalk, PC Concrete, 6-In. Remove and Replace Curbs 104-1 GENERAL A. The work covered in this section of the specifications consists of the construction of Portland cement concrete pavements of varying full depth thicknesses at the location shown on the plans. 104-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications-Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Iowa Department of Transportation, Series of 2009 and all current Supplemental Specifications. �. B. Construction shall be in accordance with Section 2301 of the IDOT Specifications,except as modified below. C. ASTM -American Society for Testing Materials. D. AASHTO -American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials. 104-3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. REQUIRED CERTIFICATIONS 1. Certification of P.C. concrete ingredients from materials producers. 2. A mix design in accordance with these specifications shall be submitted and certification from the supplier that the P.C. concrete furnished for this project meets the submitted mix design. 104-4 . MATERIALS A. P.C. concrete paving shall be standard or slip formed in accordance with Section 2301 of the IDOT Specifications. 1. Concrete shall be Class C, Mix No. C-4. The use of water reducing admixtures and fly ash are allowed within the limitations of IDOT Specification Section 2301.04. 2. Aggregate durability shall be Class 3 or better. B. Curing compound for paving shall meet the requirements of Section 4105 of the IDOT Specifications. C. Joint sealer for paving and approach expansion and contraction joints shall be in accordance with one of the appropriate materials specified in Section 4136 of the IDOT Specifications. D. Reinforcement for paving shall meet the requirements of Section 4151 of the IDOT Specifications. 104-5 EXECUTION A. Construction of P.C. concrete paving shall meet the requirements of Section 2301 of the IDOT Specifications and shall be completed in a workmanlike manner to the lines, grades, thicknesses, -- typical cross sections and elevations shown on the Drawings. 104-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Section 2316, Pavement Smoothness, shall not apply to this project. C. No adjustment in unit price will be made using paving thickness index for this project. 104-6 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 1. PCC Pavement,6-In. The Engineer will measure the square yards of 6-inch PCC pavement placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. PCC Pavement,8-In. The Engineer will measure the square yards of 8-inch PCC pavement placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3. Curb and Gutter.2.5-In. The Engineer will measure the square yards of curb and gutter,2.5- inch placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 4. Sidewalk, PC Concrete,4-In. The Engineer will measure the square yards of 4-inch sidewalk placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 5. Sidewalk,PC Concrete,6-In. The Engineer will measure the square yards of 6-inch sidewalk placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 6. Remove and Replace Curb. The Engineer will measure the square yards of curb removed and replaced in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. BASIS OF PAYMENT -- 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity(as determined in the Method of Measurement)by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. ** * END OF SECTION 104-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 105 COLORED,TOOLED PCC PAVEMENT, 6-IN. 105-1 DESCRIPTION A. Summary: This work includes the construction of colored, tooled PCC pavement to the lines and grades shown on the plans, including reinforcement bar systems. The work shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation required to install the colored and tooled PCC pavement. B. Quality Assurance: 1. Design Criteria: The concrete mix used with pigment added shall be Class C-4, Class 3 _ aggregate meeting the requirements of the Standard Specifications. The aggregate,cement, and integral color shall be from the same source identical throughout the entire project. The material sources and mix proportions for this project shall be accurately recorded and furnished to the Engineer at the completion of the project. 2. Job Mock-Up: Construct on the job-site a mock-up of 10-foot by 10-foot concrete slab, including all colors and jointing types planned for construction. Mock-up shall represent the _ final work in material, finish and texture. Leave the accepted mock-up in place until all pavement work is completed and accepted. For accurate color, the quantity of concrete mixed to produce the sample should not be less than 2 cubic yards(or not less than 1/3 the capacity of the mixing drum on the ready-mix truck)and should always be in full cubic yard increments. Excess material shall be.discarded according to local regulations. Contractor may, at his own risk, use the planned pavement as the job mock-up. If mock-up is not acceptable, it shall be removed at the contractor's expense. 3. Construct mock-up using processes and techniques intended for use on permanent work, including curing procedures. Include samples of control, construction, and expansion joints in sample panels. Mock-up shall be produced by the individual workers who will perform the work for the Project. 4. Samples: Submit samples of color to the Engineer for approval prior to building a mock-up section. 5. Test Reports: Submit certified test reports of pigment showing compliance with ACI 303.1, ASTM C 979,ASTM C494 and AASHTO M194. Color pigments shall be light fast,wettable, = weather resistant, ultra-violet resistant, alkali resistant, and free of deleterious fillers and extenders. _ 6. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall have minimum 5 years experience in the production of specified products. 7. Installer Qualifications: An installer shall have minimum 5 years experience with work of similar scope and quality,and shall be able to provide list of 3 projects similar in scope to this project which have been completed within the local area to prove qualifications. 105-2 MATERIAL A. Integral Color: The integral color shall be Tan and Dark Gray by L.M.Scofield Company, Solomon Grind-Chem Service, Inc.,Chem Masters Chemtint,or approved equal. The integral color admixture shall be added to the concrete mix at the batch plant as per manufacturer's recommendation. Exact color determination will be from manufacturer's standard color palate and from Job Mock-Up. 105-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Sealant: Sealant shall comply with ASTM C 309 as anon-yellowing,curing membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Contractor shall submit manufacturer's data for sealant for approval. C. Antiquing Release: A colored, powered bond breaker shall be used when imprinting surface texture. Antiquing agent shall be L. M. Scyofield Lithochrome Antiquing Release, Brick Form Antiquing Release, or approved equal. 105-3 CONSTRUCTION A. A pre-pour conference shall be scheduled a minimum of 14 days prior to first Colored Concrete Pavement placement. Conference shall be conducted by Contractor. Contractor shall insure representatives of the Paving Contractor,Concrete Supplier,Aggregate Supplier,Admixture Supplier, City of Waterloo and AECOM are present at meeting. Purpose of meeting is to: - Discuss concrete mix proportions to insure compliance with specifications and admixture supplier requirements. — - Discuss contractor's paving sequence and operations - Discuss finishing work, including jointing, surface texturing, release agent and sealing operations. _ - to paving to insure the quality of the final Discuss any other issues needing resolution prior pavement product. B. Construction and Installation: — 1. Concrete placement shall be in accordance with Section 2301 of the Standard Specifications and manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Integrally Colored Concrete Environmental Requirements: a. Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are applied. b. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow, or frost is forecast within 24-hours. Protect fresh concrete from moisture and freezing. C. Comply with professional practices described in ACI 305R and ACI 306R. -� C. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. Mix times shall meet manufacturer's written recommendations. D. Do not add water to concrete mix in field. E. Admixture: The Engineer must approve the use of admixtures. Calcium chloride admixture is not allowed. F. Integral Mix: Mix color pigment into the designated mix at the rate recommended by the manufacturer — to produce the specified color. G. Slump shall be maintained at 3 to 4 inches. Addition of a super-plasticizer is acceptable to improve the placing and finishing of concrete. While concrete is still in the plastic stage of set, tooling and •.- finishing shall be done to make the desired surface. H. Tooled Joints: Joints shall be made with a 1/2 inch deep parting tool to produce straight lines of uniform depth in the patterns as detailed in the plans. 105-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 _ I. Broom Finish: Broom finish applies to areas of standard color pavement. J. Surface Finish: The entire surface of the colored,tooled concrete shall be textured using a system of pattern-matched tools to provide a'fractured slate'appearance. The surface texturing shall be done in such a manner as to provide a uniform appearance over the entire paved area. All work shall be done in accordance with manufacturer's guidelines. The use of a release agent prior to texturing the concrete is recommended. Excess release material shall be removed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. K. Cleaning: Prior to sealing,the entire surface of the pavement shall be thoroughly cleaned to insure no foreign material is sealed with the pavement. This may require the use of hand tools, detergent, power-washing and/or other tools as needed to insure the surface is clear of all debris,effervescence, concrete dust, and all other materials. L. Curing: The use of white-pigmented cure compounds, burlap, plastic sheeting,or fogging with water is not allowed. M. Sealant: Sealant shall be specifically recommended by manufacturer of integral color admixture for use with their product. Sealant shall be applied in a fine spray to form a continuous, uniform film on the surface as soon as the free water has appreciably disappeared. Surface shall be protected from _ construction damage, dirt,debris,oil,etc. by covering with waterproof paper for a period of 24 hours. A second sealant application shall then be made and protected from foot traffic for a minimum of 8 hours and vehicular traffic for a minimum of 7 days. N. The Contractor shall patch and repair all defects in the surface. O. In areas of Standard Pavement Color paid for under this time, all other requirements, including sealing, shall apply. P. At time of final acceptance, the entire plaza area shall be thoroughly cleaned and resealed. -- 105.4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: The quantity of colored, tooled PCC pavement constructed will be computed in square yards by the Engineer from measurements of the finished surface. Deductions will not be made for fixtures having an area of 1 square yard or less. Initial mock-up areas will be measured and included for payment. If planned overlooks are used as job mock-up areas, these areas will only be measured once. B. Basis of Payment: For the area of colored,tooled PCC,pavement measured, the Contractor will be paid the contract unit price per square yard. This payment shall be full compensation for all _ equipment, tools, labor and materials necessary to construct colored, tooled PCC pavement as specified in the contract documents. Removal of mock-up will not be measured or paid for separately, but shall be considered incidental to this bid item. *** END OF SECTION 105-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 106 HMA PAVEMENT HMA Surfacing 106.1 DESCRIPTION A. Furnishing and constructing hot mix asphalt (HMA) paving composed of mineral aggregate and bituminous material mixed in central mixing plant. Existing HMA removals shall be disposed of by the CONTRACTOR. 106.2 DEFINITIONS A. IDOT Specifications: Iowa Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction," Series of 2009, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 106.3 SUBMITTALS A. Job mix formula falling within limits of mix design specification. _ B. Certifications of compliance with Specifications for aggregate quality and gradation and asphalt cement quality and penetration or viscosity from producer. 106.4 PRODUCTS A. Materials and Mix 1. In accordance with Subsection 2303.02 of"IDOT Specifications." a. Surface Course and Base Course: HMA, 1M, S 1/2", 60% CR, PG 58-28 asphalt, Type A aggregate. 2. Primer or Tack Coat Bitumen: SS-1, SS-1 H, CSS-1 or CSS-1 H. 106.5 PREPARATION A. Check subgrade for soundness, grade, and cross-section. B. Paving plant equipment and operation shall be in accordance with Subsections 2303.04 and supplemental Section 986 of"IDOT Specifications." 106.6 INSTALLATION A. Equipment for Placing HMA: In accordance with Subsection 2303.05 of"IDOT Specifications." .— B. Placing Leveling and Strengthening Courses: In accordance with Subsection 2303.06 of "IDOT Specifications." Max lift shall be 3 in. C. Placing Asphalt Cement Concrete Mixture: In accordance with Subsection 2303.08 of "IDOT Specifications." D. Handling and Delivery: In accordance with Subsection 2303.09 of"IDOT Specifications." E. Hand Spreading: In accordance with Subsection 2303.10 of"IDOT Specifications." 106-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 F. Compaction (Class 113): In accordance with Subsection 2303.12 and supplemental Section 972 of "IDOT Specifications." G. Joints: In accordance with Subsection 2303.13 of"IDOT Specifications." H. Fixtures in Pavement Surface: In accordance with Subsection 2303.14 of"IDOT Specifications." — I. Limitations: In accordance with Subsection 2303.18 of"IDOT Specifications." J. Surfacing Intersecting Roads, Driveways, and Turnouts: In accordance with Subsection 2303.19 of "IDOT Specifications." K. Maintenance of Base: In accordance with Subsection 2303.22 of"IDOT Specifications." L. Each truck delivering asphalt cement surface material shall be accompanied by ticket showing net, tare, and gross weights signed by scale operator. Give delivery tickets to ENGINEER'S representative. Unused or wasted materials delivered will be estimated by the ENGINEER and _ deducted from amount delivered. 106.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL _ A. Water test finished surface to determine no water ponded on surface. B. After finishing rolling, visually inspect each layer to ensure steel and rubber-tired roller distortions smoothed, long joints smoothly constructed, and general riding quality is satisfactory. 1. Surface shall not deviate from straight line by more than 1/8 in. in 10 ft. 2. Correct unsatisfactory Work by removal and replacement or measures permitted at discretion of the ENGINEER. C. The CONTRACTOR shall assist the ENGINEER in performing field checks to determine if nominal 3- in. thickness lifts are being maintained. 106.8 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. HMA used for paving will be measured in square yards computed from field measurements. Compacted asphalt thickness shall match existing. Primer or tack coat bitumen and asphalt cement will not be measured separately for payment but shall be considered as incidental to the contract unit — price per square yard of HMA paving. The contract unit price per square yard of HMA paving shall be considered as full compensation for furnishing all materials, equipment, labor and tools and for performing all work in accordance with these Specifications. — *** END OF SECTION 4 106-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 — SECTION 107 PAVEMENT MARKINGS Painted Pavement Markings,Waterborne or Solvent-Based 107-1 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this section includes furnishing, installation and maintenance of pavement markings. 107-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications: 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 107-3 EXECUTION A. Provide painted pavement markings in accordance with Section 2527 of the IDOT Specifications and as indicated in the Contract Documents. 107-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Painted Pavement Markings, Waterborne or Solvent-Based. Pavement Markings will be measured in stations per IDOT Specifications. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION * * ' 107-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 108 STORM SEWER Adjustment of Fixtures SW-404 Manhole Sewer Pipe, 2000D Storm 108-1 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this section includes construction of storm sewer pipe as shown in the Contract Documents. 108-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT SPECIFICATIONS 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 108-3 EXECUTION A. Construction shall be in accordance with Section 2503 of the IDOT Specifications. B. [DOT Standard Road Plans RF-1, RF-2, RF-13, RF-21, SW-404 and SW-602 are included and considered to be part of these specifications. 108-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 1. Ad[ustment of Fixtures will be measured each per [DOT Specifications. 2. SW-404 Manhole. Utility Accesses will be measured each per IDOT Specifications. 3. Intake, Special. Intakes will be measured each per IDOT Specifications. 4. Sewer Pipe, 2600D Storm, 12-In. Dia. Storm sewer pipe will be measured per lineal foot per IDOT Specifications. 5. Sewer Pipe, 2000D Storm, 24-In. Dia. Storm sewer pipe will be measured per lineal foot per IDOT Specifications. —` 6. Sewer Pipe, 2000D Storm, 42-In. Dia. Storm sewer pipe will be measured per lineal foot per IDOT Specifications. B. BASIS OF PAYMENT 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. ** END OF SECTION 108-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 109 SUBDRAIN Subdrain, Perforated 4-In. Diameter Subdrain, Perforated 8-In. Diameter 109-1 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this section includes furnishing and installing miscellaneous subdrains and Subdrain outlets of the size and type shown in the Contract Documents. 109-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT SPECIFICATIONS 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway _ and Bridge Construction, Series of 2001, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 109-3 EXECUTION A. Construction shall be in accordance with Section 2502 of the IDOT Specifications. B. IDOT Standard Road Plans RF-19C is included and considered to be part of these specifications. 109-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 1. Subdrain, Longitudinal, 4-In Diameter. The Engineer will measure the length of 4-Inch Subdrain placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 2. Subdrain, Longitudinal, 8-In Diameter. The Engineer will measure the length of 8-Inch Subdrain placed in accordance with the Contract Documents. B. BASIS OF PAYMENT 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. ** * END OF SECTION *** 109-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 110 STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS Structural Concrete Reinforcing Steel Reinforcing Steel, Epoxy Coated Piles, Steel Sheet 110-1 DESCRIPTION r A. Work under this section includes furnishing and use of structural elements used in the construction of the retaining walls, floodwall and other structures. 110-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT SPECIFICATIONS 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 110-3 EXECUTION A. Structural Concrete shall meet the requirements of Section 2403 of the IDOT Specifications, - , except as amended and modified in the plans. B. Reinforcing Steel shall meet the requirements of Section 2404 of the IDOT Specifications, except as amended and modified in the plans. C. Steel Sheet Piles shall meet the requirements of Sections 2501 and 4167 of the IDOT Specifications, except as amended and modified in the plans. 110-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. METHOD OF MEASUREMENT 1. Structural Concrete. Structural Concrete will be measured in accordance with IDOT Specifications Section 2403. 2. Reinforcing Steel. Reinforcing Steel will be measured in accordance with IDOT Specifications Section 2404. 3. Reinforcing Steel, Epoxy Coated. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel will be measured in accordance with IDOT Specifications Section 2404. 4. Piles, Steel Sheet. Steel Sheet Pile will be measured in accordance with IDOT Specifications Section 2501. _ B. BASIS OF PAYMENT 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION 110-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 111 RAILING Safety Fence Handrailing, As Per Plan Chain Link Fence 111-1 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this section includes fabrication and installation of fencing and handrailing. 111-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications: 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 111-3 EXECUTION A. Construction of Handrailing shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2414. B. Construction of Chain Link Fence shall be in accordance with IDOT Specification 2519. 111-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Safety Fence. Safety Fence will be measured in lineal feet. 2. Handrailing. Handrailing will be measured in lineal feet per IDOT Specifications. 3. Chain Link Fence. Chain Link Fence will be measured in lineal feet. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION 111-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 112 EROSION CONTROL Silt Fence Removal of Silt Fence Clean-Out of Silt Fence Filter Sock Removal of Filter Sock 112-1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the specifications is the construction, removal and clean-out of silt fencing at the locations shown on the plans and in accordance with these specifications. 112-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications - Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Iowa Department of Transportation, Series of 2009, and all current supplemental specifications (IDOT Specifications). B. SUDAS Specifications—Statewide Urban Designs and Specifications. 112-3 EXECUTION A. Construction shall be in accordance with Section 2602 of the IDOT Specifications, and as shown in the Contract Documents. B. Construction shall be in accordance with Section 9040 of the SUDAS Specifications. 112-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Silt Fence. Silt Fence will be measured in lineal feet per IDOT Specifications. 2. Removal of Silt Fence. Removal of Silt Fence will be measured in lineal feet per IDOT Specifications. 3. Clean-Out of Silt Fence. Clean-Out of Silt Fence will be measured in lineal feet per IDOT Specifications. 4. Filter Sock. Filter sock will be measured in lineal feet per SUDAS Specifications. 5. Filter Sock Removal. Filter sock removal will be measured in lineal feet per SUDAS Specifications. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION 112-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 113 MOBILIZATION 113-1 DESCRIPTION A. Work under this section includes mobilization. 113-2 IDOT SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications: 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. _ 113-3 EXECUTION A. Mobilization shall be in accordance with Section 2533 of the IDOT specifications. 113-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Mobilization. No separate measurement will be made for Mobilization. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION * * * 113-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 114 TRAFFIC CONTROL Traffic Control 114-1 DESCRIPTION A. The work under this item includes traffic control during construction as shown in the Contract Documents. 114-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. IDOT Specifications: 1. Term "IDOT Specifications" in this section refers to Standard Specifications for Highway and Bridge Construction, Series of 2009, Iowa Department of Transportation, including current revised and supplemental specifications. 114-3 EXECUTION A. Provide traffic control in accordance with Section 2528 of the IDOT Specifications and as shown in the Contract Documents. 114-4 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Traffic Control. No separate measurement will be made for Traffic Control. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. ** * END OF SECTION * * * 114-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 115 DOCK EQUIPMENT 115-1 GENERAL —. A. Description: 1. Installation of dock fenders and cleats, as indicated in the Plans. 115-2 EXECUTION A. Dock Fenders: 1. Dock fenders shall be constructed of a high-density polyethylene material. Fenders shall be UV stabilized to prevent yellowing. 2. Dock fenders shall have molded bushings for permanent attachment to dock platform. -` 3. Dock fenders shall not mar or mark boats. B. Cleats: 1. Cleats shall be stainless steel. C. Recommended Suppliers: 1. Dock Accents, Inc. 804-776-7710 www.dockaccents.com 2. Fend-All Fenders 3. Rhino Marking and Protection Systems 800-522-4343 www.rhinotubes.com D. Contractor to submit product specifications for Engineer's approval prior to delivery and installation. 115-3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Dock Equipment. Will not be measured. Upon completion of installation as indicated in the Plans, the Contractor shall be paid the contract amount. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION ** * 115-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 116 FOUNTAIN 116-1 GENERAL A. Description: 1. Installation of fountain as indicated in the Plans. 116-2 EXECUTION A. Fountain shall be Custom Fountains, Inc., Model AT or approved equivalent. B. Installation within river shall be as directed by manufacturer. — C. Pumps and lights shall be on separate circuits controllable from electrical building. 116-3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Method of Measurement: 1. Fountain. Will not be measured for payment. Upon completion c' installation and operatioral testing, the Contractor shall be paid the contract amount. B. Basis of Payment: 1. Payment for the items listed in the Method of Measurement section will be determined by multiplying the item quantity (as determined in the Method of Measurement) by the unit price on the Proposal Form in accordance with the Standard Specifications. *** END OF SECTION 116-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 502 SANITARY SEWERS Sanitary Sewer Pipe Sanitary Manholes Compaction of Backfill Rock Excavation y 502-1 DESCRIPTION A. The work covered by this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing all labor, supplies, equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection with the construction of sanitary sewers and appurtenances, as shown on the plans, as hereinafter specified and as directed by the ENGINEER. 502-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. The following sections of the Specifications for Sanitary Sewers of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, are made part of this Specification. Where there is a discrepancy between City of Waterloo Specifications and this Specification Section 502, this section shall take precedence. 1. II. MATERIALS, III. CONSTRUCTION, Excluding Subsection D, V. TESTING, and VI. WATER MAIN SEPARATION. B. Pipe Materials 1. Pipe for sanitary sewers shall comply with the following requirements for the pipe specified in the Contract Documents. a. PVC Composite (Truss) Pipe meeting ASTM D2680, min. pipe stiffness 200 psi per ASTM C2412, ASTM D1784 min cell classification 12454 B or C. 2. All pipe shall show the name of manufacturer, cell classification, ASTM designation, and manufacturer date code. 3. Pipe Requirements a. The minimum pipe envelope and bedding required for the pipe specified on the drawings shall be in accordance with the following table: Pipe Specified Bedding Class Required PVC ASTM D2321, Class IB or 11 90% Standard Proctor Density b. Minimum pipe envelope and bedding class requirements refer to the Specifications for Sanitary Sewers of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. C. Minimum trench width for PVC shall be pipe outside diameter x 1.25 plus 12 inches. In unstable, unsupported soils, minimum trench width shall be 3 times outside pipe diameter. C. Existing Sewers, Sewer Pumping and Dewatering 1. When overflows are used to bypass, CONTRACTOR shall investigate with proper authorities about the possibilities and timing of closing the overflow. If pumping shall be necessary for a certain sewer, CONTRACTOR is advised to establish this point in the "Site Inspection" recommended in the "Instructions to Bidders." No extra payment shall "" 502-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 be made for any kind of pumping of sewage or groundwater in this contract and it will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. 2. After the award of contract, CONTRACTOR shall submit to the ENGINEER a complete and detailed report on the construction methods to be used, the capacity of pumps and other equipment to be used. Recommended methods shall be sanitary and practical. If _ the proposed construction methods are not acceptable to the ENGINEER, the CONTRACTOR shall comply with the recommendations of the ENGINEER. D. Removal of Existing Pipe — 1. This item shall consist of removing and disposing of existing pipe of any size which are not active when located within the limit of a new trench. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all labor and required equipment for the proper removal and disposal of existing pipe. 2. No measurement for payment shall be made for "Removal of Existing Pipe," but pipe shall be removed if old and new sewers are in or partially in the same trench. E. Connections to Manholes 1. All active sewer pipes which are present in existing manholes shall be reconnected to the _ new sanitary manholes. Such work will not be measured or paid separately, but will be considered incidental to sanitary sewer manholes. F. Structures -- 1. All manholes shall be constructed in accordance with the details shown on the plans, and all materials used in their construction shall conform to the requirements set forth in these _ Specifications. 2. Manholes shall be precast or poured-in-place concrete. Manholes shall be waterproofed on the exterior at all joints and spacer rings. Provide ASTM C-443, 0-ring gasketed joints between all precast manhole sections. 3. Inlet and outlet pipes shall be joined to the manhole with a gasketed flexible watertight connection or any watertight connection arrangement that allows differential settlement of the pipe and manhole wall to take place. G. Dampproofing 1. The exterior of manholes shall be coated from the base of the structure up to the rim with — a trowel applied asbestos fibred asphalt compound, conforming to Federal Specifications SS-C-153, Type 1. Acceptable products include grace's Dehydratine 6 Mastic, meadow's Sealtight Trowel-Mastic, or equivalent, applied according to manufacturer's recommendations at a rate of 25 square feet per gallon. H. Backfilling Trenches 1. General a. All trenches shall be backfilled immediately after the pipe has been properly laid, _ jointed and the alignment checked. b. The trench bottom shall be dewatered before and during placement of backfill material. Under no circumstances shall water be permitted to rise higher than the spring line of the pipe. C. The pipe envelope will be backfilled in accordance with the following paragraphs and to the dimensions shown on the Specifications for Sanitary Sewers, City of Waterloo, Iowa, for each specified bedding class. 502-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 d. The bedding material shall be granular material, consisting of durable particles ranging in size from fine to course in substantially uniform combination. Provide ASTM D2321 material for PVC pipe bedding and haunching. e. Bedding material shall be carefully placed on both sides of the pipe simultaneously in even six (6) inch layers to the level indicated. Care shall be used to so place and tamp the bedding material as not to disturb the joints, alignment or grade of the pipe. Compaction of the bedding material shall be done with a small mechanical or hand tamper of an approved type. f. The backfill from the top of the bedding material to a level two (2)feet over top of pipe or one (1) foot adjacent to utilities or drain lines shall contain no rock or stone with a maximum dimension greater than 6 in. The remaining trench backfill shall be suitable backfill material as defined hereinafter. g. Puddling or water flooding for consolidation of the backfill will not be permitted. —` The use of water to assist in consolidation will only be permitted when the backfill material is too dry and cannot be compacted to the required density without the addition of water. — In. The consolidation of a cohesionless soil shall be accomplished by vibration. Water may be added when the soil is too dry, but it shall not be added in amounts great enough to cause flooding. The use of an approved vibratory compactor is permitted in conhesionless soils. i. After the trench has been backfilled to a height of two (2) ft above the top of the pipe, the remainder of the trench shall be backfilled in accordance with paragraph 2 below using suitable backfill material. j. Special attention shall be given to the backfilling of the trench where the sewer crosses streets, in order to keep them in good condition for traffic. The trench shall be tamped to put the ditch in good condition at once. k. None of the excavated material shall be removed from the project until the backfilling is completed unless specifically directed by the ENGINEER, but as soon as the trenches are filled in a manner satisfactory to the ENGINEER, all unused materials shall be removed at once from the project, and the project shall —. be cleaned of all rubbish and unused materials, and all paving, crossings or other property shall be restored to their former condition or to a condition satisfactory to the ENGINEER. I. If, at any time during the continuance of the CONTRACTOR'S responsibility as stipulated under clause on "Bond," there shall be any settlement of the trenches requiring repairs to be made in any street, or should any other defects appear in the system due to the neglect or carelessness of the CONTRACTOR, the -- ENGINEER may notify the CONTRACTOR to make sure repairs as may be necessary. Should the CONTRACTOR fail to do so within ten (10) days after the date of such notice, or should the nature of such defects be such as to require immediate attention, the City shall make such repairs to the CONTRACTOR who shall reimburse the City by cash payment or by deducting from the final payment, or the City will collect same from the bonding company furnishing bond covering this section of the work. 2. Compacted Backfill a. The backfill shall be compacted in layers of not more than six (6) inches by a mechanical tamper. Backfill from 1 ft above the pipe envelope shall be compacted to 95 percent Standard Proctor Density beneath sidewalks, surfaced streets or influence zones around piping or electrical ducts or influence zones adjacent to sidewalks, surfaced streets or building foundations. Influence zone is area bounded by line 12 in. above pipe or duct or 1 ft beyond outer edge of foundation, pavement or sidewalk and by line 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward. All backfill in trenches under levees shall comply with Section I - Levee Embankments. Backfill in trenches beneath lawns, landscaped 502-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 areas and cropland shall be compacted to 85 percent Standard Proctor Density in 12-in. lifts. — b. Where the existing material will not compact to the required density, the CONTRACTOR shall remove unsuitable material and replace same with suitable material. 3. Suitable Backfill Material a. Suitable backfill material may contain stones or rock providing that there are enough fine particles of material present to completely encase the stones and achieve the required compaction. b. No rocks with a maximum dimension of twelve (12) in. or greater shall be allowed. T 4. Unsuitable Backfill Material a. Unsuitable backfill material shall be defined as materials which contain large clods, organic matter, frozen earth, debris, earth with exceptionally high void content or material which cannot obtain the required density. b. No rocks with a maximum dimension of twelve (12) in. or greater shall be allowed — to be used as backfill. C. Otherwise suitable material will not be classed as unsuitable material for payment due to over optimum moisture content. 5. Dry Sand Backfill a. Dry sand is defined as follows: Sand heated to a temperature greater than 212 — F. until. all moisture is driven out of the material. Whenever tight-sheeting is required or used in paving cuts, the backfill shall be made with such dry sand, and the dry sand shall be, at all times, kept above the bottom of the sheeting that — is being pulled. b. When delivered on the job, the dry sand backfill material shall be "bone dry" and cool enough to hold in the bare hand without burning the hand. C. No particles of the "dry sand" shall be retained on a three quarter (3/4) in. sieve and not more than ten (10) percent shall pass a No. 200 sieve. 502-3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT -- A. All measurement and payment will be based on completed work performed in strict accordance with the plans and specifications and on the contract unit prices set forth in the proposal. — B. All measurement and payment will be in accordance with Section IV, "Measurement and Payment," of the Standard Specifications for Sanitary Sewers of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, except as provided otherwise in these specifications and except as listed below. — 1. Compacted Backfill: Compacted backfill will not be paid for separately but shall be considered incidental to this contract. 2. Infiltration/Exfiltration Tests: The cost of conducting infiltration and exfiltration tests will not be measured for payment. 3. Rock Excavation a. Measurement and payment for rock excavated in open-cutting the trench for sanitary sewer will be based upon the standard trench shown in Standard Drawing No. 3-16. Payment will be made at the unit contract price per cubic _ yard. Unit price includes labor, materials, equipment, required bedding, removal, disposal, replacement of excavated rock with suitable backfill material and 502-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 incidentals necessary to complete the work required for rock excavation as indicated on the plans or as specified by the ENGINEER. Measurement will include authorized excavation to the depth specified and will be computed by the average end area method within the maximum width limits of the standard trench section, including the"Pipe Envelope." b. Rock excavated to facilitate tunneling of sanitary sewer pipe shall not be measured for payment but shall be considered incidental to the tunneling of the sanitary sewer pipe to which it applies. 4. Extra Backfill: Extra backfill shall not be paid for separately but shall be considered incidental to this contract. 5. Extra Depth Sewer: Extra depth sewer is sewer with greater than 20 ft of cover from ground level to top of pipe and will be paid for at the unit bid price. Measurement shall be based on plan quantity unless a revised quantity is preauthorized by OWNER-approved Change Order. 6. Manholes a. Measurement and payment for manholes shall include fittings adjacent to manhole, tee sections and removable plugs required as indicated on drawings. 7. This paragraph shall apply to the unit price of "Sanitary Sewer" pipe and appurtenances and restrict full payment of the unit bid price until project is completed and opened to traffic or surface restored. By providing a breakdown of the unit price, the intent is to encourage the CONTRACTOR to promptly restore the trenches. The breakdown of the unit price does not give the COTNRACTOR the choice of eliminating a portion of the work under this unit price or delay his schedule for reason of obtaining payment based on a certain percentage of his preference. Payment shall be made on a breakdown of the unit bid price basis by withholding a portion of the unit bid price based on work completed or by apportioning the quantity of completed work in accordance with the following schedule: Payment as%of Contract Unit Price Work Performed For Sanitary Sewer Pipe a. Trench excavation, including removal and stockpiling of crushed rock and/or 40% topsoil from existing street, removal of surfacing, laying of pipe, dewatering, pumping and other work as described under sanitary sewer pipe and required for the laying of pipe, of placing 2 ft backfill above the top of pipe. b. Backfill of trench and compaction with moisture and density control of pipe and 25% appurtenances. If such compaction with moisture and density control is not required, 65%of the unit bid price will be paid when backfill is complete. C. Shaping of subgrade ready to receive paving or surfacing or natural grade 35% providing complete drainage, including relaying of topsoil (where street will not be required)and all other work as further described in this paragraph. When all work is completed, payment shall be made on: 100% of the Unit Bid Price for Sanitary Sewer Pipe *** END OF SECTION 502-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 512 GATEWELLS 512-1 DESCRIPTION ` A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all labor, supplies, equipment and materials and performing all operations in connection with the construction of gatewells and appurtenances as shown on the plans, as hereinafter specified and as directed ._ by the ENGINEER. 512-2 SPECIFICATIONS A. All the sections of the specifications for concrete structures of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, are made part of this specification. B. Excavation 1. Excavation for the gatewells and appurtenances shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 502, Sanitary Sewers. C. Backfilling 1. Backfilling the gatewells and appurtenances shall conform to the applicable requirements of Section 502, Sanitary Sewers. D. Concrete Gatewells 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit, for review by the ENGINEER, a plan of operations for the construction of all gatewells without interruption in service of the existing lines. r. E. Covers, Frames, Ladders and Handrail 1. Frames and Covers: Cast-in-place gatewell frames and covers shall conform to the details shown on the plans. Frames and covers shall be of standard types that are suitable for mounting, as indicated. Castings shall conform to the material, surface machining and quality assurance provisions as required in Fed. Spec. RR-F-621. The CONTRACTOR shall submit drawings or catalog cuts and specifications of the frames and covers he proposes to furnish for review by the ENGINEER. 2. Ladders and safety devices shall be fabricated and erected as detailed on the plans. The steel shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A36. The ladder shall be galvanized after fabrication in accordance with the following section, "Painting." In all cases where zinc coating is damaged, the affected area shall be regalvanized as required in the following section, "Painting." Welding shall conform to the requirements provided in this specification, Section E.2.b, "Welding." Anchor bolts for attaching the ladders to the walls shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A307. Anchor Bolts, including nuts and washers, shall be galvanized in accordance with the requirements of ASTM A153. a. Painting: Clean and hot-dip galvanize after fabrication per ASTM A123 and AHDGA specifications. Touch up mars and breaks in galvanized coating with _. two (2) coats of TT-P-1046, MIL. Spec., MIL-P-21035, MIL-P-26915 (USAF) or equivalent. b. Welding: Welding shall conform to the provisions of Sections 1 through 8 and Section 10 of AWS D1.1 Welders and welding operators shall pass successfully the qualification tests as prescribed by Section 5 of AWS D1.1 of MIL-STD-248 512-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 before being assigned to production work. The CONTRACTOR shall specify by name to the ENGINEER the welders and welding operators so qualified, the date — qualified and the code under which qualified. Prior qualification will be acceptable only when the CONTRACTOR certifies that the welder has performed satisfactory work at the process and in all positions for which qualified within the preceding three months. The CONTRACTOR shall require any welder to repeat the qualifying tests when, in the opinion of the ENGINEER, the work of the welder indicates a reasonable doubt of his proficiency. In such cases, the welder shall be recertified, as specified above, if he successfully passes the retest; otherwise, he shall be disqualified until he has successfully passed a retest. All expenses in connection with qualification and requalification shall be borne by the CONTRACTOR. F. Manholes 1. The manholes for the gatewells shall conform to the applicable requirements of — Section 502. G. Cutting, Fitting and Joining 1. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all work and furnish all the materials required to construct the outlets, including cutting and fitting pipes and walls; removal of existing structures and pipe; grouting all connections, dewatering or diversion of surface and groundwaters to allow placement of structures in areas free from running or ponded water. All joints and connections shall be watertight. Mortar for pipe joints and connections to other drainage structures shall conform to ASTM C270, Type M, except the maximum placement time shall be one hour. H. Sluice Gates, Lifts and Accessories 1. General: Gates, lifts and accessories shall be standard items conforming, except as otherwise provided below, to the requirements of AWWA C501. Gates shall be of the size and shall have flat or flanged backs, flush-bottom closures and nonrising stem as indicated on the applicable drawings. The gate shall be designed for use against seating head of 15 feet and unseating head of 15 feet and these heads shall be tested prior to final acceptance. The maximum permissible leakage shall conform to the requirements of AWWA C501, paragraphs 28.04 and 28.05, and the gates and their wedges shall be ._ adjusted accordingly. Pedestal lifts shall be designed to operate the gate against the applicable unbalanced head indicated, at pulls not to exceed 25 lbs. 2. Detailed Sluice Gate Requirements: a. Gate Slide: The gate slide shall have integrally cast ribs of sufficient section to withstand the specified head with minimal distortion. Tongues shall be cast along each side of the slide and shall be machined. A nut pocket shall be cast on the vertical centerline of the gate and shall be provided with a threaded block for attaching the stem to the slide. Pads for side wedges and top and bottom wedges, when required, shall be integrally cast on the slide and machined to — receive adjustable wedges. b. Frame: The cast iron frames shall be of flat or flanged back type shown on the drawing and shall be machined on its back when attached to a wall thimble. The front face shall be machined for attaching cast iron guides, or shall be provided — with integrally cast guides to form grooves for slide tongues. 512-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 C. Guides: Guides shall be of cast iron and of either the integral or separate bolt-on type as specified. The latter type shall be provided with corrosion resistant fasteners and shall be dowelled to prevent lateral movement with respect to the frame. Guide grooves shall be machined on all contact faces. Faces for mounting of wedging devices shall be fully machined. d. Seating Faces:aces: Corrosion resistant metal seating faces shall be mounted around the perimeter of the slide and frame. They shall be mounted in dovetail slots and securely held in position without use of screws or fasteners. After mounting, they shall be machined to a plane. e. Wedges: The gate slide shall be provided with fully adjustable wedges of manganese bronze. Sufficient number of wedges shall be furnished to provide a practical degree of watertightness. Side wedging devices shall be designed to make full metal-to-metal contact with the overhung portion of the wedge mounted on the guide and shall be fully adjustable and keyed to prevent rotation during gate closure. Side wedges shall be attached to the gate slide with corrosion resistant fasteners and securely locked in position after the gate has been adjusted. All mating and contact faces on wedging devices shall be fully machined. f. Flush Bottom Closure: Gates so designated in the plans shall be provided with a rubber seal on the gate invert. The solid bulb resilient rubber seal shall be firmly held in place using cast iron retainers and corrosion resistant fasteners and mounted to either the bottom of the slide or to the frame. The full length of the bottom edge of the slide end of the frame shall be machined for mounting and for uniform contact of the sealing face. g. Wall Thimble: The wall thimble shall be of the 7" type with the length and opening configuration as shown on the plans. The front face of the thimble shall be machined with holes drilled and tapped for attaching the gate with metal studs. A rubber gasket of uniform thickness or mastic shall be used to form a seal between the front face of the thimble and the back of the gate frame. r h. Stems: Stems shall be fabricated of cold-rolled steel or stainless steel, as indicated. All stems shall be of the size necessary to withstand compressive and tensile forces created during gate operation. Stems shall be sized to withstand the compressive force when subjected to a 100-pound operating force. Stems shall have threads of the Acme or modified Acme type, and of the length required for full gate opening. Stems shall be connected to the gate slide with cast manganese bronze thrust nut. Stop collars with set screws shall be provided to _. prevent overtravel of the gate during opening and a stop nut shall be furnished to prevent overtravel during closure. All stem splices shall be fabricated of the same material as their stems, shall have internal threads for transmitting the full thrust of the stem, and shall be held in-place on the stem by bolts or keys and ` keyways. i. Stem Guides: Stem guides shall be fully adjustable, heavy casting with bronze bushed, removable cast iron collars. Sufficient stem guides shall be furnished and appropriately spaced to provide a maximum I/r ratio of 200 where "I" equals the stem's unsupported length and 'Y' equals its radius of gyration. j. Anchor Bolts: Thimbles shall be provided with steel studs and nuts for anchoring of gates. Anchor bolts for stem guides, pedestal lifts and gate guide extensions shall be of the hook type. Anchor bolts, studs and nuts shall be of ASTM A320 and A194 and ASTM A325 steel as indicated on the drawings. The style and finish of fasteners shall be consistent with the manufacturer's standard practice for gates of this type. Fasteners shall be of sufficient quantity and length to properly anchor the units for which they are used. 512-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 k. Electric Pedestal Lifts: Pedestal lifts, where indicated, shall be motor operated and of the enclosed type. The gear housing shall be of reasonably tight cast iron fabrication, and equipped with grease fittings. Each lift shall be furnished with a stem cover of sufficient length to permit full gate opening. The covers shall be fabricated of standard strength galvanized steel pipe with galvanized steel end cap. I. Electric Motor Operator: 1) Motor-operated gate control shall include motor, operator unit gearing, limit switch gearing, limit switches, torque switches, bored and key- wayed drive sleeve, declutch lever, and auxiliary manual override handwheel as self-contained unit. 2) Open or close gate against maximum differential pressure at speed of approximately 12 in/min when voltage to motor terminals is 10% above or below nominal voltage. -- 3) Actuator shall conform to AWWA C-540. 4) AUMA actuator or ENGINEER approved equivalent. M. Motor: 1) Induction type, Class F insulation, protected by thermal switches imbedded in motor windings. — 2) 460 v, 3 ph, 60 Hertz. 3) Enclosure Type: TENV weather protected NEMA 4X/6 Suitable for Class I, Division 2, Group D location. 4) Environment: Indoor Wet, Class I, Div 2, Group D, Corrosive. 5) 7.5 HP 6) Nominal Speed: 1680. n. Operating Unit Gearing: 1) Heat treated steel power gearing of generated helical and worm gearing. 2) Carburized and hardened alloy steel with threads ground after heat treating. 3) Worm gear of alloy bronze accurately cut with hobbing machine. 4) Grease lubricated power gearing. 5) Ball or roller bearings. o. Limit Switches: 1) Engage limit switches to drive mechanism at all times whether unit operated electrically or manually. Set switches to trip at fully open and fully closed gate positions. -- 2) Factory wire electrical interconnections between limit switches and torque switches, ready for operation. Factory wire gearing used in connection with limit switches. _ 3) Provide open-close limit switches for sluice gates. 4) Mount limit switches on gate operator or stem above gate operator. 512-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 P. Torque Switches: 1) Equip each gate control with double torque switch adjustable and responsive to load encountered in either direction of travel. 2) Operate during complete cycle without auxiliary relays or devices for protection should excessive load be caused by obstruction in either direction of travel. -- q. Controller: 1) Provide integral reversing controller for each operator. Controller consists of reversing combination mechanical starters, control '— transformer, 3 overloads, and cover mounted pilot devices specified. 2) Provide open-close switches for sluice gates. r. Manual Operation: 1) Handwheel operation. 2) Handwheel may rotate during electric operation but shall be responsive ` to manual operation except when being electrically operated. 3) Do not rotate motor during hand operation, nor shall fused motor prevent manual operation. 4) when in manual operating position, unit shall remain in this position until motor is energized at which time gate operator shall automatically return to electric operation and shall remain in motor position until handwheel operation desired. 5) Movement from motor operation to handwheel operation accomplished by positive declutching lever which shall disengage motor and motor gearing mechanically but not electrically. 6) Unit cannot be placed in manual operation when motor is running. 7) A seized or inoperable motor shall not prevent manual operation. S. Gate Operators: 1) Size to suit torque requirements of gate. 2) Operate at speed of approximately 12 in/min. t. Indicator -- Indicator shall be furnished for all lifts. It shall be of the dial or counter type. Minimum diameter of the shafting for the indicator shall be 3/8- inch. U. Materials -- All materials used in construction of the gates shall be of the type best suited for the application and shall conform to the following ASTM Specifications: Gray Iron Casting (Gate Frame, Slide, Guides, Stem Guides, Pedestals, Wall Thimbles and Wedge Blocks): ASTM A126, Class B. Cast Bronze(Wedges, Stem Block, Lift Nut): ASTM B584, Alloy 865. Extended Bronze (Dovetail Seating Faces, Wedge Block Faces): ASTM B21, Alloy 482. Corrosion Resistant Steel (Stems and Stem Couplings): ASTM A276, -- Type 304; or ASTM A582, Type 303. Cold-Rolled Steel (Stems and Stem Couplings): ASTM A108, Grade 1045. 512-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 Corrosion Resistant Steel (Fasteners): ASTM A320, B8 or B8F (Bolts); and — A194, Grade 8 or 8F (Nuts). High-Strength Steel (Fasteners): ASTM A325, Style and Finish of Fasteners Shall be Consistent With the Manufacturer's Standard Practice for Gates of — This Type. Rubber(Flush Bottom Seal): ASTM D2000, Grade R625. 3. Installation: All parts shall be thoroughly cleaned and examined to be sure they are free - from injurious materials. Bolts, screws and all fittings shall be tightened firmly and uniformly. The alignment of all parts with respect to each other shall be true within the tolerance required, and gate parts shall be set true to the elevations shown on the — drawings. Slide gate frames shall be installed completely assembled with the gate leaf in the frame. Mounting of the gate shall be carried out with the slide lightly wedged in the frame in order to prevent springing of the frame. Gate shall be tested after installation in the field. Field testing shall consist of moving the slide through not less than one -- complete cycle in the frame by use of the assembly's pedestal lift and stem. The gate assembly shall be closely checked during the cycling of the slide in the frame to ensure that tolerances have not been exceeded, that all necessary clearances have been — provided, and that binding does not occur in any moving part. Any errors or defects disclosed shall be immediately remedied by the CONTRACTOR without cost to the OWNER. After installation and testing, the stems, gate guides, seat and wedge facings shall be given a coating of grease, and all other items as required shall be thoroughly lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Painting: Painting shall conform to the applicable provisions of these specifications. 5. Asphalt: Asphalt fill required at the base of slide gate frames shall consist of a mixture of — bituminous materials and mineral aggregate. Asphalt shall be placed as detailed on the drawing and in such a manner as to form a dense, well-bonded fill. I. Quality Control — 1. The CONTRACTOR shall establish and maintain quality control for construction of the gatewell structures to assure compliance with contract requirements and maintain y records of quality control for all construction operations, including but not limited to the following: a. Quality of materials; b. Fabrication and dimensional tolerances for gate and components; and C. Installation and testing of gate and lift. A copy of these records and tests, as well as the records of corrective action taken, shall _ be furnished to the OWNER as directed by the ENGINEER. J. Shop Drawings 1. The CONTRACTOR shall submit for review by the ENGINEER complete shop drawings showing details of the reinforcing steel; slide gates, lifts and accessories; frames, covers, — grates and ladders; and shop painting in conformance with the provisions of General Special Provisions. 512-6 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 512-3 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT AND BASIS OF PAYMENT A. Payment for gatewell structures will be based on completed work performed at each site in accordance with the drawings, the specifications and the contract payment schedule. Gatewell structures will be paid for at the applicable contract lump sum price and such price shall constitute full compensation for all excavation and backfilling; pipe and structure removals; concrete and reinforcing steel; pipe, valvewell, bedding, cradling and connecting collars; pipe end sections; slide gates, lifts and accessories; frames, ladders and painting; and all incidental labor and material necessary to complete construction of gatewell structures as required by this section of the specifications, as shown on the drawings and in accordance with the terms and conditions of the contract. Payment, as specified above for gatewell structures, will be made at the contract lump sum price per each. **' END OF SECTION 512-7 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 01316 ENGINEER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE A. Project has been designed by AECOM who is hereinafter called ENGINEER, and who is to act as OWNER'S representative, assume duties and responsibilities, and have rights and authority assigned to ENGINEER in Contract Documents in connection with completion of Work in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. ENGINEER: 1. As used in Specifications and on Drawings refers to AECOM. 2. As used in other documents is defined in General Specifications. B. OWNER: 1. As used in Specifications and used on Drawings is defined as City of Waterloo. 1.03 VISITS TO SITE A. ENGINEER will make visits to Site at intervals appropriate to various stages of construction as ENGINEER deems necessary in order to observe as experienced and qualified design professional progress that has been made and quality of various aspects of CONTRACTORS executed Work. Based on information obtained during such visits and observations, ENGINEER, for benefit of OWNER,will determine, in general, if Work is proceeding in accordance with Contract Documents. ENGINEER will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on Site to check quality or quantity of Work. ENGINEER's efforts will be directed toward providing for OWNER greater degree of confidence that completed Work will conform generally to Contract Documents. On basis of such visits and observations, ENGINEER will keep OWNER informed on progress of Work and will endeavor to guard OWNER against defective Work. B. ENGINEER will furnish Resident Project Representative(RPR), assistants, and other field staff to assist ENGINEER in observing Work. Through additional observations of CONTRACTOR's Work in progress and field checks of materials and equipment by RPR and assistants, ENGINEER shall endeavor to provide further protection for OWNER against defects and deficiencies in Work. However, ENGINEER shall not, during such visits or result of such observations of CONTRACTOR's work in progress,supervise,direct,or have control over CONTRACTOR's Work nor shall ENGINEER have authority over or responsibility for means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures selected by CONTRACTOR, for safety precautions or programs incident to CONTRACTOR' performing Work, or responsibility of construction for CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents. C. RPR'S duties and responsibilities limited to those of ENGINEER in agreement with OWNER and in Contract Documents, and further limited and described as follows: 01316-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 T 1. General: RPR is ENGINEER'S agent at Site,will act as directed by and under supervision of ENGINEER, and will confer with ENGINEER regarding RPR'S actions. RPR'S dealings in matters pertaining to CONTRACTOR's Work in progress shall, in general be with ENGINEER and CONTRACTOR keeping OWNER advised as necessary. RPR'S dealings with — Subcontractors through or with full knowledge and approval of CONTRACTOR. RPR shall generally communicate with OWNER with knowledge of and under direction of ENGINEER. 2. Duties and Responsibilities of RPR Representative: — a. Conduct preconstruction conference with OWNER, CONTRACTOR(s), utilities, and other appropriate parties affected by Project. — b. Attend meetings with CONTRACTOR,such as progress meetings,job conferences and other Project related meetings. C. Report to ENGINEER when clarifications and interpretations of Contract Documents are needed and transmit to CONTRACTOR clarifications and interpretations as issue by ENGINEER. d. Review Applications for Payment with CONTRACTOR for compliance with established procedure for their submission and forward with recommendation to ENGINEER. e. Provide direction for assistants and coordinate observation activities. — f. Direct visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having jurisdiction over Project to OWNER or CONTRACTOR as appropriate. g. Administer modifications amending, modifying or supplementing Contract Documents — as Project proceeds. h. Report to ENGINEER whenever RPR believes that any part of CONTRACTOR's Work in progress will not produce completed Project that conforms generally to Contract Documents or will prejudice integrity of design concept of completed Project as functioning whole as indicated in Contract Documents, or has been damaged, or does not meet requirements of any inspection, test or approval required to be made; and advise ENGINEER of that part of Work in progress that RPR believes should be corrected or rejected or should be uncovered for observation, or requires special testing, inspection or approval. i. Review testing of equipment and systems provided by CONTRACTOR and assess its compliance with Contract Documents. j. Determine final quantities for Work installed which will serve as basis for final payment to CONTRACTOR. k. Coordinate efforts required to prepare record drawings showing those changes during — construction process, based on marked-up prints,drawings,and other data furnished by CONTRACTOR to ENGINEER and which ENGINEER considers significant. I. Participate in inspections for substantial and final completion of Project and prepare list of items to be corrected or completed. 3. Duties and Responsibilities of RPR'S Assistant(s): a. Assistant(s) shall function under direction and supervision of RPR. — b. Observe Work activities, as directed, and report their observations to RPR. Observed variance in Work activities from intent of Contract Documents will be reported to RPR. C. Inform RPR when situations develop such that change in Contract Documents would — serve to improve Project. d. Gather and maintain information required for pay estimate review by RPR. e. Perform other duties as directed by RPR. f. Assistant(s)will have limitations on responsibilities and authority. Assistant(s)will: 1) Not be authorized to modify or otherwise change Contract Documents. 2) Not have authorization necessary to accept any Work on behalf of OWNER. — 3) Not be authorized to delete or order any additional Work. 4) Not, through his efforts, relieve CONTRACTOR of CONTRACTOR'S ultimate responsibility for quality of Work. 01316-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 1.10 LIMITATIONS ON ENGINEER'S AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITIES A. Neither ENGINEER'S authority or responsibility under this Specification Section or under any other provision of Contract Documents nor any decision made by ENGINEER in good faith to either exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or undertaking,exercise,or performance of any authority or responsibility by ENGINEER shall create, impose, or give rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by ENGINEER to CONTRACTOR, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. B. Whenever in Contract Documents terms"as allowed","as approved"or terms of like effect or import are used, or adjectives"reasonable","suitable","acceptable,""proper"or"satisfactory"or adjectives of like effect or import are used to describe action or determination of ENGINEER as to Work, it is intended that such action or determination will be solely to evaluate, in general,completed Work for compliance with requirements of and information in Contract Documents and conformance with design concept of completed Project as functioning whole as shown or indicated in Contract Documents (unless there is specific statement indicating otherwise). Use of any such term or adjective shall not be effective to assign ENGINEER any duty or authority to supervise or direct performance of Work or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary to provisions of Contract Documents. C. ENGINEER will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for CONTRACTOR'S means, methods,techniques,sequences or procedures of construction,or safety precautions and programs incidental thereto, or for any failure of CONTRACTOR to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to performance of Work. ENGINEER will not responsible for CONTRACTOR'S failure to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents. D. ENGINEER will not be responsible for acts or omissions of CONTRACTOR or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any Work. E. Limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth shall also apply to ENGINEER's Consultants, Resident Project Representative, and assistants. 1.11 STAKING A. Proposed work will be staked once, by ENGINEER, at no expense to CONTRACTOR. Should CONTRACTOR request restaking,this work will be done as ENGINEER'S schedule permits and at expense of CONTRACTOR. Notify ENGINEER at least 3 days prior to start of open-cut work or 7 days prior to start of jacked or augered work and when making periodic requests for line and grade stakes. 1. ENGINEER will provide one line of survey stakes for utility work and prepare separate cut sheets where multiple pipes are located in common trench. 2. CONTRACTOR shall maintain survey stakes. PART 2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION (Not Used) * ** END OF SECTION *** 01316-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 01457 TESTING PRESSURE MAINS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Measurement and Payment 1. Separate payment will not be made for pressure and leakage testing of water mains. Include costs for testing, repair of defects, and retesting required in this section in appropriate unit prices. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform pressure and leakage testing on water mains in accordance with AWWA C600. PART2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Conduct pressure and leakage tests in accordance with Section 4 of AWWA C600 and these Specifications. B. Conduct tests in presence of ENGINEER. C. Commence test procedures when following conditions are met. 1. Pipe section to be tested is clean and free of dirt, sand or other foreign material. 2. Pipe outlets plugged with test plugs. Plugs, pipes,fittings,and valves are secured to prevent blowouts. D. Furnish water for testing. E. Equipment: 1. Pressurizing equipment shall include regulator set to avoid over pressurizing and damaging ,. an otherwise acceptable line. 3.02 PRESSURE TEST A. Test pressures shall be as follows. 1. Water Main Test Pressure: 100 psi at lowest elevation in test section. L B. Test Procedure: 1. Add water to expel air. -` 01457-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2. Apply test pressure by means of force pump of design and capacity that required pressure can be applied and maintained without interruption for duration of test. 3. Measure test pressure by means of tested and properly calibrated pressure gauge. 4. Perform final test at required test pressure for 1 hr. 5. When repairs are required, repeat pressure test after repairs until pipe installation conforms to _ specified requirements. C. Water main has failed pressure test if applied pressure drops 1 psi. 3.03 LEAKAGE TEST A. Conduct pressure test and leakage test concurrently. T B. Leakage is defined as gallons of water to be supplied into newly laid pipe, or section thereof, necessary to maintain specified leakage test pressure after main has been filled with water and entrapped air expelled. -- 1. Leakage shall not exceed number of gph as determined by following formula for rubber-sealed joints. Y ND(P)' 2 gph— 7,400 -- Where: gph =gallons per hour N = number of joints under test D = nominal dia of main in inches. P =average pressure in Ibs/sq in. gauge during leakage test 2. If section under test contains joints of various dia, allowable leakage will be sum of computed leakage for each size of joint. C. Test Procedure: 1. Test section to approximately 100 psi gauge pressure at highest elevation of water main T under test. 2. Conduct leakage test for 1 hr. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Correct leaks and defects, and retest until acceptable results obtained. *** END OF SECTION 01457-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 02316 TRENCHING, BACKFILLING,AND COMPACTING Water Main and Services PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DEFINITIONS A. Influence Zone Around Piping or Electrical Ducts: Area below limits bounded by line 6 in.below pipe or duct and by 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward from that line 1 ft beyond outer edge of pipe or duct. B. Influence Zone Under Foundations, Pavements or Sidewalks: Area below foundation or pavement and sidewalk subbase bounded by 1 horizontal to 2 vertical slope extending outward from 1 ft beyond outer edges of foundation, pavement or sidewalk. C. Unsuitable Material: Topsoil, peat, organic soils, and materials containing slag, cinders, foundry sand, debris, and rubble or soil with less than required bearing capacity as determined by ENGINEER. D. Rock Excavation: — 1. Removal of solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented, laminated or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits, neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting,drilling and use of expansive jacks or feather wedges or use of backhoe-mounted pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers;also large boulders, buried masonry or concrete other than pavement exceeding 1 CY in volume. 2. Term"rock excavation"shall be understood to indicate method of removal and not geological formation. 3. Removal of"hard material'by intermittent drilling and blasting performed merely to increase production shall not be considered "rock excavation." E. Hard material: Weathered rock, dense consolidated deposits, conglomerate materials(excluding -- manmade materials such as concrete) which are not included in definition of "rock" but which usually require use of heavy excavation equipment, ripper teeth or jack hammers for removal. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Test results. B. Shoring, Bracing, and Sheet Piling Construction Procedures and Details: ENGINEER will review submitted material to ascertain shoring effect on new construction. ENGINEER will not review shoring, bracing,and sheet piling construction procedures and details for structural integrity or effect on existing facilities. C. Submit in accordance with General Special Provisions. -_ 1.04 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Do not block or obstruct sidewalks or pavements with excavated materials,except as authorized by OWNER. Trim banks to minimize inconvenience to public travel. 02316-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Rock Excavation: 1. Do not blast or use explosives unless approved by OWNER and ENGINEER. 2. Adhere to federal, state, and local ordinances regulating blasting operations if blasting to be done. _ 3. CONTRACTOR responsible for damage due to blasting operations. C. Sheeting, Bracing, and Shoring: 1. When close sheeting required, drive to prevent soil from entering trench below or through such sheeting. 2. Fill voids remaining after sheeting pulled with sand or other approved material. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FINE AGGREGATE A. Granular material, consisting of durable particles ranging in size from fine to coarse in substantially uniform combination. Unwashed bank-run sand and crushed bank-run gravel will be considered. - 1. Gradation No. 1: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 1 in. 100 No. 16 45 - 80 _. No. 200 2 - 10 2. Gradation No. 2: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 1 in. 100 3/4 in. 85 - 100 3/8 in. 50 - 80 No. 4 35 -65 _. No. 40 15 - 30 No. 200 5 - 15 2.02 COARSE AGGREGATE A. Crushed stone chips from crushing sound limestone or dolomite ledge rock or other rock materials of regional availability shall be hard, tough, and durable. 1. Gradation No. 1: Sieve Size % Passing by Weight — 1/2 in. 100 3/8 i n. 90 - 100 No. 8 0 - 15 No. 30 0 -3 02316-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2. Gradation No. 2 (ASTM C33 -Size No. 67): Sieve Size % Passing by Wei ht 1 in. 100 3/4 in. 90 - 100 3/8 in. 20-55 No. 4 0 - 10 No. 8 0 -5 3. Gradation No. 3(ASTM C33 -Size No. 2): — Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 3 in. 100 2-1/2 in. 90- 100 2 in. 35-70 1-1/2 in. 0 - 15 3/4in. 0-5 4. Gradation No. 4(ASTM C33 -Size No. 3): Sieve Size % Passing by Weight 2-1/2 in. 100 2 in. 90- 100 1-1/2 in. 35- 70 1 in. 0 - 15 1/2 in. 0-5 2.03 STRUCTURAL FILL A. Well-graded sand,well-graded sand and gravel,crushed stone or other approved granular material, of 2 in. maximum size, free from organic and deleterious materials. B. Plasticity Index: With ASTM D4318, 6 or less. C. Maximum Fines: ASTM D1140, 15% clay or 20% silt-clay. D. Uniformity Coefficient: 10 or greater. 2.04 CONTROLLED FILL A. Natural soils classified as CL, SM, SC or ML in Unified Soil Classification System. B. Maximum Liquid Limit: ASTM D4318, 30. C. Plasticity Index: ASTM D4318, 10. 02316-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2.05 EARTH FILL A. Subsoil, excess topsoil or sand,free of wood, peat, cinders, vegetable matter or other rubbish. B. Rubble such as rock, boulders, concrete, and other approved inorganic materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine surfaces to receive fill to determine existence of areas loosened by frost action, softened _ by flooding or weather or of unsuitable materials. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Notify corporations, companies, individuals or authorities owning above or below ground conduits, wires, pipes or other utilities running to property or encountered during excavating operations. B. Cap or remove and relocate services in accordance with instructions by owners of services. C. Protect, support, and maintain conduits, wires, pipes, and other remaining utilities in accordance with requirements of owners of said services. D. Remove and replace or compact natural soils or compacted fills softened by frost, flooding or weather. — E. Remove unsuitable material from within trenches. F. Stabilize trench bottom and replace unsuitable material with coarse aggregate gradation No. 3 or 4. G. Dewatering: 1. Keep construction site free-draining. 2. Keep excavations free from water except where river crossing pipe used. 3. Maintain groundwater minimum of 12 in. below excavations. 4. Remove soil which disturbed by pressure or flow of groundwater and replace with free — draining material. 5. Maintain dewatering systems to prevent uplifting of structures. 6. Protect adjacent properties from damage resulting from dewatering operations. _ 7. Dewatering wells shall be drilled, maintained, and abandoned in accordance with federal, state, and local ordinances. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Excavate to elevations and dimensions necessary to complete construction. B. Trenching Tolerances: 1. Excavate so pipes,ducts,and conduits can be laid straight at uniform grade,without sags or humps, between elevations shown on Drawings. 2. Maximum width of excavation at top of pipe shall be outside dia of pipe plus 24 in. When stringers and sheathing are required,width of trench may be increased to allow for their use, provided provisions for this excess width of trench are met. 3. Where trench width for that portion of trench depth between trench bottom and outside top of -- pipe barrel, for any reason within CONTRACTOR'S control, exceeds specified limits, 1 02316-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 CONTRACTOR, at his expense, shall furnish pipe with strength adequate for actual trench width. 4. Minimum trench width shall be outside pipe dia plus 18 in. C. Do not advance excavation of trenches more than 300 ft ahead of completed pipe installation. D. Do not excavate for manholes and other structures until scheduled for construction. E. Do not excavate within influence zone of existing footings or foundations without prior approval of ENGINEER. F. Upon completion of excavation, notify ENGINEER before proceeding with further Work. G. Excavation of Rigid Surfacing: 1. Remove width 1 ft beyond anticipated edge of excavation. 2. Saw to ensure straight joint. 3. Surface replacement shall match existing surfacing. H. Excavation Across Roadways: Excavation, backfill, and surface replacement shall conform to requirements of local highway authority. In no case shall surface replacement edges bear on less than 12 in. of undisturbed soil. 3.04 FILL USAGE A. Bedding and Cover Materials: _. 1. Ductile Iron Water Main: Compacted earth fill. B. Controlled or Structural Fill: Within piping influence zone and within influence zone under pavements or sidewalks. C. Earth Fill: Other areas not previously specified. -� 3.05 PLACING FILL A. Notify ENGINEER before placing fill material. —' B. Do not use frozen material or place fill on frozen subgrade. C. Bedding Material Limits: 1. Other Piping: Minimum of 6 in. below, minimum of 5 in. below bell of pipe,to spring line,and entire trench width. D. Cover Material Limits: 1. Minimum 12 in. above and 12 in. each side. E. Trench backfill beyond limits of cover material specified above shall be as specified elsewhere in this section. F. Where pipes or electrical ducts cross, protect piping or ducts at higher elevation by backfilling trench within higher pipe or duct influence zone down to bedding of lower pipe or duct with structural fill or controlled fill. 02316-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 G. Where pipes or electrical ducts leave structures, protect by backfilling pipe or duct influence zone down to undisturbed soil with structural or controlled fill. H. Do not backfill until new concrete has properly cured and required tests accepted. I. Place fill simultaneously on both sides of free-standing structures. J. Provide mechanical compaction for cohesive material and vibratory compaction for granular materials. When approved by ENGINEER,jetting,flooding, puddling or vibroflotation methods may be used for compacting if CONTRACTOR furnishes test results to confirm required degree of compaction being obtained uniformly throughout entire mass. K. Lift Thickness and Compaction: Place and compact fill materials in maximum lift thickness and to minimum densities listed below. Lift Standard Relative Location Thickness Proctor Density in. % Granular Material Pervious Zones Sidewalk, Paving or Piping Influence 12 1 95 1 80 Zone Cohesive Material Im ervious Zones 8 95 1 -- Bedding Material or Cover Material 6 95 70 Lawns and Landscaped Areas 12 95 50 3.06 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING _ A. Excess Material: 1. OWNER has first right to excess excavated material suitable for backfilling or site grading not required at job site. 2. Deliver to site not greater than 5 miles away as determined by OWNER. 3. Remove material not required by OWNER from site. B. Stockpile excavated material suitable for backfill on designated site. Place no fill where trenches for sewers, water lines or other utilities will be located. C. Place excavated material not suitable for backfilling or site grading and other unsuitable materials in designated spoil areas and grade to drain. If spoil areas not provided on-site, remove excess material from site. ** * END OF SECTION w 02316-6 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 02510 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER MAINS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Requirements for disinfection of new water mains. B. Measurement and Payment: 1. Include cost of Work specified in this section in appropriate lump sum or un t prices for water main in Bid Form. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to starting disinfection work, furnish detailed outline of proposed sequence of operation, manner of filling and flushing units, source and quality of water to be used, and disposal of wasted water. B. Submit in six-copy form to ENGINEER. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Disinfection work shall be acceptable to OWNER and state health authority. If requirements of this section are in conflict with requirements of regulatory agencies, latte-shall govern. B. Source Quality Assurance: 1. Perform Work in connection with disinfection under direction of experienced supervisor. 2. Use equipment in proper working condition and adequate for specified Work. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CHLORINE A. Chlorine gas-water solution or direct chlorine feed is preferred for disinfection. B. Use of high test calcium hypochlorite or tablet method of disinfection shall be approved by ENGINEER and in accordance with AWWA procedures. C. Tablet form calcium hypochlorite may be used only for water mains up to 12 in. in dia and less than 2,500 ft in length. 02510-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Method of disinfection for water containment devices and piping systems shall conform to AW W A C651. 3.02 CHLORINE PREPARATION A. Liquid Chlorine: _ 1. Apply chlorine gas-water solution by means of solution feed chlorinating device or,if approved by ENGINEER, dry gas may be fed directly through proper devices for regulating rate of flow and providing effective diffusion of gas into water within unit being treated. 2. Provide chlorinating devices for feeding solutions of chlorine gas that prevent backflow of water into chlorine cylinder. B. Calcium Hypochlorite: 1. Prepare granular calcium hypochlorite as water mixture before introduction into unit. Make dry powder into paste and thin to approximately 1% chlorine solution. 2. To prepare chlorine solution, add 1 lb of calcium hypochlorite (65% to 70% available Cl2 to 7-1/2 gal of water. 3.03 PIPELINE PREPARATION A. After pressure and leakage tests complete, flush units thoroughly to remove foreign material. B. Release entrapped air at high points and fill units with disinfecting agent and water to allow disinfecting agent to come in contact with interior surfaces. C. If complete venting cannot be accomplished through available outlets, provide necessary corporation cocks and vent piping. 3.04 APPLICATION OF DISINFECTANT A. Point of Application: 1. Apply chlorinating agent at supply end of unit being disinfected. _ 2. For pipes, apply disinfectant through corporation cock installed in top of pipe. 3. Place tablets in accordance with AWWA C651. B. Rate of Application: 1. Introduce water at controlled rate in order to regulate chlorine dosage. 2. Proportion rate of chlorine mixture flow to rate of water entering unit so chlorine dose applied produces at least 25 mg/I chlorine residual after period of 24 hrs. 3. Method of determining rate of flow of water into unit being disinfected shall be approved by ENGINEER. C. Isolating Systems: 1. Keep chlorine gas-water disinfecting solution and contaminated water from flowing into units previously chlorinated and flushed. 02510-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 i D. Quality: 1. Retain chlorinated water in unit long enough to destroy nonspore-forming bacteria. 2. Minimum retention period shall be 24 hrs with chlorine residual at end of this period of not less than 25 mg/I (ppm). E. Disinfecting Valves: 1. Operate valves and appurtenances while line or unit is being disinfected to ensure surfaces of valves are disinfected. F. Swabbing: 1. Flush and swab pipe, fittings or valves that must be placed in service immediately with 5% solution of calcium hypochlorite immediately prior to assembly. 2. Secure approval from ENGINEER before using this method of disinfection. G. Valve Operation: Performed by OWNER. 3.05 FINAL FLUSHING AND TEST A. Following chlorination, flush unit or system until replacement water in system is proven to be _ comparable in quality to water which will enter unit or system. B. Above acceptable condition of water delivered by each unit or system shall continue for at least 2 days,as demonstrated by laboratory examination of samples. Laboratory tests shall show chlorine residual, after final flushing, of less than 1 mg/I (ppm). C. Dispose of chlorinated water to prevent damage to the environment. Dechorinate highly chlorinated water from testing before releasing into the ground or sewers. Obtain OWNER approval prior to flushing activities. 1. Check with the City Water Pollution Control Facility representatives for the conditions of disposal to the sanitary sewer a minimum of 48 hours prior to discharge. Rate of discharge to sanitary sewer shall be controlled to prevent surcharging sewer. 2. Chlorine residual of water being disposed shall be neutralized by CONTRACTOR by treating with one of the chemicals listed in the following table. AMOUNTS OF CHEMICALS REQUIRED TO NEUTRALIZE VARIOUS RESIDUAL CHLORINE CONCENTRATIONS IN 100,000 GALLONS OF WATER Residual Sulfur Sodium Sodium Sodium Ascorbic Chlorine Dioxide Visulfite Sulfite Thiosulfate Acid Concentration (S02) (NaHS03) (Na2SO3) (Na2S203+5H20 Lb) (Cs 1 0.8 1.2 Lb 1.4 1.2 2.1 _. 2 1.7 2.5 2.9 2.4 4.2 10 8.3 12.5 14.6 12.0 20.9 50 41.7 62.6 73.0 60.0 104 3. CONTRACTOR shall furnish all hoses, equipment and appurtenances necessary to direct flushing water to proper discharge point. 02510-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 D. Repetition of Flushing and Testing: 1. If initial treatment results in unsatisfactory bacterial test, repeat disinfection until satisfactory results obtained. E. Prevent entry of contaminated water into previously disinfected units or systems. *** END OF SECTION T 02510-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 02538 TESTING SEWER SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Deflection. 2. Leakage. 3. Internal inspection. B. Measurement and Payment: 1. Include costs for testing in appropriate unit prices bid for sewer constructio'l. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Test Results: 1. Deflection tests. 2. Leakage tests. 3. Internal inspections. B. Submit in accordance with General Specifications. PART2 PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Commence test procedures when following conditions are met. 1. Pipe section to be tested is clean and free of dirt, sand, water or other fore gn material. 2. Pipe section to be tested has backfill placed and compacted. B. Repair visible leaks in manholes and sewers regardless of results of leakage tests. C. Notify ENGINEER 24 hrs before beginning tests. 3.02 DEFLECTION TESTING A. Perform tests on PVC and ABS sanitary sewer pipe in presence of ENGINEER. B. Provide necessary test mandrel, cable, reeling equipment, and other materials and equipment required to perform tests. Provide cable at each end of test mandrel to allow N ithdrawal if plug becomes stuck. C. Test mandrel shall be solid sleeve or cage type as approved by ENGINEER. 02538-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 1. Mandrel shall have diameter equal to 95 percent of inside of pipe tested. 2. Identify outside dia of mandrel and size and type of pipe on which it is intended to be used. 3. Identification shall be stamped on device or on metal plate permanently attached thereto. 4. Do not use worn, damaged or deformed mandrels. 5. Perform test without mechanical pulling devices. 6. Conduct test after backfill in-place 30 days min. D. Sewer is considered to have passed deflection test if mandrel can be drawn through sewer system being tested without aid of mechanical assistance. E. Correct failed sewers by excavating sewer at point of failure and for distance of 10 ft on either side, allowing sewer to return to its original round cross-section and backfill according to Specifications. ' 1. Remove and replace sewers failing to return to original round cross-section or failing second deflection test at no cost to OWNER. Do not use devices to generate internal pressures or vibrations to correct failed sewers. 3.03 LEAKAGE TESTING A. Tests: 1. Pressure test sanitary sewer pipe using low pressure air test. B. General: 1. Conduct tests in presence of ENGINEER. 2. Provide piping connections between section of line being tested and air supply,test pressure equipment, weirs, meters, certified pressure gauge, and other equipment, materials, and facilities necessary to make specified tests. ... 3. Provide bulkheads, blocking, bracing or other temporary sectionalizing devices that may be required. 4. Remove temporary sectionalizing devices after test complete. C. Low Pressure Air Test: 1. General: a. Conduct required low pressure air tests as specified herein. b. Plug pipe outlets with test plugs. Brace each plug securely to prevent blowouts during air test. _ C. Add air slowly. d. Pressurizing equipment shall include regulator set to avoid over-pressurizing and damaging line. �- e. Safety pressure test in accordance with OSHA requirements. 2. Air Test Procedures: a. Air test sanitary sewers and laterals 4 in. through 24 in. in dia as follows. 1) Test times shall be in accordance with Air Test Table. 2) Include length of laterals in determining minimum test time. 3) Test segmentally between adjacent manholes. 02538-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 AIR TEST TABLE Based on Equations from ASTM c828 Specification Time(min:sec) Required for Pressure Drop from 3-1/2 to 2-112 psig When Testing One Pipe Diameter Only Pipe Diameter in. Lin.F 4 6 g 10 12 15 18 21 24 t. 25 0:04 0:10 018 0:28 0:40 1:02 1:29 2:01 2:38 50 0:09 0:20 0:35 0:55 1:19 2:04 2:58 4:03 5:17 75 0:13 0:30 0:53 1:23 1:59 3:06 4:27 6:04 7:55 100 0:18 0:40 1:10 1:50 2:38 4:08 5.56 81.05 10:34 125 0:22 0:50 1:28 2:18 3:18 5:09 7:26 9:55 11:20 150 0:26 0.59 1:46 2:45 3:58 6:11 8:30 9:55 1120 _ 175 0:31 1:09 2:03 3:13 4:37 7:05 8:30 9:55 1120 200 0:35 1:19 2:21 3:40 5:17 7:05 8:30 9:55 12:06 225 0:40 1:29 2:38 4:08 5:40 7:05 8:30 10:25 13:36 250 0:44 1:39 2:56 4:35 5:40 7:05 8:31 11:35 15.07 275 0:48 1:49 3:14 4:43 5:40 7:05 9:21 12:44 16:38 300 0:53 1:59 3:31 4:43 5:40 7:05 10:12 13:53 2109 350 1:02 2:19 3:47 4:43 5:40 8:16 1114 16:12 2110 400 1:10 2:38 3:47 4:43 6:03 9:27 13:36 1831 24:12 450 1:19 2:50 3:47 4:43 6:48 10:38 15:19 20:50 27:13 500 1:28 2:50 3:47 5:14 7:34 11:49 17:01 23:09 30:14 b b. Air test sanitary sewers 27 in. through 36 in. in dia as follows. 1) Test segmentally between adjacent manholes. 2) Test plugs shall be harnessed together; not blocked. 3) Include length of laterals in determining minimum test time. 4) Test times shall be in accordance with following formula based upon maximum T=0.00493 D'L air loss of 4.5 cu ft/min. Where: T =Test time (sec) D = Diameter (in.) L = Length of test section (ft) Length of Pipe Diameter Test Segment 27 in. 30 in. 36 in. ft) 25 4:07 5:56 50 6:41 8:15 11:5375 73:20 0:01 12:22 17:00 100 12:45 14:10 17:00 02538-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 i C. Provide calibrated and certified test gauge at remote test plug. 1) Gauge air pressure within test section and attach to test plug by sufficient length of hose to place gauge at ground surface. In case of test frames for individual joint testing, gauge to be remote from air supply. �- d. Proceed with test after sewer and lateral installation, including backfilling, is complete and lines cleaned. Proceed as follows. 1) Flush and clean prior to conducting low pressure air test. 2) Isolate section of sewer line to be tested by means of inflatable stoppers or other suitable test plugs. One plug shall have inlet tap, or other provision, for connecting hose to portable air control source. 3) If test section is below groundwater level,determine height of groundwater above spring line of pipe at each end of test section and compute average. For everyft of groundwater above pipe spring line, increase gauge test pressures by 0.43 Ib/sq in. 4) Connect air hose to inlet tap and portable air control source. Air equipment shall consist of necessary valves and pressure gauges to control rate at which air flows into test section and to enable monitoring of air pressure within test section. Testing apparatus shall also be equipped with pressure relief device to prevent possibility of loading test section with full capacity of compressor. 5) Add air slowly to test section until pressure inside pipe is raised to 4.0 psig greater than average backpressure of groundwater that may be over pipe. 6) After pressure of 4.0 psig obtained, regulate air supply so pressure is maintained between 3.5 and 4.0 psig(above average groundwater backpressure)for period of 2 min. This allows air temperature to stabilize in equilibrium with temperature of pipe walls. Pressure will normally drop slightly until temperature equilibrium is obtained. During this period, check plugs with soap solution to detect plug leakage. 7) Determine rate of air loss by time pressure drop method. After 2-min air stabilization period, air supply is disconnected and test pressure allowed to decrease to 3.5 psig. Time required for test pressure to drop from 3.5 to 2.5 psig is determined by means of stopwatch, and this time interval is then compared to required time in tables to determine if rate of air loss is within allowable time limit. If time is equal to or greater than times indicated in tables, pipe line shall be deemed acceptable. 8) Upon completion of test,open bleeder valve and allow air to escape. Plugs shall not be removed until air pressure in test section released. During this time, no one shall be allowed in trench or manhole while pipe is being decompressed. D. Water Infiltration Test: 1. General: a. Conduct required water infiltration tests as specified herein. b. Infiltration test shall not be considered valid leakage test unless top surface of _- groundwater level is minimum 2 ft above crown of pipe during test measurement. C. Rate of infiltration of water into sewer project,including appurtenances,shall not exceed 200 gpd/in.dia/mile of sewer. Infiltration between any 2 adjacent manholes shall not be greater than 250%of allowable infiltration rate. d. Infiltration allowance for manholes shall be computed using total number of vert ft of manhole expressed as equivalent dia sewer. 02538-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 E. Repair sewers failing air test by removing and replacing defective pipe sections or by other approved methods. 1. Retest until acceptable test results obtained. F. Leakage Testing (Relaid Sewers): Y 1. Televise sewer as test for leakage. 2. Furnish television camera, adjustable skids, lamp for lighting,winch,cable, metering device and mobile studio, and other materials to perform television leakage test. 3. Television equipment shall conform to following. a. Use television camera specifically designed and constructed for such inspection. Mount camera on adjustable skids to keep it in center of pipe. b. Lighting shall be supplied by lamp on camera, capable of being dimmed or brightened remotely from control panel. Lighting system shall be capable of lighting entire periphery of pipe. C. Camera shall be operative in 100%humidity conditions and have minimum 650 lines of resolution and tested to 400 psi. d. Camera shall be moved through line at uniform slow rate by means of cable winch at downstream manhole. 4. Measurement for location of defects shall be at ground level by means of metering device. Markings on cable or line which would require interpolation for depth of manhole not allowed. Measurement meters shall be accurate to 1 ft/300 ft. 5. Provide video tapes for runs of sewer televised. a. Footage readings shall appear in video tapes. b. Video tapes shall become property of OWNER. C. Mobile studio shall be large enough to accommodate up to 3 people for purpose of viewing monitor while sewer lines are being tested. d. ENGINEER shall have access to view monitor. 6. ENGINEER will analyze video tapes to determine whether sewers constructed under this Contract meet requirements of Specifications. If defects found,correct and televise sewer at no additional cost to OWNER. 7. Provide temporary pumping and bypassing of sewage to downstream sanitary manhole if flow in sewer precludes adequate visual record, if required by ENGINEER. 3.04 INTERNAL INSPECTION _ A. City reserves the right to televise sewer upon completion. Contact Larry Smith at the Water Pollution Control Facility, Phone 291-4553, when sewer construction is completed. B. Conduct internal inspections when groundwater is at normal level or above top of pipe,whichever is greater. 1. For purposes of inspection, normal groundwater levels shall be that indicated in soils investigations conducted for design of project. 2. Where groundwater is not above top of pipe during inspection, raise groundwater level by jetting or water soaking. Provide test pits or well holes at 200 ft intervals to measure groundwater levels during inspection. In areas where jetting is used to compact granular backfill, inspection shall be performed during jetting operations. 02538-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 C. Sewer considered to have failed internal inspection if any of following are observed. 1. Visible infiltration at joint or connection which,in opinion of ENGINEER,exceeds 2.0 gal/hr for RCP, 1.0 gal/hr for PVC, and 0.1 gal/hr for other pipe materials. 2. Joints open in excess of 1/2 in. more than width of opening when joint is "home." 3. Improperly connected lateral or service sewer. 4. Cracked or broken pipe (beyond 0.01 in.for RCP). 5. Variance from design line and grade in excess of limits set forth in Specifications. 6. Noncompliance with Specifications or requirement of Contract Documents. D. Repair failed sewers by removing and replacing defective pipe sections or by other approved means. -- *** END OF SECTION *** _ r� r 02538-6 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 02723 WATER MAIN SYSTEMS -- PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1 A. Description of System: 1. Work specified in this section includes water mains and appurtenances. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Standards: 1. American Water Works Association (AWWA): a. AWWA C104-80-Standard for Cement Mortar Lining and Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water. b. AWWA C110-82-Standard for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings,3 in.Through 48 in., for Water and Other Liquids. '- C. AWWA C111-80 -Standard for Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. d. AWWA C151-81 -Standard for Ductile Iron Pipe,Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids. e. AWWA C500-80-Standard for Gate Valves, 3 in.Through 48 in. NPS,for Water and Sewage Systems. f. AWWA C504-80 -Standard for Rubber Seated Butterfly Valves. g. AWWA C606-81 -Standard for Grooved and Shouldered Type Joints. h. AWWA C115-83-Standard for Flanged Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pipe with Threaded Flanges. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit four(4) copies of each shop drawing to ENGINEER for review. 2. Submit on pipe material, fittings, valves, valve boxes, fire hydrants and restrained jointing systems. 3. Submit with contractor's stamp, signed, certifying the review of submittal and verification of products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE MATERIALS A. Ductile Iron Pipe(DIP): 1. Class 52 conforming to AWWA C151. 2. Cement lined in accordance with AWWA C104. 3. Supplied by the Waterloo Water Works. 02723-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Fittings: 1. Provide fittings that may be required to provide complete and operational system. 2. Ductile iron in accordance with AWWA C110 and C115. Short body fittings in accordance .^ with AWWA C153. 3. Supply mechanical joint fittings. 4. Fitting Pressure Rating: 250 psi. 5. Cement mortar line and bituminous coat fittings. C. Pipe Joints: 1. Push-on or mechanical for all buried pipe in accordance with AWWA C111. a. Gaskets: Neoprene or other synthetic rubber. Natural rubber will not be acceptable. 2. Flanged joint for all interior and exterior exposed pipe. 3. Ball and socket joints for river crossing pipe. D. Polyethylene Encasement: 1. Use on all ductile iron pipe and fittings, except not required on pipe inside encasement. 2. Install in accordance with ASNI/AWWA C105/A21.5 National Standard. 2.02 CEMENT MORTAR LINING AND BITUMINOUS COATING A. Ductile Iron Piping and Fittings: 1. AWWA C104. B. Thickness: Not less than 1/16 in. C. Do not steam cure cement mortar lined pipe and fittings. _ D. Apply bituminous seal coat over cement lining on inside of pipe. Coating shall be smooth, tough and impervious to water without any tendency to scale off and shall not be brittle. Y 2.03 GATE VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. American, Clow or US Pipe- Resilient type wedge valves shall be used on this project. B. Provide gate valve in conformance with AWWA C509 with mechanical joints, cast iron body, bronze-mounted with bronze non-rising stems, and 0-ring seals and 2 in. operating nut. C. Provide resilient wedge type valves with epoxy coating inside and outside which has been tested to 200 psi working pressure and which opens counterclockwise. 2.04 VALVE BOX A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Manufacturer shall be approved by OWNER prior to purchase. i 02723-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Provide 3-piece boxes with 5-1/4 in. shaft and no-tilt drop cover marked"Water." Use screw type for unpaved areas and slide type for paved areas. C. Provide valve box length required for depth of cover shown on drawings. D. Valve boxes shall be cast iron construction compatible with the gate valves to be used on this project. 2.05 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. American-Darling, Clow-Eddy Iowa, Mueller A423 or Waterous WB67 Pacer. B. Manufactured in accordance with AWWA C502 and Waterloo Water Works Standards. C. Provide traffic type hydrant with break-off coupling on both standpipe and rod. D. Equip hydrants with 6 in. inlet and 5 1/4 in.valve opening,one 41/2 in.pump nozzle,and two 21/2 in. hose nozzles with National Standard threads and 1 1/2 in. pentagonal operating nut opening counterclockwise. E. Provide O-ring packing. F. Provide mechanical joint bell at foot piece. G. Paint hydrant in color as directed by OWNER. H. Provide in lengths required for depth of trench shown on drawings and in accordance with following: 1. In areas where future finished grade is below that of existing grade, provide extension sections for hydrant standpipe of such length that when extensions are removed in future, hydrant flange shall be approximately 2 in. above finished grade. 2. In areas where future finished grade is above that of existing grade, hydrant standpipe shall be such length that hydrant flange shall be approximately 2 in. above finished grade. I. Bonnet shall be bolted to upper section. J. Seat ring, stem nut, hold down nut, operating screw and nozzles must be bronze. K. Hydrant auxiliary valve as specified for gate valves. 2.06 PIPE COUPLINGS A. Ductile Iron Sleeves: Mechanical joint, solid sleeve, 1/2 bored oversized to fit on the thick walled existing main, 12 in. long, Sand Cast OD. B. Gasket: Resilient, high volume, grade 30 rubber. C. Material: ASTM A-536 ductile iron sleeves,flanges, collars,and caps. ASTM A-325 high strength, low alloy steel bolts and nuts per ASTM A-242 and AWWA C111. D. Use to join new and existing mains together. 02723-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2.07 HYDRANT LEADS A. 6 in. water main material. 2.08 WATER SERVICES A. Copper Water Service Pipe: 3/4 in. dia seamless Type K ASTM B88 where shown on drawings shall be in accordance with state and city plumbing code and ordinances. Fittings wrought copper solder joint or flared. B. Corporation Stops: Shall be flared connection Mueller H-15000, AY McDonald or Ford, AWWA C800. C. Curb Stops: Shall be Mueller H15204, AY McDonald or Ford flare copper both ends. D. Curb Boxes: Mueller 10314, 5 1/2 ft deep. E. All necessary adaptors will be as required by manufacturer. 2.09 WELDED STEEL CASING PIPE A. ASTM A139, Grade B new welded steel pipe as shown on Drawings. B. Welded joints to comply with American Welding Society Code of Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction. Fully weld all joints with full penetrating weld. C. Min. inside diameter as shown on plans. If not shown, casing shall be not less than 4 in. greater than greatest outside diameter of carrier pipe, including pipe bells. D. Circumferential weld joints per AWS D1.1. E. Bituminous coat inside wall per AASHTO M190. 2.10 CARRIER PIPE GUIDES A. Manufactured guide to position carrier pipe in casing pipe. B. Constructed of stainless steel with elastomeric liner around carrier pipe with stainless steel risers, polyethylene runners and stainless steel fasteners. C. As recommended by carrier pipe manufacturer for encased installations. 2.11 END SEALS A. Provide watertight mechanical rubber end seals for each end of casing pipe unless otherwise shown. _ 2.12 FLOWABLE MORTAR A. Approximate Quantities Per Cubic Yard: �- 1. Cement- 100 lbs. 2. Flyash -300 lbs. 3. Fine Aggregate-2,600 lbs. 4. Water(Approx.)-70 gal. 02723-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Compressive strength at 28 days -50 psi to 200 psi. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WATER MAIN CONSTRUCTION A. Installation: 1. Lay pipe in the dry. Minimum earth cover shall be 6-0". 2. Clean pipe interior of all foreign material before lowering into trench; keep clean by securely closing open ends of pipes and fittings when work not in progress. 3. Inspect pipe prior to installation, do not install damaged, defective or unsound pipe. 4. Place pipe in trench in sound, undamaged condition; use web sling to install or move pipe; use of end hooks is prohibited. 5. Install with minimum amount of service interruption. Connect laterals to new main after it is in service. 6. Manipulation of existing valves required in order to construct work shall be performed by OWNER only. Contact OWNER, coordinate and schedule required valve manipulation. 7. Trenching, backfilling and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 02316. 8. Restrain piping and fittings at changes of alignment in accordance with pipe restraint details on drawings. 9. Pressure testing shall be in accordance with attached Section 01457. 10. Uncover existing mains a sufficient time ahead of pipe laying operations to determine fittings required to make connections;make connections between existing and new water mains with specials and fittings as required. 11. Install pipe in accordance with best construction practices as specified in AWWA C600 and manufacturer's recommendations. 12. Install polyethylene encasement on all buried ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C105. When lifting polyethylene encased pipe, use a fabric-type sling or suitably padded cable to prevent damage to polyethylene. 13. Install carrier pipe inside casing pipe where shown on Plans. Support carrier pipe on pipe guides spaced as recommended by manufacturer. Install casing pipe end seals. B. Push-On Joints: 1. Assemble joints in accordance with recommendations of pipe manufacturer. 2. Lubricate joint surfaces with heavy vegetable soap solution immediately before joint is completed. 3. Cut pipe straight and uniform without damage to pipe bevel cut ends of push-on joint pipe. 4. Maximum permissible deflection of push-on rubber gasket joints shall not exceed manufacturer's recommendations. Deflection shall not exceed 3 degrees. Use suitable fittings for grade or alignment which requires more than 1 inch per foot. C. Sanitary Sewer Relation to Water Mains: 1. Maintain 10 feet horizontal separation whenever possible. 2. When conditions prevent a lateral separation of 10 feet,water main may be installed closer to a sewer if: a. Bottom of water main is a minimum of 18 in. above top of sewer and water main is placed in separate trench or on a bench of undisturbed earth at a minimum horizontal separation of 3 ft.from sewer. 02723-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 3. When the above conditions cannot be obtained,sewers must be constructed of materials and with joints that are equivalent to water main standards of construction and shall be pressure tested to assure water tightness. Provide a minimum linear separation of 2 ft. 4. Vertical separation of water mains crossing under any sanitary sewer should be at least 18 inches when measured from the top of the sewer to the bottom of the water main. If physical conditions prohibit the separation,the water may be placed not closer than 6 inches above a sewer or 18 inches below a sewer. The separation distance shall be the maximum feasible in all cases. 5. Where the water main crosses a sewer, one full length of water main material shall be located so both joints are as far as possible from the sewer. The sewer and water pipes must be adequately supported and have watertight joints. A low permeability soil shall be .� used for backfill material within 10 feet of the point of crossing. 6. Water mains shall be separated from sewer force mains by a horizontal distance of 10 ft. If force main is constructed of water main materials, min. 150 psi pressure rating water main may be laid no closer than 4 linear feet from force main. D. Separation of Water Mains from Sewer Manholes: 1. No water pipe shall pass through or come in contact with any part of a sewer manhole. 2. A minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet shall be maintained. 3.02 WATER SERVICES A. Use nontrenching methods to cross beneath streets and driveways except where location of existing utilities makes this method impractical. r- B. Trenching, backfilling and compacting shall be in accordance with Section 02316. C. Set curb boxes 1 ft on the property side of the sidewalk or, if no sidewalk exists, set curb boxes 1 ft.on the street side of the property line unless otherwise shown on plans. D. Water taps will be made with an acceptable tapping device while the main is under active pressure. 3.03 HYDRANTS AND HYDRANT LEADS T A. Provide drain pocket at base of hydrant with 1/3 cu yd of crushed stone or rock conforming to requirements of Gradation No. 3, Section 02316, and construct as shown on detail on drawings. B. Backfill and compact as specified for adjacent water main. C. Set at elevation so that cover will not be less than for adjacent main, set grade mark on hydrant barrel at finished ground level. D. Set on concrete pad. E. Operate hydrant in open and closed position to assure all parts are in working condition. F. OWNER shall have first right to removed hydrants not incorporated into the work. Deliver to site not greater than 2 miles away. Remove and dispose of material not required by OWNER. 3.04 GATE VALVES A. Install with stems vertical and centered in box. 02723-6 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Check all valve bolts when installed, tighten as necessary after valves are in operation and up to operating pressure. C. Backfill and compact as specified in Section 02316. D. OWNER shall have first right to removed valves and boxes not incorporated into the work. Deliver to site not greater than 2 miles away. Remove and dispose of material not required by OWNER. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Hydrostatic Test: 1. Test water main, including hydrants and valves, in accordance with attached Section 01457. B. Disinfection of Water Mains: 1. Disinfect water main in accordance with Section 02510. C. Support valves, hydrants and special fittings in vertical position on solid concrete block or concrete support. D. Measure and record distance from plugged cross or tee to adjacent valve. E. Reasonable amounts of water for flushing and testing purposes may be obtained from OWNER at no cost to CONTRACTOR. PART 4 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR WATER MAIN A. Water main will be measured in linear feet and paid at the unit contract price per foot which shall — include main, fittings, labor, equipment, excavation, pipe laying, backfill, compaction, tests, sheathing, shoring, dewatering and necessary cleanup and restoration work as specified. Water main encasement will be measured in linear feet and paid at the unit contract price per foot which shall include steel encasement, carrier pipe casing guides, installation and any other items necessary. 4.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR GATE VALVES A. Gate valves will be measured and paid at the unit contract price per each acceptably installed. 4.03 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR VALVE BOXES A. Valve boxes shall not be measured and paid separately but shall be considered incidental to gate valves. 4.04 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR WATER MAIN REMOVAL A. Water main removal will be measured in linear feet and paid at unit contract price which includes excavation, removal and disposal of pipe and trench backfill. 02723-7 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 4.05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT FOR FITTINGS A. Measured and paid for at contract price per fitting which includes thrust block and mechanical restraints. *** END OF SECTION 02723-8 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 16050 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Raceway Systems 2. Wire, Cables and Connectors 3. Wiring Devices 4. Motor Starters 5. Motor and Circuit Disconnects 6. Fuses 7. Panelboards. 8. Transformers 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Approval of equipment supplied in this section is contingent upon CONTRACTOR verification of available fault current from electric utility. 1. Notify ENGINEER if available fault current is higher than specified equipment. B. Product Data: 1. Submit for disconnects, panelboards, circuit breakers, and transformers. 2. Product data sheets with printed installation instructions. C. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Data: 1. Maintenance data for materials and products for inclusion in Operating z:nd Maintenance Manual. D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Natiorally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms 'listed"and "labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1• National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply w ith National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 70. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING A• Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. 16050-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Plastic-Coated Steel Conduit and Fittings: NEMA RN 1. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3 with compression-type fittings. D. Flexible Metal Conduit: Zinc-coated steel. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. — 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT A. Rigid Nonmetallic Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)Conduit: NEMA TC 2, Schedule 80 PVC. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Fittings for steel conduits: 1. Steel or malleable iron, zinc galvanized or cadmium plated. — 2. Do not use set screw or indentor type fittings. 3. Do not use aluminum or die cast fittings. 4. GRS Connectors and Couplings: — a. Threaded. b. Insulated throat. C. Gland compression type. — d. Rain and concrete type. 5. Comply with ANSI C80.4. — 6. Comply with NEMA FB 1, compatible with conduit materials. B. Conduit bodies: 1. Malleable iron with galvanized finish. C. Fittings for flexible metal conduit. — 1. Insulated throat type. 2. Threaded. 3. Grounding type. - ealing"O" rings with connectors when entering boxes or enclosures. 4. Liquidtight: 1 piece s D. PVC Conduit Fittings: — 1. NEMA TC 3; match to conduit type and material. E. Expansion Joints: — er bonding jumper, Cooper Crouse-Hinds 1. Conduit expansion fittings complete with copp Type XJ. er bonding jumper, Cooper Crouse-Hinds — 2. Conduit expansion/deflection fittings with copp Type XD. F. Seals: — 1. Wall entrance, OZ/Gedney Type FSK or FSC. 16050-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2.04 BOXES A. Of indicated types,sizes and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated,provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for use and location. Provide items complete with covers and accessories required for intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. B. Fasteners: 1. General Use: Corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items. 2. Damp or Wet Locations: Stainless steel screws and hardware. C. Outlet Boxes: 1. Boxes shall be of type, shape, size, and depth to suit each location and application. 2. Steel Boxes: Sheet steel with stamped knockouts, threaded screw holes and accessories suitable for each location including mounting brackets and straps,cable clamps,exterior rings and fixture studs. 3. Cast Boxes: Iron alloy, waterproof, with threaded raceway entries and features and accessories suitable for each location, including mounting ears, threaded screw holes for devices and closure plugs. D. Pull and Junction Boxes: 1. Boxes shall have screwed or bolted on covers of material same as box and shall be of size and shape to suit application. 2. Galvanized Steel Boxes: Flat rolled, code gauge, sheet steel with welded seams. Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Cover shall be gasketed. 3. Stainless-Steel Boxes: Fabricate of stainless steel conforming to Type 304 of ASTM A167. Cover shall be gasketed. 4. Galvanized Cast-Iron Boxes: Molded of cast iron alloy with gasketed cover and integral threaded conduit entrances. 2.05 WIRES, CABLES AND CONNECTORS A. Building wires and cables with insulation type, cable construction, and rating as required to meet application and NEC requirements. B. Manufacturers: 1. Wire and Cable: a. Southwire. b. Houston Wire and Cable. C. Belden. d. American Insulated Wire Corp. e. Republic Wire. f. Superior Essex. 2. Connectors: a. FCI-Burndy. b. Thomas and Betts. C. Blackburn, Thomas and Betts. C. Copper wire only. 16050-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 D. 600 v insulation(ASTM standard compounds)and color code conductors for low voltage(secondary _ feeders and branch circuits) as required by NEC. 1. Type THWN Stranded: Single conductor No. 12 AWG minimum for branch circuit and feeder _ conductors size No. 8 AWG and smaller. 2. Type XHHW Stranded: Single conductor for branch circuits,feeders,and service conductors larger than No. 8 AWG. ctor when run with circuit conductors with same insulation as circuit 3. Provide grounding condu _ conductors. 4. Type THWN Stranded: Single conductor No. 12 AWG minimum for 120 v control wiring an No. 14 AWG minimum for graphic indication, nonhielded noted oninstrumentation u entati .n and other control _ wiring operating at less thanv E. Joints,Taps, and Splices: 1. Joints, Taps, and Splices in Conductors ol ss connectors AWG and Smaller: UL listed preinsulated compression spring type s 2. Joints, Taps, and Splicectors oft pe that will otloosen uAWG dndergebrafiondor) -bolt es in Conductors No. 8normal st ainns. _ compression type conn Y F. Terminations: _ 1. Power Conductors: Compression crimp type lugs. 2. Control and Instrumentation Conductors: Compression crimp type fork tongue, insulated support type lugs on terminal strips. Do not splice. 2.06 WIRING DEVICES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Wiring Device Division. 2. Pass and Seymour/Legrand _ 3. Appleton Electric Company. 4. Cooper Crouse-Hinds Company. B. Color: Brown unless otherwise indicated or required by NEC. _ C. Switches: 1. General Use Lighting Switches: 20 amp toggle, equal to Hubbell No. 1221-1 series. _ 2. Switches controlling equipment,l n conjunction with proper switch. Each with shaleration of which is not evident from switch l be complete include flush neon pilot light with engraved plate to identify equipment being controlled(white letters on black, 1/8 in.high minimum). D. Receptacles: s 1. NEMA No. 5-20R, grounding type, 20 amp Hubbell General use duplex receptacles: No. 5362 Specification Grade. 2. Special purpose receptacles as shown on Drawings and schedules. E. Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles (GFCI). 1. Ratings: 120 vac., 20 amp. 2. Tripping Requirement: UL Class A. 16050-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 3. Construction: '— a. Shallow depth. b. Line and load terminal screws. C. Noise suppression. d. Feed through. e. Standard duplex wall plates shall fit. f. NEMA 5-20R configuration. 4. Meet requirements of UL 943 ground-fault circuit interrupters. F. Wiring Device Plates and Covers: 1. Wall plates for wiring devices with ganging and cut-outs as indicated, provided with metal screws for securing plates to devices, screw heads colored to match finish of plate. 2. Plates for Flush Mounted Devices: a. Hubbell 302/304 stainless steel. 3. Device plates for surface mounted Type FS or FD boxes to be Type FSK galvanized steel. 4. Device plates for surface mounted, 4 in. sq boxes to be 1/2 in.raised galvanized steel covers. 5. Weatherproof plates and covers for exterior devices or devices in damp locations to be galvanized gray cast malleable with gasketed, lift cover plate. 6. Weatherproof plates and covers suitable for wet locations while in use. a. Hinged and gasketed cover/enclosure to maintain weather tight seal while the equipment is plugged into it. TayMac or equal. 2.07 MOTOR STARTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D, Schneider Electric. 2. Eaton Electrical. 3. Allen Bradley, Rockwell Automation. B. Enclosures: 1. NEMA 1 in electrical equipment rooms. 2. As otherwise indicated and required by NEC. C. Manual Starters: 1. Minimum short circuit withstand rating in combination with motor circuit protective device shall be 10,000 symmetrical amps or as indicated on Drawings. D. Manual Motor Starter Construction: 1. Quick make and break toggle action. 2. Double break silver alloy contacts. 3. 1-piece melting alloy type thermal overload units. 4. Starter inoperative unless thermal unit in position. 5. Padlock provision. 6. Pilot light. 7. NEMA standards for size and hp rating. 16050-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2_08 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS - A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D, Schneider Electric. 2. Eaton Electrical. B. Enclosed Circuit Breaker Construction: 1. Dual cover interlock. 2. External trip indication. 3. Provisions for control circuit interlock. 4. Padlock provisions for padlock in Off position. 5. Handle attached to box, not cover. 6. Handle position indicates On, Off or Tripped. - 7. Provisions for insulated or groundable neutral. C. Permanent Trip Circuit Breakers: - 1. Thermal and magnetic protection. 2. Magnetic protection only in combination with motor starters and motor circuit protectors - (MCP). 3. Single magnetic trip adjustment. 4. Single-handle common trip, 2 and 3 poles (handle ties not acceptable). 5. Push-to-trip test button. - 6. Bolt-on type. 7. Quick make and break toggle action. 8. Handle trip indication. g. Handle position indication, On, Off, and Tripped centered. - 10. UL listed for type of wire specified. 11. UL listed short circuit rating (integrated equipment rating). a. Up to 240 v: 10,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. - b. Up to 480 v: 14,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. D. Safety Switches: '- 1. NEMA heavy duty Type HD. 2. Dual cover interlock. - 3. Visible blades. 4. Provisions for control circuit interlock. 5. Pin type hinges. 6. Tin plated current carrying parts. - 7. Quick make and break operator mechanism. 8. Handle attached to box, not cover. g. Handle position indication, On in up position and Off in down position. 10. Padlock provisions for up to 3 padlocks in Off position. - 11. UL listed lugs for type and size of wire specified. 12. Spring reinforced fuse clips for Class R fuses. 13. Provisions for insulated or groundable neutral. - 14. UL listed short circuit rating 200,000 RMS amp with Class R fuses. E. Enclosures: - 1. NEMA 1 in electrical equipment rooms 2. NEMA 12 in other indoor locations. 3. NEMA 4X stainless steel with watertight hubs for outdoor and wet locations. - 4. As otherwise indicated and as required by NEC. 16050-6 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2.09 FUSES A. Manufacturers: -- 1. Cooper Bussmann. 2. Ferraz Shawmut. 3. Littelfuse. B. 250 v Fuses: 1. Class RK 1, 1-end rejection or to fit mountings specified, 1/10 to 600 amps, 200,000 amp interrupting rating. a. Bussmann Low-Peak. LPN-R, dual element, time delay with short circuit protection for - motor, transformer, welder, feeder, and main service protection. C. 600 v Fuses: 1. Class RK 1, 1-end rejection or to fit mountings specified, 1/10 to 600 amps, 200,000 amp interrupting rating. a. Bussmann Low-Peak. LPS-R, dual element, time delay with short circuit protection for motor, transformer, welder, feeder and main service protection. 2. Class L, bolt-in, 601 to 6,000 amps, 200,000 amp interrupting rating. a. Bussmann HI-CAP. KRP-C, time delay for overload and short circuit protection for motor, transformer, feeder, and main service protection. 3. Class CC, fast acting, single element, 1/10 to 30 amps, 200,000 amp interrupting rating. a. Bussmann Limitron. KTK-R, UL listed for motor control circuits,lighting ballasts,control transformers, and street lighting fixtures. D. Spare Fuses: 1. 10%, minimum of 3, of each type and rating of installed fuses. 2.10 PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D, Schneider Electric. 2. Eaton Electrical, B. Panelboard Ratings: 1. UL listed short circuit rating (integral equipment rating): a. Up to 240 v: 22,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. b. Up to 480 v: [14,0001 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. C. As shown on Drawings. 16050-7 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 C. Panelboard Construction: 1. Main breaker or main lugs only, per panelboard schedule. _ 2. Flush or surface mounted anlesss indicated otherwise indicated on pa elboard schedule. conductors, 3. NEMA Type 1 enclosure, u ment 4. Equipment ground bus adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equip ground bonded to box. 5. Listed for use as service equipment for panelboards with main service disconnect. 6. Molded case circuit breakers. 7. Terminals: a_ UL listed for type of wire specified. b. Anti-turn solderless compression type. 8. Bussing: a. Distributed phas%e conductivity hard drawn copper or as shown on panelboard schedule or b. 225 amps,g Drawings. C. Copper. d. Bussing and mounting hardware behind all usable space. — g. Gutters adequate for wire size used, 4 in. minimum. 10. Boxes: — a. Code gauge galvanized steel. b. Without knockouts. 11. Fronts: a. Rust inhibiting primer, baked enamel finish. b. Dead front safety type. — C. Concealed hinges. Imder tumbler type locks with spring loaded door pulls. d. Flush stainless steel cy' e. Circuit Directory: _ 1) Suitable for complete descriptions. 2) Clear plastic cover. 3) Typewritten card. — 12. Special features as shown on Drawings. 13. Engraved laminated nameplate: — a. Stock melamine plastic laminate. b. Legend in black letters face an ndic white i ep provide sdingle line ofotext,with 1/2 in.sh high lettering on C. Except as otherwise Text shall match 1-1/2 in. high label (2 in. high where two lines are require terminology terminology and numbering of Contract Documents and Shop D. Panelboard Circuit Breakers: 1. Thermal and magnetic protection. 2. Single-handle common rip, 2 and 3 noted poles (handle ties not acceptable). _ 3. Bolt-on type unless otherwise s. 4. Quick make and break toggle action. 5. Handle trip indication. 6 Handle position indication, On, Off, and Tripped centered. 16050-8 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 7. UL listed for type of wire specified. 8. UL listed short circuit rating (integrated equipment rating). a. Up to 240 v: 10,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. b. Up to 480 v: 14,000 RMS symmetrical amp minimum. 2.11 TRANSFORMERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Square D, Schneider Electric. 2. Eaton Electrical. B. Materials and Equipment: 1. Dry type, air cooled. 2. Insulation: a. Below 30 kVa: Class F or better, having 1150C rise, average maximum over 40°C ambient temperature. b. 30 kVa and Above: Class H or better, having 150°C rise,average maximum over 40°C ambient temperature. 3. Copper windings. 4. Cores: High grade, non-aging, sheet silicone steel laminations having core plating insulation on both sides of each lamination. 5. Terminal boards. 6. Taps: Two 2-1/2% taps above and below. 7. Overload Capacity: Not less that 10%for intermittent operation. 8. Size: kVa as indicated on Drawings and schedules. 9. Transformers shall be quiet type for installation in areas of low ambient noise levels. Maximum sound levels shall not exceed NEMA standards. 10. Cabinets: Sheet steel, phosphatized having one prime coat and two finish coats of baked enamel. a. Indoor, ventilated unless otherwise indicated. b. Wall mounting brackets through 75 kVa when indicated as wall mounted. 11. Nameplate: Metal nameplate listing manufacturer's name, serial number, type, class, kVa voltage, frequency, and showing internal wiring diagram. 12. Comply with UL 506. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 RACEWAY SYSTEMS ` A. Outdoors, Damp or Wet Locations: Use following wiring methods unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. Exposed: Galvanized rigid steel. 2. Concealed: Galvanized rigid steel. 3. Underground Power: Rigid nonmetallic(PVC)schedule 80 conduit. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 16050-9 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Indoor Dry Locations: Use following wiring methods unless otherwise noted on Drawings. — 1. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (including transformers and hydraulic, pneumatic, or electric solenoid or motor-driven equipment): Flexible metal conduit. _ 2. Exposed: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. 3. Concealed: Electrical metallic tubing. C. Use 3/4 in. minimum trade size conduit unless otherwise noted except conduit runs to room light _ switches may be 1/2 in. D. Encase galvanized rigid steel conduits installed underground in at least 3 in. of concrete. PVC — round coated galvanized rigid useded withoutt conc ete enca ementt for underground without or underfloor concrete cduit PVC co Y b c on or where specifically indicated on Drawings. 1. Underground conduit shall be minimum of 3/4 in., buried at depth of not less than 24 in.below grade. 2. Provide conduits or ducts terminating below grade with means to prevent entry of dirt and _ moisture. 3. When using PVC conduit provide PVC coated galvanized rigid steel elbows. E. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Following restrictions shall be adhered to, unless otherwise noted. 1. Use galvanized rigid steel conduit. 2. No conduit placed vertically shall be larger in cross-sectional area than 4% of column into _ which it is placed. 3. Conduits,when placed within slab and walls, shall not be larger than 1/3 thickness of slab or wall nor placed closer than 3 outside dia clear from each other. 4. Reinforcing steel shall be in-place before embedded items placed and reinforcing cut or removed shall be replaced with additional reinforcing as indicated on Drawings or approved by ENGINEER. 5. Do not pass sleeves through columns without ENGINEER'S approval. 6. Do not place conduits in slabs on grade. Place minimum 4 in. under bottom of slab. — 7. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 8. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. g. Install in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1 in. (25 mm) _ concrete cover. 10. Run conduit larger than 1 in.trade size parallel to or at right angles to main reinforcement and spaced on center of at least 3 times conduit trade diameter with minimum 2 in. concrete covering. Conduits over 1 in. may not be installed in slab without approval of ENGINEER. — 11. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support. 12. Conduits embedded in concrete frame shall comply with applicable provisions of ACI 318. F. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, wireways, and fittings for compliance with installation — tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of raceway system. G. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure _ adequate headroom, working clearance, and access. H. Complete conduit installation prior to installing cables. _ I. Raceway systems shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and from outlets to cabinets,junction or pull boxes. J. Enter and secure to boxes ensuring electrical continuity from point of service to outlets. 16050-10 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 K. Conduit shall be run concealed except exposed surface conduit may be installed where noted on Drawings or where concealment found to be impractical or impossible, and only with approval of ENGINEER. L. Provide watertight conduit system where installed in wet places, underground or where buried in masonry or concrete. 1. Use threaded hubs when entering top of enclosures. 2. Use sealing type locknuts when entering sides or bottom of enclosures. M. Conduit runs extending through areas of different temperature or atmospheric conditions or partly indoors and partly outdoors shall be sealed,drained,and installed in manner preventing drainage of condensed or entrapped moisture into cabinets, motors or equipment enclosures. N. Route conduit runs above suspended acoustical ceilings not interfering with tile panel removals. O. Cap conduits after installation to prevent entry of debris. P. Connections to motors and equipment subject to vibration shall be maximum of 3 ft long. Locate where least subject to physical abuse. O. Install conduit expansion fittings complete with bonding jumper in following locations. 1. Conduit runs crossing structural expansion joint. 2. Conduit runs attached to 2 separate structures. 3. Conduit runs where movement perpendicular to axis of conduit may be encountered. R. Keep raceways at least 6 in. away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. S. Install separate ground conductor inside flexible conduit connections. T. Transition under floor conduit to galvanized rigid steel conduit before rising above floor. Wrap with plastic tape to provide 40 mil thick cover to height of 6 in. above floor. 3.02 BOXES A. Cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been removed and plug unused conduit hubs. B. Support and fasten items in accordance with Section 16070. C. Do not burn holes, use knockout punches or saw. D. Provide outlet box accessories as required for each installation such as mounting brackets, fixture studs,cable clamps,and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes compatible with outlet boxes being used and meeting requirements of individual wiring situations. E. Sizes shall be adequate to meet NEC volume requirements, but in no case smaller than sizes indicated. F. Location of outlets and equipment shown on Drawings is approximate. Verify exact location. G. Minor modification in location of outlets and equipment is considered incidental up to distance of 10 ft with no additional compensation, provided notification of modification is given prior to roughing in of outlet. 16050-11 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 H. Outlet Boxes and Fittings: Install ach looutlet cation in conformance and with fo lowi g requ r me t fittings unnless materials and NEMA types for e otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. Interior Dry Locations: Feraloy Type FS or FD cast boxes with threaded conduit hubs for surface mounting. 2. Locations Exposed to Weather or Dampness: Galvanized, cast metal, NEMA Type 3R. 3 Wet orros ve Locat ons: Stainlessenclosures.indicated. 4. C Steel, NEMA type 4X — 1. Pull and Junction Boxes: Install pull and junction boxes of materials and NEMA types suitable for _ each location. J. Mounting height as follows unless otherwise shown on Drawings: 1. Switches: 48 in. above floor. tlets: 15 in. above floor or 6 in. above counters, counter 2. ac Receptacles and Telephone Ou tors in finished areas; 48 in. above floor in unfinished back-splashes, and baseboard radia — areas. 3. Pushbuttons: 48 in. above floor. 4. Motor Starters and Disconnect Switches: 60 in. above floor. 5. Thermostats: 60 in. above floor. _ K. Do not install boxes back to back or through wall. Offset outlet boxes on opposite sides of wall, minimum 12 in. L. Lighting Fixture Outlet Boxes: 1. Securely mount with approved type bar hangers spanning structural members to support — weight of fixture. 2. Do not support from conduit. 3. Equip with 3/8 in.fixture stud and tapped fixture ears. 3.03 WIRE AND CABLE A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and NECA _ "Standard of Installation". B. Run wire and cable in conduit unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. C. On branch circuits, use standard colors. D. Run ground wire with power circuits; conduit shall not be grounding path. E. Provide separate conduit systems for following. 1. Line voltage control. — 2. Low voltage control. 3. As required by NEC. 16050-12 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 F. Color Coding: Conductors for lighting and power wiring as indicated below. Phase 208/120 v _ A Black B Red C Blue Travelers Pink Neutral White Ground Green G. Color coding for intrinsically safe systems shall be light blue. 3.05 JOINTS, TAPS, AND SPLICES A. Where preinsulated spring connectors are used for motor and equipment connections, tape connector to wire to prevent loosening under vibration. B. Each tap,joint or splice in conductors No. 8 AWG and larger shall be taped with 2 half-lap layers of vinyl plastic electrical tape and finish wrap of color coding tape where required by code. — C. Cable splices shall be made only in handholes, distribution boxes, and junction boxes. 3.06 WIRING DEVICES A. Do not install devices until wiring is complete. B. Do not use terminals on wiring devices (hot or neutral) for feed-through connections, looped or otherwise. Make circuit connections by using wire connectors and pigtails. C. Install gasket plates for devices or system components having light emitting features such as switch with pilot light and dome lights. Where installed on rough textured surfaces, seal with black self-adhesive polyfoam. D. Ground receptacles with insulated green ground wire from device ground screw to bolted outlet box connection or as shown on Drawings. E. Install GFCI receptacles as required by NEC. 3.07 MOTOR STARTERS A. Examine area to receive motor starters to ensure adequate clearance for starter installation. —' B. Install or on equipment rack or anchor firmly to wall or structural surface. C. Support and fasten in accordance with Section 16070. 3.08 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS A. Locate disconnect switches as shown on Drawings and required by NEC. B. Provide control circuit interlock as required by NEC. 16050-13 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 C. Overcurrent protective devices. 1. Install fuses just prior to energizing equipment. 2. Locate circuit breakers as shown on Drawings. D. Install on equipment rack or anchor firmly to wall or structural surface. E. Support and fasten in accordance with Section 16070. 3.09 PANELBOARDS _ A. Support panel cabinets independently to structure with no weight bearing on conduits. B. Install recessed panelboards to allow cover to be drawn tight against wall to provide neat — appearance. C. Install panelboards so top breaker is not higher than 6 ft 0 in. above floor. — D. Adjacent panel cabinets shall be same size and mounted in horizontal alignment. E. Install typewritten final c ircuit�hanges ha pe bery in each len made to balalnce indicating Circuit loads. s or equipment being served ate F. Install filler plates in unused spaces. 3.10 TRANSFORMER A. Install wall mounted transformers on prefabricated brackets designed for that purpose. B. Install floor mounted transformers on 4 in. high concrete housekeeping pads. C. Tighten bus connections and mechanical fasteners. — D. Adjust voltage taps for required system voltage and check grounding requirements. 3.11 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Control Circuits, Branch Circuits, Feeders, Motor Circuits, and Transformers: 1. Megger check of phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation levels. a. Do not megger check solid state equipment. — 2. Continuity. 3. Short circuit. 4. Operational check. — B. Wiring Devices: 1. Test receptacles with Hubbell 5200, Woodhead 1750 or equal tester for correct polarity, — proper ground connection, and wiring faults. 16050-14 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 3.12 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING A. Motor Starters and Disconnects: 1. Adjust covers and operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. 2. Tighten wire and cable connections. 3. Verify overcurrent protection thermal unit size with motor nameplate to provide proper operation and compliance with NEC. 4. Clean interior of enclosures. 5. Touch up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. B. Circuit Breakers: 1. Adjustable settings shall be set to provide selective coordination, proper operation, and compliance with NEC. *** END OF SECTION 16050-15 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 16060 GROUNDING PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Grounding of electrical systems and equipment and basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and systems. 2. Grounding requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented in other Sections of these Specifications. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Certificates for field testing agency, signed by CONTRACTOR, certifying that agency complies with requirements specified in "Quality Assurance"Article below. B. Report of Field Tests and Observations: Certified by CONTRACTOR. C. Test Results: 1• Certified field tests and observation reports indicating and interpreting test reports for compliance with performance requirements. D. Submit in accordance with Section 01340. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with UL 467. B. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed"and 'labeled"shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1• National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fir Protection Association (NFPA) 70. e r PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS A. Governing Requirements: Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, more stringent requirements and greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern. 16060-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 2.02 WIRE AND CABLE GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Conform to NEC Table 8, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding. 1. Material: Copper. B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green color insulation. C. Grounding-Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. D. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, except as otherwise indicated. E. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B3. 2. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B8. ! 3. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B33. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS _ A. Grounding Bus: Bare, annealed-copper bars of rectangular cross section. B. Br aided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 AWG bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules. r, 0.05 in. (1 mm)thick and 2 in. (50 mm)wide, except as indicated. C. Bonding Straps: Soft coppe 2.04 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units. B. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty type. per C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: PanddCombinaltions of conductors t form and dand connected iter written ms instructions for specific types, sizes, 2.05 GROUNDING ELECTRODES A. Grounding Rods: Copper-clad steel. 1. Size: 3/4 in. by 120 in. (19 by 3000 mm). — PART 3 EXECUTION -- 3.01 APPLICATION A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Comply with NEC Article 250 for types,sizes, and quantities of _ equipment grounding conductors,except where specific types,larger sizes,or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. 1. Install equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for items below in addition to those required by Code: a. Feeders and branch circuits. b. Lighting circuits. 16060-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 C. Receptacle circuits. d. Single-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. e. Three-phase motor or appliance branch circuits. f. Flexible raceway runs. 2. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. B. Separately Derived Systems: Where NEC requires grounding,ground according to NEC Paragraph 250-26. C. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Ground pole to grounding electrode in addition to separate equipment grounding conductor run with supply branch circuit. D. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electric power system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest point to electric service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as system grounding conductor and install in conduit. E. Piping Systems and Other Equipment: Comply with NEC Article 250 for bonding requirements. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Ground electrical systems and equipment according to NEC requirements, except where Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements. B. Grounding Rods: Locate minimum of 1 rod length from each other and at least same distance from any other grounding electrode. 1. Drive until tops are 2 in. (50 mm) below finished floor or final grade, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect with grounding-electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds,except attest wells ... and as otherwise indicated. Make these connections without damaging copper coating or exposing steel. C. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, except as otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. D. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use bare copper wire. Bury at least 24 in. (600 mm)below grade. E. Metal Water Service Pipe: Provide insulated copper grounding conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding-clamp connectors. Where dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Do not install grounding jumper across dielectric fittings. Bond grounding-conductor conduit to conductor at each end. F. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. -- Connect to pipe with grounding-clamp connectors. G. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps. 16060-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections so possibility of galvanic cionne t oonr methods electrolysis is so metals minimized. i Select n direct contact wi I be connection hardware, conductors, -- galvanically compatible. . tin-coated e materials to assure high conductivity and to make contact I Use electroplated or closer in order of galvanic 2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact. nd mechanical clamps. 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections steel/Iconnectionsth stwith teel in-platedarators copper copper jumpers and 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized mechanical clamps. tions having surfacesilar metals with inert material to prevent future 5. Coat and seal connec — penetration of moisture to contact ions to structural for round B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use Cfoo�ci withtmanufacturer'swritten nstrudctionsnWegdsthat connections,except those attest wells. Comply _ are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding-Wire Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger,use pressure-type grounding ctors may be terminated with winged pressure-type lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding condu _ connectors. s terminate at housings D. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminanioection to housing,ns: Where l'terminate each conduit withtalgrounding without mechanical and electrical cobs or terminal bushing. Connect grounding b oncontinushings 'ous co th bare duits at both entragroundingoncesgand exits with grou d ng in housing. Bond electrically n bushings and bare grounding conductors, except as otherwise indicated. ng E. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and val esndWgere theseconnectors requ cements are not available, manufacturer's published torque-tightening use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. to manufacturer of F. Compression-Type Connections: Uses hydraulic tools arndsdiesion onecommls to oendedvide oby correct circumferential connectors. Provide embossing di -- pressure for compression connector or other grounding conductor. insulatedmake visible indication t connector has been adequately compressed p roundng rods or G. Moisture Protection: Where insulates g rounding dof connection a ucto drseal against mo stus are connected togre penlettration of grounding buses, insulate entire a insulation and cable. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: — 1. Subject completed grounding system to megger test at each location where maximum ground-resistance level is specified,at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal,and at ground test wells. -- 2. Measure ground resistance not less than 2 full days after last trace of precipitation, and without soil being moistened by any means other than natural drainage or seepage without chemical treatment thod accorrding to Section 9 03 of EEE g1 naturalificial means of reducing ground resistance. 3. Perform tests by 2 point 16060-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 B. Maximum grounding to resistance values are as follows: 1. Equipment Rated 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms. 2. Equipment Rated 500 to 1000 kVA: 5 ohms. C. Excessive Ground Resistance: Where resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify ENGINEER promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance and to accomplish recommended work. D. Report: Prepare certified test reports, of ground resistance at each test location. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve test results. 3.05 RESTORATION .- A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by work of this Section. 1. Re-establish original grades, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. ` 3. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original condition. 4. Include topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, and mulching. 5. Maintain restored surfaces. 6. Restore disturbed paving. *** END OF SECTION *** 16060-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 16070 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL r- 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Supports from building structure for electrical items by means of hangers,supports,anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Items provided under this section shall be listed and labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized -� Testing laboratory(NRTL). 1. Term "NRTL" shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed" and 'labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. B. Regulatory requirements: -- 1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall comply with National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)70. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Steel or malleable iron. B. Aluminum where indicated. C. Stainless steel where indicated. 2.02 COATINGS A. Protect steel and malleable iron supports, support hardware, and fasteners with zinc coating. B. Products for use outdoors. C. Use PVC coating where indicated on Drawings. 2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers,riser clamps,conduit straps,threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps. B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows: 1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for intended service. 4. Nuts, Washers, and Bolts: Stainless steel in outdoor applications. 16070-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws. D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. E. U-Channel Systems: Channels, with 9/16-in. dia holes, at minimum of 8 in. on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of same _ manufacture. 2.04 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES A. Shop-or field-fabricate supports or manufacture supports assembled from U-channel components. B. Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes. Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports. C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of 1 of following: 1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted: a. 3 in. and smaller: 20 ga. b. 4 in. to 6 in.: 16 ga. C. Over 6 in.: 14 ga. 2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. 3. Plastic Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 80 PVC plastic pipe. 2.05 FIRE RESISTANT JOINT SEALERS A. Manufacturers: -- 1. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam," Dow Corning Corp. 2. "Pensil 851,"General Electric Co. 3. Or equal. B. Two-part,foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for use in through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors. C. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 16070-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION r A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements. B. Coordinate with structural system and with other electrical installation. C. Raceway Supports: Comply with NEC and following requirements: _ 1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of supports. 2. Strength of each support shall be adequate to carry present and future load multiplied by safety factor of at least 4. Where this determination results in safety allowance of less than 200 Ibs, provide additional strength until there is minimum of 200 Ibs safety allowance in strength of each support. 3. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts,clamps,attachments, and other hardware necessaryfor hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits. 4. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. 5. Support individual horizontal raceways by separate pipe hangers. Spring steel fasteners may be used in lieu of hangers only for 1 in.and smaller raceways serving lighting and receptacle -_ branch circuits above suspended ceilings only. For hanger rods with spring steel fasteners, use 1/4 in. dia or larger threaded steel. Use spring steel fasteners that are specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing. 6. In vertical runs, arrange support so load produced by weight of raceway and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals. D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors. r E. Miscellaneous Supports:Support miscellaneous electrical components as required to produce same structural safety factors as specified for raceway supports. Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes,junction boxes, transformers, and other devices. F. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and other fire-rated floors and walls for raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables. G. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs below grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal. H. Conduit extending through roof shall pass through ceiling box at roof line. 1. Provide 14 ga minimum copper box complete with watertight soldered seams and flanged to serve as pitch pocket for each conduit. 2. Install conduit and pitch pocket in advance of roofing work. 1. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting hardware securely to building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways,cabinets,panelboards,transformers, boxes,disconnect switches,and control components in accordance with following: 16070-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws,welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel.Threaded studs driven by powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of -- expansion bolts and machine or wood screws. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction,use sheet metal screws. 2. Holes cut in concrete shall not cut main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used. -- 3. Load applied to any fastener shall not exceed 25% of proof test load. Use vibration- and shock-resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs. *** END OF SECTION 16070-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 16075 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit for each type of product specified. B. Submit in accordance with Section 01340. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Conform to ANSI A13.1,Table 3,for minimum size of letters for legend and minimum length of color field for each raceway or cable size. 1. Color: Black legend on orange field. 2. Legend: Indicates voltage. C. Adhesive Labels: Preprinted,flexible,self adhesive vinyl. Legend is overlaminated with clear,wear and chemical resistant coating. -- D. Colored Adhesive Tape: Self adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 in. wide (0.08 mm thick by 25 to 51 mm wide). E. Underground Line Warning Tape: Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape with following features: 1. Size: Not less than 6 in. wide by 4 mils thick(152 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed Legend: Indicates type of underground line. F. Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl cloth, self adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. 16075-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 G. Plasticized Card Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field printed legends. Orange background, except as otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener. 2.02 ENGRAVED NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Manufacturer's Standard Products: Where more than one type is listed for specified application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single type for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1, NFPA 70, or as specified elsewhere. B. Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, 1/16 in. (1.6 mm) minimum thick for signs up to 20 sq in. (129 sq cm), 1/8 in. (3.2 mm)thick for larger sizes. 1. Engraved Legend: Black letters on white face. 2. Punched for mechanical fasteners. C. Baked Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size as indicated or as otherwise required for application. 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) grommets in corners for mounting. D. Exterior, Metal Backed, Butyrate Signs: Wear resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396 in. (1 mm), galvanized steel backing, with colors, legend, and size appropriate to application. 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)grommets in corners for mounting. E. Fasteners for Plastic Laminated and Metal Signs: Self tapping stainless steel screws or No. 10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts, flat washers and lock washers. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self extinguishing, 1 piece, self locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties with following features: 1. Minimum Width: 3/16 in. (5 mm). 2. Tensile Strength: 50 lb(22.3 kg) minimum. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 40 to 185°F (-4 to 85°C). 4. Color: As indicated where used for color coding. B. Paint: Alkyd-urethane enamel. Primer as recommended by enamel manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install identification devices according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install labels where indicated and at locations for best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. C. Lettering, Colors,and Graphics: Coordinate names,abbreviations,colors,and or designations used for electrical identification with corresponding designations used in Contract Documents or required _ by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project. D. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish, install identification after completion of finish work.E. Self Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before applying. — 16075-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 F. Install painted identification as follows: 1. Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting. 2. Prime Surfaces: For galvanized metal, use single component, acrylic vehicle coating formulated for galvanized surfaces. For concrete masonry units,use heavy duty,acrylic resin block filler. For concrete surfaces, use clear, alkali resistant, alkyd binder type sealer. 3. Apply 1 intermediate and 1 finish coat of silicone alkyd enamel. 4. Apply primer and finish materials according to manufacturer's instructions. G. Install Caution Signs for Enclosures Over 600 V: Use pressure sensitive, self-adhesive label indicating system voltage in black, preprinted on orange field. Install on exterior of door or cover. H. Install Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Label externally as follows: 1. Exposed Boxes: Pressure sensitive, self adhesive plastic label on cover. 2. Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card stock tags. 3. Labeling Legend: Permanent, water proof listing of panel and circuit number or equivalent. I. Identify Paths of Underground Electrical Lines: During trench backfilling,for exterior underground power,control,signal, and communications lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located directly above line at 6 to 8 in.(150 to 200 mm)below finished grade. Where multiple lines installed in common trench or concrete envelope do not exceed an overall width of 16 in.(400 mm), use single line marker. 1. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct buried and in raceway. J. Color Code Conductors: Secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors throughout secondary electrical system. 1. Field applied, color coding methods may be used in lieu of factory coded wire for sizes larger than No. 10 AWG. K. Apply identification to conductors as follows: 1. Conductors to Be Extended in Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers. 2. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with source, _ voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color coding for voltage and phase indication of secondary circuit. L. Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs and stencils as follows: 1. Install warning, caution, and instruction signs where indicated or required to ensure safe operation and maintenance of electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved, plastic laminated instruction signs with approved legend where instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation. Install butyrate signs with metal backing for outdoor items. -- M. Install identification as follows: 1. Apply equipment identification labels of engraved plastic laminate on each major unit of equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes communication, signal, and alarm systems, unless units are specified with their own self-explanatory identification. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text with 1/2 in. (13 mm) high lettering on 1-1/2 in. (38 mm)high label;where 2 lines of text are required, use lettering 2 in. (51 mm)high. Use black lettering on white field. Apply labels for each unit of following categories of equipment. 16075-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 w a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and enclosures. b. Electrical switchboards. C. Motor starters. d. Push button stations. e. Dimmers. f. Control devices. g. Transformers. 2. Apply designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for disconnect switches, breakers,push -- buttons, pilot lights, motor control centers,and similar items for power distribution and control components above, except panelboards and alarm/signal components where labeling is specified elsewhere. For panelboards, provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. *** END OF SECTION 16075-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 16135 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Ducts. 2. Handholes. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Duct: General term for electrical conduit and other raceway,either metallic or nonmetallic,specified -- for use underground, embedded in earth or concrete. B. Duct Bank: Group of 2 or more ducts in continuous run between 2 points. C. Underfloor Conduits. 1. Conduits which run underground within perimeter of building walls under building floor. This may consist of 1 conduit, or several conduits grouped together. D. Duct Bank Conduits 1. Conduits which run under ground outside perimeter of building walls. This may consist of 1 conduit, or several conduits grouped together. E. Underground Conduits 1. Underground conduits are both underfloor conduits and duct bank conduits. F. Handhole: Below-the-surface enclosure in connection with ducts into which people reach,but do not enter, for purpose of installing, operating, or maintaining equipment or wiring. _. G. Manhole: Below-the-surface enclosure or chamber, large enough for person to enter, connecting with ducts, and affording facilities for installing, operating, and maintaining equipment or wiring. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals are not required if CONTRACTOR supplies materials or equipment of specified or named manufacturers. If CONTRACTOR proposes substitutions to material or equipment of specified or named manufacturers, submittals identified below are required. 1. Product data. 2. Submit in accordance with Section 01340. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers of precast handholes shall be firms regularly engaged in manufacturing factory-fabricated manholes and handholes, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 yrs. B. Items provided under this section shall be listed or labeled by UL or other Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory(NRTL). 16135-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 1. Term "NRTL"shall be as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 2. Terms "listed"and 'labeled" shall be as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Electrical Code(NEC): Components and installation shall complywith National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)70. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store units at site as recommended by manufacturer to prevent physical damage. Arrange so identification markings are visible. B. Lift and support units only at designated lifting or supporting points. -- 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordination of Work: 1. Coordinate layout and installation of handholes with final arrangement of ducts as influenced by actual final location of other utilities in field. 2. Coordinate elevations of duct and raceway entrances into handholes with final profiles of ducts and raceways as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions, and buildings. 3. Establish locations and elevations to suit field conditions and assure duct runs drain to handholes, or as shown on Drawings. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTS AND FITTINGS _ A. Comply with Section 16050. 2.02 RACEWAY/DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Compound: 1. Nonhardening, putty-like consistency workable at temperatures as low as 35°F. 2. Compound shall not slump at temperature of 300°F and shall readily adhere to clean surfaces of plastic ducts, metallic conduits,conduit coatings,concrete, masonry, lead,cable sheaths, cable jackets, insulation materials, and common metals. -- PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHOD A. General: Install ducts for wiring runs indicated. Provide sizes as indicated. B. Single Duct Runs: Rigid nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 80, direct buried in earth. C. Duct Banks: Rigid nonmetallic conduit, Schedule 80. 16135-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Conform to Section 02316 except as modified below: 1. Do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated compaction equipment. 2. Excavation: Cut trenches neatly and uniformly, and slope uniformly to required pitch. 3. For direct-buried, nonencased ducts prepare trench bottoms free from stones,soft spots,and sharp objects. Where necessary, add 3 in.layer of stone-free sand or earth to trench bottom and compact to density of adjacent undisturbed soil to provide suitable bearing for ducts. Backfill over and around ducts on bottom of trench with stone-free sand or earth to 6 in. minimum above tops of ducts and compact by hand or pneumatic tamper to density of adjacent undisturbed earth. 4. For each additional layer of direct-buried ducts above bottom ducts, backfill over and around each layer of ducts with stone-free sand or earth to 12 in. minimum above tops of ducts and compact by hand or pneumatically to density of adjacent undisturbed earth. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF DUCTS A. Slope: Pitch ducts to drain towards handholes and away from buildings and equipment unless otherwise shown on Drawings. Minimum slope shall be 4 in. in 100 ft. Where necessary to achieve this between manholes, slope ducts from high point in run to drain in both directions. B. Curves and Bends: Use manufactured elbows for stub-ups at equipment and at building entrances. For other curves and bends, except as otherwise indicated, use manufactured long sweep bends with minimum radius of 24 in. in both horizontal and vertical directions. C. Make joints in ducts and fittings watertight in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane. D. Duct Entrances to Buildings: Transformations from underground PVC duct to steel conduit shall be made 10 ft. minimum, outside building wall and shall use fittings manufactured for purpose. Install in accordance with following: E. Stub-ups: Duct stub-ups to equipment shall be galvanized rigid steel. For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete pads, steel conduit shall extend minimum of 5 ft away from edge of pad. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for purpose and encased concrete. F. Sealing: For ducts to be wired in this Project, provide temporary closure at terminations. For spare ducts,seal bore of ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs as required to withstand 15 psi minimum hydrostatic pressure. G. Pulling Cord: Provide 100 lb test nylon cord in ducts including spares. W H. Marker Tape: Provide plastic marker tape over ducts at 12 in. below finished grade. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES, GENERAL A. General: 1. Provide handholes of sizes, shapes, and locations as indicated. 2. Determine final elevation of ducts as influenced by possible adjustments in other utilities and surface features and discovery of underground obstructions before installing manholes/handholes. Obtain ENGINEER'S approval for handhole installation adjustments necessitated by obstructions. 16135-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 3. Install units plumb and level and with orientation and depth coordinated with arrangement of connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3.05 CLEANING AND RESTORATION A. Clean Ducts: Clean full length of ducts with round bristle brush with dia 1/2 in.greater than internal diameter of duct. B. Clean Handholes: Clean internal surfaces. Remove foreign material. -- 3.06 RESTORATION A. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades except as otherwise indicated. B. Where sod has been removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. -- C. Restore all areas disturbed by trenching,storing of dirt,cable laying,and other work to their original condition. D. Include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging, or mulching. E. Restore disturbed paving as indicated. * * * END OF SECTION ** * 16135-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 16210 ELECTRIC SERVICE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Electric Utility Charges: 1. Electric Utility charges for extension of distribution system to point of service termination and meters will be paid by OWNER. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Electric Utility: Midamerican Energy. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA No. 70-93-National Electrical Code (NEC). PART2 PRODUCTS —' 2.01 ELECTRIC SERVICE A. Electric Service Characteristics: 1. As indicated on Drawings and provided by Electric Utility. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Confirmation of Electric Service: 1. Consult with Electric Utility to verify service information specified and shown on Drawings. 2. Include deviations required by Electric Utility from contract documents to comply with Electric Utility standards and requirements. B. Metering: 1. Consult with Electric Utility regarding service entrance requirements and metering equipment. 2. Install metering equipment and empty conduit for metering conductors to meet standards and requirements of Electric Utility. C. Application for Electric Service. r 1. Obtain required forms from Electric Utility. 2. Assist OWNER in completion of forms and deliver completed forms to Electric Utility. 3. Coordinate schedule for installation of electric service with Electric Utility. *** END OF SECTION *** 16210-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Concrete formwork. B. Floors and slabs on grade. C. Concrete steps and seating areas. D. Concrete planters E. Concrete foundation walls and footings. F. Concrete reinforcement. G. Joint devices associated with concrete work. H. Concrete curing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. B. Section 32 36 23 -Stone Fabrications: Cut limestone benches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ACI 211.1 -Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass - Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 1991 (Reapproved 2002). B. ACI 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International; 2005. C. ACI 302.1 R- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; American Concrete Institute International; 2004 (errata 2007). D. ACI 304R- Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2000. E. ACI 305R- Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International 1999. F. ACI 306R- Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute International; 1988 (Reapproved 2002). G. ACI 308R- Guide to Curing Concrete; American Concrete Institute International; 2001. H. ACI 318-Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International; 2008. I. ASTM A 185/A 185M -Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete; 2007. J. ASTM A 615/A 615M -Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2007. K. ASTM A 775/A 775 M - Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars; 2007. L. ASTM C 33 -Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2007. M. ASTM C 39/C 39M -Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 10 Specimens; 2005. N. ASTM C 94/C 94M -Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2007. O. ASTM C 150 -Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2007. P. ASTM C 171 - Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007. Q. ASTM C 173/C 173M -Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2007. R. ASTM C 260 - Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006. S. ASTM C 330 -Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2005. T. ASTM C 494/C 494M -Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 2008. U. ASTM C 618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete; 2005. V. ASTM C 979 - Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete; 2005. W. ASTM C 1107/C 1107M -Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink); 2007a. X. ASTM D 396/D 396M -Standard Specification for Fabrication and Jobsite Handling of Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars; 2001 (Reapproved 2007).Y. ASTM D 994 -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete (Bituminous Type); 1998 (Reapproved 2003). Z. ASTM D 1751 -Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004. AA. ASTM E 1745 -Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with — Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs; 1997 (Reapproved 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' data on manufactured products showing compliance with — specified requirements. B. Formwork Shop Drawings for Exposed Finish Architectural Concrete: Provide shop drawings showing elevation of each wall. Dimension all edges of formwork, reveals, form tie locations, and finish for all exposed concrete. B. Samples for Pigment Color Selection: Submit manufacturer's complete sample chip set, including pigment number and required dosage rate for each color. C. Verification Samples: Submit sample chips of specified colors indicating pigment numbers and required dosage rates, for subsequent comparison to installed concrete. _ D. Concrete Mix Design: Submit proposed concrete mix designs for each class of concrete specified. E. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of embedded utilities and — components that will be concealed from view upon completion of concrete work. 1.05 MOCK-UP A. Construct and erect mock-ups of: 1. Exposed Architectural Walls: Illustrating edges of formwork, reveals, form tie locations, color, textures and patterns. Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 10 a. Size: Minimum of 72 inches long by 72 inches tall. 2. Amphitheater Assembly: Illustrating edges of formwork, anchor locations bonding system, color, textures, patterns and minimum of one stone bench; see Section 32 36 23 - Stone Fabrications. a. Size: Minimum of 96 inches long and minim of two risers and treads B. Locate where directed. C. Construction shall not proceed until approval of mock-ups. D. Mock-up may not remain as part of work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 301 and ACI 318. B. Follow recommendations of ACI 305R when concreting during hot weather. C. Follow recommendations of ACI 306R when concreting during cold weather. D. Installer Qualifications: Qualified installer with a minimum of five (5) years successful documented experience in projects of similar size and complexity. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORMWORK A. Formwork Design and Construction: Comply with guidelines of ACI 347 to provide formwork that will produce concrete complying with tolerances of ACI 117. B. Form Materials: Contractor's choice of standard products with sufficient strength to withstand hydrostatic head without distortion in excess of permitted tolerances. - 1. Form Facing for Exposed Finish Architectural Concrete: Provide HDO fo-m liners with recessed tie holes and 1 inch diameter sealant cone ties where indicated. Refer to drawings for locations. a. Curved walls shall be formed by means to provide smooth curved final appearance free of imperfections created at meeting points of forms. C. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of concrete on removal. 1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1-1/2 inch to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave conical holes not larger than 1 inch in diameter in concrete surface. 3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing or waterproofing. D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC or rubber strips, 1/2 by 1/2 inch in size, maximum. E. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 2.02 REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A 615/A 615M Grade 60 (420). 1. Type: Deformed billet-steel bars. 2. Finish: a. Above Grade: Epoxy coated in accordance with ASTM A 775/A 775 M, unless otherwise indicated. b. Below Grade: Unfinished. Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 10 B. Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain type. 1. Form: Coiled Rolls. 2. Mesh Size: 6 x 6. 3. Wire Gage: W1.4 x W1.4 in 4 inch concrete slabs and precast topping slabs, unless noted otherwise. W2.9 x W2.9 in 5 inch or thicker concrete slabs. C. Reinforcement Accessories: 1. Tie Wire: Annealed, minimum 16 gage. 2. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for adequate support of reinforcement during concrete placement. 3. Provide galvanized, plastic, or plastic coated steel components for placement within 1-1/2 inches of weathering surfaces. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I - Normal portland type. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source.B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33. 1. Acquire all cement for entire project from same source. C. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F. D. Calcined Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Class N. E. Color Additives: Pure, concentrated mineral pigments specifically intended for mixing into concrete and complying with ASTM C 979. 1. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Product: "Chromix Admixtures" manufactured by Scofield Systems; or approved _ equivalent. F. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete. 2.04 CHEMICAL ADMIXTURES A. Do not use chemicals that will result in soluble chloride ions in excess of 0.1 percent by weight of cement. _ B. Air Entrainment Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. High Range Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type G. D. High Range Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type F. _ E. Water Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type E. F. Water Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type D. _ G. Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type C. H. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type B. 1. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M Type A. J. Calcium Chloride is not permitted. — 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Underslab Vapor Barrier: Multi-layer plastic extrusion of virgin polyolefin resins, or equivalent; complying with ASTM E 1745, Class A; stated by manufacturer as suitable for installation in contact with soil or granular fill under concrete slabs. 1. Acceptable Products: Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Waterloo, Iowa Page 4 of 10 a. "Stego Wrap 10 mil Class A" manufactured by Stego Industries. b. "Viper Vapor Check Ill mil" manufactured by Insulation Solutions. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. B. Non-Shrink Grout: ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171; regular curing paper, white curing paper, clear polyethylene, white polyethylene, or white burlap-polyethylene sheet. L— D. Chemical Hardener: Fluosilicate solution designed for densification of cured concrete slabs. 2.06 BONDING AND JOINTING PRODUCTS A. Joint Filler: Nonextruding, resilient asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt, complying with ASTM D 1751, 1/4 inch thick and 4 inches deep; tongue and groove profile. B. Joint Filler: Compressible asphalt mastic with felt facers, complying with ASTM D 994, 1/4 inch thick and full depth of slab less 1/2 inch. C. Slab Construction Joint Devices: Combination keyed joint form and screed, galvanized steel, with minimum 1 inch diameter holes for conduit or rebar to pass through at 6 inches on center; �— ribbed steel stakes for setting. D. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07 90 05. 2.07 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Proportioning Normal Weight Concrete: Comply with ACI 211.1 recommendations. B. Admixtures: Add acceptable admixtures as recommended in ACI 211.1 and at rates recommended by manufacturer. C. Normal Weight Concrete: 1. Compressive Strength, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 39/C 39M at 28 days: 3,000 psi for footings; 4,000 psi for foundation walls, floor interior and exterior slabs; unless otherwise indicated. See structural notes. 2. Fly Ash Content: Maximum 15 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 3. Calcined Pozzolan Content: Maximum 10 percent of cementitious materials by weight. 4. Water-Cement Ratio: Maximum 40 percent by weight. 5. Total Air Content: 4 percent, determined in accordance with ASTM C 173/C 173M. 6. Maximum Slump: 4 inches. 7. Maximum Aggregate Size: 1/2 inch. 8. Colored Concrete: Add pigments in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions to achieve consistent color from batch to batch. 2.08 MIXING A. On Project Site: Mix in drum type batch mixer, complying with ASTM C 685. Mix each batch not less than 1-1/2 minutes and not more than 5 minutes. B. Transit Mixers: Comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. C. Do not add water to mix on site beyond that amount indicated on approved mix design. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and dimensions before proceeding with work of this section. Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Waterloo, Iowa Page 5 of 10 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify that forms are clean and free of rust before applying release agent. B. Coordinate placement of embedded items with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories. C. In locations where new concrete is doweled to existing work, drill holes in existing concrete, insert steel dowels and pack solid with non-shrink grout. 3.03 FORMWORK A. Design, erect, shore, brace and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, dynamic loads and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows: 1. Class A, 1/8 inch for smooth-formed finished surfaces "Architectural"for all surfaces exposed to view. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch for rough-formed finished surfaces (concealed from view). D. Fabricate forms to result in cast-in-place architectural concrete that complies with ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." E. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. F. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses and the like, for easy removal. 1. Seal form joints and penetrations at form ties with form joint tape or form joint sealant to prevent cement paste leakage. 2. Do not use dented or rust-stained steel form-facing material on surfaces exposed in the finished work. 3. Apply sealant to circular form tie holes as indicated in drawings. G. Set edge forms, bulkheads and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required _ elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. H. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork _ is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations. I. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete as indicated in drawings. J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt and other debris just before placing concrete. K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement. 3.04 EMBEDDED ITEMS Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE _ Waterloo, Iowa Page 6 of 10 A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 3.05 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns and similar parts of the Work, that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Leave formwork, for slabs and other structural elements, that supports weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved the following: 1. At least 70 percent of 28-day design compressive strength. Concrete should be hard enough to not have surface damaged when removing formwork. C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints. Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Architect. Apply new form-release agent. 3.06 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder: Place, protect and repair vapor-retarder sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Seal perimeter, penetrations and joints(lapped 6 inches)with manufacturer's recommended tape. 3.07 INSTALLING REINFORCEMENT -- A. Comply with requirements of ACI 301. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, and accurately position, support and secure in place to achieve not less than minimum concrete coverage required for protection. 1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other foreign materials. — C. Accurately position, support and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete. E. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire. F. Verify that anchors, seats, plates, reinforcement and other items to be cast into concrete are accurately placed, positioned securely, and will not interfere with concrete placement. 3.08 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. B. Install joint devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at _ locations indicated or as approved by Architect. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Waterloo, Iowa Page 7 of 10 sides of strip placements of floors and slabs. 2. Form keyed joints from preformed galvanized steel, plastic keyway-section forms or bulkhead forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces unless noted otherwise. D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams and other locations, as indicated. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and 1/2 inch less than full depth of joint. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with plastic or other temporary preformed cap, such 1/2 x 1/2 inch wood strip or W. R. Meadows"Snap-Cap", to permit installation of joint sealant. Remove protective cap after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. _ 2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together. 3.09 PLACING CONCRETE A. Place concrete in accordance with ACI 304R. B. Place concrete for floor slabs in accordance with ACI 302.1 R. C. Ensure reinforcement, inserts, embedded parts and formed construction joint devices will not be disturbed during concrete placement. D. Do not add water to concrete during delivery or at Project site, except as follows: If concrete batch ticket indicates that the amount of water in the mix design was not fully added at the plant, then that amount of water may be added under the direct supervision of the Owner's testing agency representative. _ E. Repair underslab vapor retarder damaged during placement of concrete reinforcing. Repair with vapor retarder material; lap over damaged areas minimum 6 inches and seal watertight. F. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new '- concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.G. Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 301. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to -- consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. H. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. _ Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE _ Waterloo, Iowa Page 8 of 10 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or derbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane, free of humps or hollows, before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. I. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, or low temperatures. 1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs. — J. Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas. K. Saw cut joints within 24 hours after placing. Use 3/16 inch thick blade, cut into 1/3 depth of slab thickness. 3.10 CONCRETE FINISHING — A. Repair surface defects, including tie holes, immediately after removing formwork. B. Unexposed Form Finish: Rub down or chip off fins or other raised areas 1/4 inch or more in height. C. Exposed Form Architectural Finish: 1. Exposed Form Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defective areas. Remove fins and other projections exceeding 1/8 inch in height. -- D. Concrete Slabs: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Exposed Surfaces: "Steel trowel" as described in ACI 302.1 R, using plastic trowel blades to avoid black-burnish marks. E. Concrete Steps, Seating Areas, Ramps and Landings: Finish to requirements of ACI 302.1 R, and as follows: 1. Light broom, texture perpendicular to direction of travel with troweled and radiused edge 1/2 inch radius 3.11 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with requirements of ACI 308. Immediately after placement, protect concrete from '— premature drying, excessively hot or cold temperatures, and mechanical injury. B. Maintain concrete with minimal moisture loss at relatively constant temperature for period Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE Waterloo, Iowa Page 9 of 10 necessary for hydration of cement and hardening of concrete. C. Surfaces Not in Contact with Forms: 1. Initial Curing: Start as soon as free water has disappeared and before surface is dry. Keep continuously moist for not less than three days by water ponding, water-saturated sand, water-fog spray, or saturated burlap. 2. Final Curing: Begin after initial curing but before surface is dry. a. Moisture-Retaining Cover: Seal in place with waterproof tape or adhesive. 3.12 DEFECTIVE CONCRETE A. Defective Concrete: Concrete not conforming to required lines, details, dimensions, tolerances or specified requirements. B. Repair or replacement of defective concrete will be determined by the Architect. The cost of additional testing shall be borne by Contractor when defective concrete is identified. C. Do not patch,fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 03 30 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE _ Waterloo, Iowa Page 10 of 10 SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal form deck at exterior stairs as indicated on drawings. B. Bearing plates and angles. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 -Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 36/A 36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007. C. AWS D1.101.1 M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Societ/; 2006 and Errata. D. AWS D1.3 - Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel; American Welding Society, 2007. E. SDI (DM)- Publication No.31, Design Manual for Composite Decks, Form Decks, Roof Decks; Steel Deck Institute; 2007. F. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type ll, "Organic'); The Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate support locations, reinforcement, pertinent details, E nd accessories. B. Product Data: Provide deck profile characteristics, dimensions, structural properties and finishes. C. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS cualification within the previous 12 months. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Cut plastic wrap to encourage ventilation. B. Separate sheets and store deck on dry wood sleepers; slope for positive drainage. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL DECK A. Metal Form Deck: Corrugated sheet steel, with provision for ventilation of concrete: 1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS)Grade 33/230, with G902275 galvanized coating. 2. Minimum Metal Thickness, Excluding Finish: 20 gage. 3. Nominal Height: 1-1/2 inch. 4. Side Joints: Lapped, welded. 5. End Joints: Lapped, mechanically fastened. Lower Plaza Project#03072 0531 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 STEEL DECKING Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 2 2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Bearing Angles: Stainless steel, Type 304. B. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1. — C. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 304; self tapping. D. Weld Washers: Mild steel, uncoated, 3/4 inch outside diameter, 1/8 inch thick. E. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. — 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erect metal deck in accordance with SDI Design Manual and manufacturer's instructions. Align and level. B. Deck units and deck accessories herein specified shall be thoroughly and securely erected by experienced workmen fastening to supporting steel members as herein specified. All work shall be in conformance with manufacturer's latest printed recommendations and approved — shop drawings. C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. D. The finished work shall be true, flat planes and to slopes indicated with end joints flush and without sharp protruding edges. Exposed underside of deck shall be true without defect. E. Burning of holes in decking will not be permitted.F. Steel decking shall be installed to span supporting steel members at right angles. Panels shall be securely anchored to each structural support it rests on or passes. G. Deck shall be fastened through the bottom of the deck rib to all structural supports for the specific deck sections. H. Weld deck in accordance with AWS D1.3. — 1. Immediately after welding deck and other metal components in position, coat welds, burned areas and damaged surface coating, with touch-up primer. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 0531 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 STEEL DECKING Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 2 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Formed steel stud exterior wall framing. B. Formed steel joist and purlin framing and bridging. C. Non-load bearing furring. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00-Rough Carpentry: Exterior sheathing, interior sheathing and concealed blocking. _ B. Section 07 21 00 -Thermal Insulation: Board insulation, batt insulation and vapor barrier in exterior wall and roof construction. C. Section 07 25 00-Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip)on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. B. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2007. -- C. ASTM C 645-Standard Specification for Nonstructural Steel Framing Members; 2007. D. ASTM C 955-Standard Specification for Load-Bearing (Transverse and Axial)Steel Studs, Runners (Tracks), and Bracing or Bridging for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and -�, Metal Plaster Bases; 2007. E. AWS D1.101.1 M -Structural Welding Code -Steel; American Welding Society; 2006 and Errata. F. SSPC-Paint 20-Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type ll, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on standard framing members; describe materials and finish, product criteria, limitations. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's data on factory-made framing connectors, showing compliance with requirements. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING SYSTEM A. Provide primary and secondary framing members, bridging, bracing, plates, gussets, clips, fittings, reinforcement and fastenings as required to provide a complete framing system. 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs and Track: ASTM C 955; studs formed to channel, "C", or"Sigma" shape with punched web; U-shaped track in matching nominal width and compatible height. 1. Gage and Depth: As indicated on the drawings. Lower Plaza Project#03072 05 40 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 2 2. Galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating. B. Joists and Purlins: Fabricated from ASTM A 653/A 653M steel sheet, with G90/Z275 hot dipped galvanized coating. 1. Base Metal: As required to meet specified performance levels within maximum depths indicated. - 2. Gage and Depth: As indicated on the drawings. C. Non-Loadbearing Framing System Components: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, size and gage to comply with ASTM C 754 at spacing indicated; maximum deflection L/120 at 5 psf. 1. Furring: Z-furring, depth of 2 inches. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Bracing and Bridging: Formed sheet steel, thickness determined for conditions encountered; finish to match framing components. B. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.04 FASTENERS A. Tension Ties: Single-piece formed tension tie, galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M G90/Z275 coating. 1. Product: "S/LTT20" manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie; or approved equivalent. B. Self-Drilling, Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized per ASTM A - 153/A 153M. C. Anchorage Devices: Power actuated. - D. Welding: In conformance with AWS D1.1. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that building framing components are ready to receive work. B. Verify field measurements and adjust installation as required. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF STUDS A. Install components in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and ASTM C 1007 requirements. B. Install load bearing studs full length in one piece. Splicing of studs is not permitted. _ C. Install load bearing studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength and achieve design requirements. D. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. - 3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOISTS AND PURLINS A. Install framing components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. - B. Make provisions for erection stresses. Provide temporary alignment and bracing. C. Touch-up field welds and damaged galvanized surfaces with primer. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 05 40 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 2 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Shop fabricated steel items, including: cable guard rails, wall mounted handrails and free-standing railings at steps. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00- Cast-in-Place Concrete: Placement of metal fabrications and anchors in concrete. B. Section 09 90 00 - Painting and Coating: Field finish. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Al4.3-American National Standard for Ladders -- Fixed --Safety Requirements; 2002. B. ASTM A 36/A 36M -Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2005. C. ASTM A 53/A 53M -Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007. D. ASTM A 123/A 123M -Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002. E. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. F. ASTM A 276-Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2008. G. ASTM A 283/A 283M -Standard Specification for Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates; 2003(Reapproved 2007). H. ASTM A 325-Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2007a. I. ASTM A 325M -Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated 830 MPa Tensile Strength (Metric); 2007. J. ASTM E 935-Standard Test Methods for Performance of Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). K. ASTM E 985-Standard Specification for Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). L. ASTM F 1145-Standard Specification for Turnbuckles, Swaged, Welded, Forged; 2005. M. AWS A2.4- Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; American Welding Society; 2007. N. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M -Structural Welding Code- Steel; American Welding Society; 2006 and Errata. O. SSPC-Paint 15-Steel Joist Shop Primer; Society for Protective Coatings; 1999 (Ed. 2004). P. SSPC-Paint 20 -Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002(Ed. 2004). Lower Plaza Project#03072 05 50 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 METAL FABRICATIONS Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 4 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations and details where applicable. 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, spacing, locations of members, openings, attachments and fasteners. 2. Connections not detailed. 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. B. Welders' Certificates: Submit certification for welders employed on the project, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS -STEEL A. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36/A 36M. B. Steel Angles and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Pipe: 1. ASTM A 53/A 53M, Grade B Schedule 40, hot-dip galvanized finish. 2. ASTM A 276, Stainless steel, Type 316, satin finish. — D. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011 M, Designation SS, Grade 30 hot-rolled, or ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation SS, Grade 30 cold-rolled. E. Cable: 1 x 19 construction, Type 316, stainless steel aircraft cable, 1/4 inch thick, minimum 6400 Ibs breaking strength. F. Turnbuckles: ASTM F 1145, Type 316, stainless steel turnbuckles, threaded rod ends. 1. Product: "Invisiware Receiver" manufactured by Ultra-tec; or approved equivalent. G. Wall Brackets: Stainless steel, self-aligning. 1. Product: "Carlstadt 221" manufactured by Julius Blum; or approved equivalent. _ H. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153/A 153M where connecting galvanized components. I. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1/D1.1 M; type required for materials being welded. J. Welding Fittings: Factory-or shop-welded from matching pipe or tube; seams continuously welded;joints and seams ground smooth. — K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. L. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with — VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Accurately form components to suit specific project conditions and for proper connection — B. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. C. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. D. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. — Lower Plaza Project#03072 05 50 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 METAL FABRICATIONS — Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 4 E. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted _ otherwise. 2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Railings and Handrails- General: 1. Design, fabricate and test railing assemblies in accordance with the most stringent requirements of ASTM E 985 and applicable local code. 2. Design railing assembly, wall rails and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 Ibs at any point without damage or permanent set. 3. Allow for expansion and contraction of members and building movement without damage to connections or members. 4. Provide anchors and other components as required to attach to structure, made of same materials as railing components unless otherwise indicated; where exposed fasteners are unavoidable provide flush countersunk fasteners. a. For anchorage to concrete, provide inserts to be cast into concrete, for bolting anchors. B. Cable Guard Rail: Steel; with mounting brackets and attachments; prime paint finish except stainless steel cable. 1. Fabrication: As indicated on drawings to match existing. C. Wall Mounted Handrails and Free-Standing Railings at Steps: Stainless steel; with mounting brackets and attachments. 1. Fabrication: As indicated on drawings. 2. Provide welding fittings to join lengths, seal open ends and conceal exposed mounting bolts and nuts, including but not limited to elbows, T-shapes, splice connectors, flanges, escutcheons and wall brackets. 3. Continuously seal joined pieces by continuous welds. Drill condensate drainage holes at bottom of members at locations that will not encourage water intrusion. 4. Wall brackets shall be at maximum of 48 inches o.c. 2.04 FINISHES -STEEL A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. — B. Prime Painting: One coat. C. Galvanizing of Non-structural Items: Galvanize after fabrication to ASTM A 123/A 123M requirements. 2.05 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Squareness: 1/8 inch maximum difference in diagonal measurements. B. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch. C. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch. D. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch in 48 inches. E. Maximum Deviation from Plane: 1/16 inch in 48 inches. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. Lower Plaza Project#03072 05 50 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 METAL FABRICATIONS Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 4 3.02 PREPARATION A. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to be cast into concrete. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Field weld components indicated. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. E. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. F. After erection, prime welds, abrasions and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/4 inch. B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment: 1/4 inch. C. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch. END OF SECTION _ Lower Plaza Project#03072 05 50 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 METAL FABRICATIONS _ Waterloo, Iowa Page 4 of 4 SECTION 0610 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Exterior and interior sheathing. B. Communications and electrical room mounting boards. C. Concealed framing, blocking and nailers. D. Rough opening framing for doors and roof openings. E. Roofing nailers. F. Preservative treated wood materials. - G. Fire retardant treated wood materials H. All wood in contact with roofing, waterproofing or flashing to be preservative trE�ated. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Formed steel stud exterior wall and roof framing. B. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Water-resistive barrier over sheathing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI A208.1 - American National Standard for Particleboard; 1999. B. ASTM A 153/A 153M -Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2005. C. ASTM D 2898 -Standard Test Methods for Accelerated Weathering of Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood for Fire Testing; 2007. D. ASTM E 84 -Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Bui ding Materials; 2008. E. AWPA C2 - Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Preservers'Association; 2002. F. AWPA C20 -Structural Lumber-- Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Protection Association; 2003. G. AWPA C27 - Plywood -- Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; American Wood-Protection Association; 2002. H. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; American Wood-Preservers' Association; 2007, I. PS 20 -American Softwood Lumber Standard; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce); 2005. J. WWPA G-5 -Western Lumber Grading Rules; Western Wood Products Association; 2005. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide technical data on wood preservative materials. Lower Plaza Project#03072 06 10 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 ROUGH CARPENTRY Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 4 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection agencies. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. General: Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation. PART 2 PRODUCTS _ 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. Species: Douglas Fir-Larch, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee(www.alsc.org)and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless _ otherwise indicated. 2.02 DIMENSION LUMBER A. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. — B. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. C. Miscellaneous Framing, Blocking, Nailers, Grounds and Furring: 1. Lumber: S4S, No. 1 or Construction Grade. 2. Boards: Standard or No. 3. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION PANELS — A. Exterior Wall and Roof Sheathing: Orient strand board (OSB), APA Standard PS 2-2004, exterior grade; square edges, 3/4 inch thickn. B. Interior Wall and Roof Sheathing: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density fiberboard; 1/2 inch thick. C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: PS 1 A-D plywood, or medium density _ fiberboard; 314 inch thick;flame spread index of 25 or less, smoke developed index of 450 or less, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. D. Other Applications: — 1. Plywood Concealed from View but Located within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1, C-C Plugged or better, Exterior grade. 2. Plywood Exposed to View but Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or better. _ 3. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: _ 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M for high humidity and preservative-treated wood locations, unfinished steel elsewhere. 2.03 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT -` A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. '- 1. Fire-Retardant Treated Wood: Mark each piece of wood with producer's stamp indicating compliance with specified requirements. 2. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an _ Lower Plaza Project#03072 06 10 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ROUGH CARPENTRY Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 4 ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in &ccordance with AWPA standards. B. Fire Retardant Treatment: 1. Interior Type A: AWPA Use Category UCFA, Commodity Specification H (Treatment C20 for lumber and C27 for plywood), low temperature (low hygroscopic)type, chemically treated and pressure impregnated; capable of providing a maximum flame spread rating of 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84, with no evidence of signif cant combustion when test is extended for an additional 20 minutes. C. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber above Grade: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A(Treatment C2) using waterborne preservative to 0 25 Ib/cu ft retention. 1. Kiln dry lumber after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percer t. 2. Treat lumber in contact with roofing or flashing. 3. Treat lumber in contact with concrete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Select material sizes to minimize waste. B. Reuse scrap to the greatest extent possible; clearly separate scrap for use on site as accessory components, including: shims, bracing, and blocking. 3.02 BLOCKING, NAILERS AND SUPPORTS A. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking. B. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window opersings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing. C. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or other method of support is explicitly indicated. D. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated. 3.03 ROOF-RELATED CARPENTRY A. Coordinate installation of roofing carpentry with deck construction, framing of roof openings, and roofing assembly installation. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF CONSTRUCTION PANELS A. Roof Sheathing: Secure panels with long dimension perpendicular to framinc members, with ends staggered and over firm bearing. 1. Nail panels to framing; staples are not permitted. B. Wall Sheathing: Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, witl- ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails, screws or staples. 1. Use acceptable structural panels at building corners, for not less than 96 inches, measured horizontally. C. Communications and Electrical Room Mounting Boards: Secure with screws to studs with edges over firm bearing; space fasteners at maximum 24 inches on center on all edges and into Lower Plaza Project#03072 061000 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 ROUGH CARPENTRY Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 4 studs in field of board. 1. Where boards are indicated as full floor-to-ceiling height, install with long edge of board parallel to studs. 2. Install adjacent boards without gaps. 3. Size and Location: As indicated on drawings. 3.05 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment compatible with factory applied treatment at site-sawn cuts, complying with manufacturer's instructions. B. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.06 CLEANING A. Waste Disposal: 1. Comply with applicable regulations. 2. Do not burn scrap on project site. 3. Do not burn scraps that have been pressure treated. 4. Do not send materials treated with pentachlorophenol, CCA or ACA to co-generation facilities or"waste-to-energy"facilities. B. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill. C. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 06 10 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 ROUGH CARPENTRY Waterloo, Iowa Page 4 of 4 SECTION 07 21 00 THERMAL INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Board insulation at perimeter foundation wall, underside of floor slabs and furred wall. B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in exterior wall and roof construction. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete foundations and slabs-on-grade. B. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Supporting construction for batt insulation. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation; 2005a. B. ASTM C 665 -Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product limitations. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS w 2.01 APPLICATIONS A. Insulation under Concrete Slabs: Extruded polystyrene board, unless indicated otherwise in Drawings. B. Insulation at Perimeter of Foundation: Extruded polystyrene board. C. Insulation in Metal Furred Walls: Extruded polystyrene board. D. Insulation in Metal Framed Walls and Roofs: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder. 2.02 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS A. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation for Underslab Applications: ASTM C 578, Type VII; Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with &e following characteristics: 1. Board Size: 48 x 96 inches. 2. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings. 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Thermal Resistance per ASTM C 518 @ 75°F mean temp., ft2 x h x °F / ETU, min.: R = 5.0 per inch. 5. Compressive Resistance: 40 psi. 6. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.1 percent, volume. 7. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96 per max.: 0.8. 8. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co; Product"Styrofoam Highload 40"; www.building dow.com. Lower Plaza Project#03072 0721 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 THER'VIAL INSULATION Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 4 b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. c. Pactiv Building Products: www.pactiv.com/green-guard. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. B. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation for Foundation Wall and Drainage Protection Board Applications: ASTM C 578, Type IV; Extruded polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Size: 24 x 96 inch. 2. Thickness: As indicated on drawings. _ 3. Edges: Shiplap. 4. Thermal Resistance per ASTM C 518 at 75 degrees F mean temp., ft2 x h x degrees F / BTU, min.: R= 5.0 per inch. 5. Compressive Resistance: 30 psi. 6. Water Absorption, Maximum: 0.1 percent, volume. 7. Drainage Capacity, ASTM D 4716 at 1,200 psf, gradient 0.19, gal/min/ft: 3.0. 8. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96 per max.: 1.1. _ 9. Manufacturers: a. Dow Chemical Co; Product"Styrofoam Perimate": www.dow.com. b. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. — d. Pactiv Building Products: www.pactiv.com/green-guard. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Extruded Polystyrene Board Insulation in Furred Walls: ASTM C 578, Type VII; Extruded — polystyrene board with either natural skin or cut cell surfaces; with the following characteristics: 1. Board Size: 24 x 96 inches. 2. Board Thickness: 2 inches. — 3. Board Edges: Square. 4. Thermal Resistance per ASTM C 518 @ 75°F mean temp.,ft2 x h x °F/ BTU, min.: R = 5.0 per inch. 5. Compressive Resistance: 15 psi. — 6. Water Absorption, maximum: 0.1 percent, volume. 7. Water Vapor Permeance, ASTM E 96 per max.: 1.1. 8. Manufacturers: — a. Dow Chemical Co, Product: Styrofoam Z-Mate; www.dow.com. b. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. c. Pactiv Building Products: www.pactiv.com/green-guard. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. -- 2.03 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be used, — at Contractor's option. B. Batt Insulation: ASTM C 665; glass or mineral fiber batt; friction fit, conforming to the following: 1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136, except for -- facing, if any. 2. Formaldehyde Content: Zero. 3. Thickness: 6 inches, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Facing: Unfaced. 5. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com. b. Johns Manville Corporation: www.im.com. -- c. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. d. Thermafiber, Inc: www.thermafiber.com. e. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. _ Lower Plaza Project#03072 0721 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 THERMAL INSULATION — Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 4 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Clear polyethylene film for above grade application, 6 mil thick. B. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2 inch wide. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION '— A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates are ready to receive insulation and adhesive (if any). 3.02 BOARD INSTALLATION AT FOUNDATION PERIMETER A. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over construction, control and expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint. 1. Tape seal joints. 2. Extend sheet full height of joint. B. Apply adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. 2. Full bed 1/8 inch thick. C. Install boards horizontally on foundation perimeter. 1. Place boards to maximize adhesive contact. 2. Install in running bond pattern. 3. Butt edges and ends tightly to adjacent boards and to protrusions. D. Extend boards over expansion joints, unbonded to foundation on one side of joint. E. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. F. Immediately following application of board insulation, place protective boards over exposed insulation surfaces. 1. Apply adhesive in five continuous beads per board length. 2. Install boards horizontally from base of foundation to top of insulation. 3. Butt boards tightly, with joints staggered from insulation joints. 3.03 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS A. Place insulation under slabs on grade after base for slab has been compacted. B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged while placing vapor retarder and placing —' slab. 3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION IN WALL CONSTRUCTION A. Adhere a 6 inch wide strip of polyethylene sheet over expansion joints with double beads of adhesive each side of joint. B. Apply adhesive to back of boards: 1. Three continuous beads per board length. 2. Full bed 1/8 inch thick. C. Install boards vertically on walls. D. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane. Lower Plaza Project#03072 0721 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 THERMAL INSULATION Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 4 E. Place 6 inch wide polyethylene sheet at perimeter of wall openings, from adhesive vapor retarder bed to window and door frames. Tape seal in place to ensure continuity of vapor retarder and air seal. F. Tape insulation board joints. 3.05 BATT INSTALLATION IN WALL CONSTRUCTION A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install in exterior wall and roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation. C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids. D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical services within the plane of the insulation. E. At metal framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation; lap and seal sheet retarder joints over member face. F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder. G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter of adjacent window and door frames and other _ items interrupting the plane of the membrane. Tape seal in place. 3.06 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 0721 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 THERMAL INSULATION Waterloo, Iowa Page 4 of 4 SECTION 07 25 00 WEATHER BARRIERS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Water-Resistive Barrier: Under exterior wall cladding, over sheathing. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wall sheathing. B. Section 07 42 13 - Metal Wall Panels: Custom wall panels. C. Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Trim and Flashing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Weather Barrier: Assemblies that form either water-resistive barriers, air barriers, vapor retarders, or water-resistive barriers. B. Air Barrier: Air-tight barrier made of material that is relatively air impermeable out water vapor permeable, both to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. C. Vapor Retarder: Air-tight barrier made of material that is relatively water vapor impermeable, to the degree specified, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. 1. Water Vapor Permeance: For purposes of conversion, 57.2 ng/(Pa s sq m) = 1 perm. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM D 412-Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplas:ic Elastomers--Tension; 2006a. B. ASTM D 1970 -Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bitr.minous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2001. C. ASTM E 96/E 96M -Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2005. _ D. ASTM E 2178-Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 2003. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data on material characteristics. B. Shop Drawings: Provide drawings of special joint conditions. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation. 1.06 MOCK-UP A. Install air barrier and vapor retarder materials in mock-up specified in Section 07 43 13 - Metal Wall Panels. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Product shall be compatible with wall panel, see Section 07 42 13 - Metal Wall Panels. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 WEATHER BARRIER ASSEMBLIES A. Air Barrier and Vapor Retarder: On outside surface of sheathing of exterior walls use air and Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 25 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 WEATHER BARRIERS Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 3 vapor barrier sheet, self adhering. 2.02 AIR BARRIER AND VAPOR RETARDER MATERIALS A. Air Barrier and Vapor Retarder Sheet: Factory made, self-adhering, cold-applied sheet composites, complying with ASTM D 1970. 1. Material: High density, crosslaminated polyethylene film coated on 1 side with 0.036 inch layer of rubberized asphalt adhesive interwound, with disposable silicone-treated release sheet. 2. Thickness: 0.040 inch. 3. Air Permeance: 0.002 cubic feet per square foot, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178. 4. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.03 perm, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96/E 96M, Method A. 5. Manufacturers: a. Grace Construction Products; Product"Perm-A-Barrier Wall Membrane": www.na.graceconstruction.com. b. Henry Company: www.henry.com. c. PROSOCO: www.prosoco.com. d. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Primers, Cleaners and Other Sealant Materials: As recommended by sealant manufacturer, appropriate to application and compatible with adjacent materials. B Self-Adhesive Sheet Flashing: ASTM D 1970. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and conditions are ready to accept the work of this section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove projections, protruding fasteners and loose or foreign matter that might interfere with proper installation. B. Clean and prime substrate surfaces to receive adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Air Barriers and Vapor Retarders: Install continuous air-tight barrier over surfaces indicated, with sealed seams and with sealed joints to adjacent surfaces. C. Apply sealants and adhesives within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer if temperature is out of this range. D. Self-Adhesive Sheets: 1. Prepare substrate in manner recommended by sheet manufacturer; fill and tape joints in substrate and between dissimilar materials. 2. Lap sheets shingle-fashion to shed water and seal laps air-tight. 3. Use same material, or other material approved by sheet manufacturer for the purpose, to seal to adjacent construction and as flashing. 4. At wide joints, provide extra flexible membrane allowing joint movement. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 25 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 WEATHER BARRIERS Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 3 3.04 PROTECTION A. Do not leave materials exposed to weather longer than recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 25 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 WEATHER BARRIERS Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07 42 13 METAL WALL PANELS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Custom metal panels for walls, with accessory components. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS y A. Section 05 40 00 -Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Structural back-up. B. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wall panel substrate. —` C. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers: Weather-resistive barrier over sheathing. D. Section 07 62 00-Sheet Metal Trim and Flashing: Flashings, counterflashings, scuppers and downspouts. E. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. F. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. G. Section 09 90 05- Paints and Coatings. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B 32 -Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008. B. ASTM B 152/ B 152M -Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar; 2009. C. ASTM B 370-Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction; 2009. D. SMACNA (ASMM)-Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, layout,joints, construction details, methods of anchorage. B. Samples for Initial Selections: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied color finishes. C. Samples for Verification: Provide color samples of selected color. Samples shall involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS r A. Sealed joints shall allow free and silent movement of panels during expansion and contraction while preventing uncontrolled penetration of moisture. B. Fabrication and installation shall prevent deformation of exposed surfaces. C. Design panel system to accommodate substructure tolerance of+0 to-1/8 inch. D. Not Permitted: Vibration harmonics;wind whistles; noises caused by thermal movement; thermal movement transmitted to other building elements; loosening, weakening or fracturing of attachments or components of system. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 42 13 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 METAL WALL PANELS Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 3 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE _ A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three (3)years of documented experience. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up, 4 by 4 feet; include panel system, attachments to building frame and associated weather barrier materials. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect panels from accelerated weathering by removing or venting sheet plastic shipping wrap. B. Store prefinished material off ground and protected from weather. Prevent twisting, bending, or _ abrasion, and provide ventilation to stored materials. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. C. Prevent contact with materials that may cause discoloration or staining of products. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual supporting and adjoining construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate recorded measurements on final shop drawings. — Coordinate construction to ensure that flat-lock panels fit properly to supporting and adjoining construction and coordinate schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the work, guarantee dimensions and proceed with fabrication of flat-lock panels corresponding to the established dimensions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATOR A. Custom Metal Wall Panels: 1. Hawkeye Sheet Metal, Inc in Waterloo, Iowa -- 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00- Product Requirements. 2.02 METAL PANELS A. Custom Wall Panels: Copper metal panels, fasten to structure with concealed corrosion-resistant fasteners. All fasteners to be concealed after installation. 1. Material: ASTM B 370; cold rolled 20 oz/sq ft thick. 2. Profile and Size: As indicated in drawings. 3. Finish: Natural finish, unless indicated otherwise 2.03 ACCESSORIES _ A. Panel Clips: Same material and thickness as wall panel; type recommended by fabricator B. Flashing: Stainless steel, copper or copper alloy; type recommended by fabricator, see Section 07 62 00. C. Fasteners: Stainless steel, copper or copper alloy, nails or screws; type recommended by fabricator. D. Sealants: Type E2 specified in Section 07 90 05. E. Solder: ASTM B 32; type as recommended by manufacturer. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 42 13 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 METAL WALL PANELS Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 3 2.04 FABRICATION A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest practicable lengths. C. Form panels for flat-lock seams. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION -- A. Verify that building framing members are ready to receive panels. B. Verify that water-resistive barrier has been installed over substrate completely and correctly. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Fasten panels to structural supports; aligned, level and plumb. B. Install panels with concealed clip system at 12 inches o.c., maximum. Wall panels shall have minimum of 2 clips per vertical edge. C. Use concealed fasteners unless otherwise approved by Architect. Provide minimum 2 fasteners per clip. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Offset from True Alignment between Adjacent Members Butting or In Line: 1/16 inch. B. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location Indicated on Drawings: 1/4 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean and wash surfaces with mild soap and water; rinse with clean water. END OF SECTION ` Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 42 13 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 METAL WALL PANELS Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07 53 00 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Elastomeric roofing membrane, adhered conventional application. B. Insulation, flat and tapered. C. Flashings. D. Roofing cant strips, stack boots, and roofing expansion joints. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry: Wood roofing substrate and nailers. B. Section 07 62 00 -Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Flashing, counterflashings, scuppers, and gutters. C. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof hatches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M -Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2006. B. ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocya nu rate Thermal Insulation Board; 2007. C. ASTM D 412 - Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers- Tension; 2006a. D. ASTM D 624- Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers; 2000 (Reapproved 2007). E. ASTM D 746-Standard Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and Elastomers by Impact; 2007. F. ASTM D 4637 -Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof Membrane; 2004. G. FM DS 1-28-Wind Design; Factory Mutual Research Corporation; 2007. H. NRCA ML104 -The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; National Roofing Contractors Association; Fifth Edition, with interim updates. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating membrane materials, flashing materials, insulation, vapor retarder, surfacing, and fasteners. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate joint or termination detail conditions and conditions of interface with other materials. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate membrane seaming precautions and perimeter conditions requiring special attention. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. E. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 53 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 5 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual and manufacturer's instructions. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, with seals and labels — intact. B. Store products in weather protected environment, clear of ground and moisture. C. Protect foam insulation from direct exposure to sunlight. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather. B. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is expected or occurring. ^ C. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be weatherproofed the same day. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide 30 year manufacturer's material and labor warranty to cover failure to prevent penetration of water. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. EPDM Roofing Systems: 1. Carlisle SynTec; Product"Sure-Seal Adhered Roofing System": www.carlisle-syntec.com. 2. Other acceptable systems: a. Firestone Building Products Co; Product"RubberGard Platinum Roofing System": _. www.firestonebpco.com b. Versico Roofing Systems; Product"VersiGard Roofing System": www.versico.com. c. Substitutions: See Division 01 -General Requirements. 2.02 ROOFING - UNBALLASTED APPLICATIONS A. Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, fully adhered, over vapor retarder and insulation, minimum R-20. B. Components of roofing system shall be products supplied by single manufacturer to ensure warranty. 2.03 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS A. Membrane: Ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer(EPDM); complying with minimum properties of ASTM D 4637. -- 1. Thickness: 90 mil. 2. Color: Black. 3. Tensile Strength: 1305 psi, measured in accordance with ASTM D 412. 4. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D412. 5. Tear Strength: 150 Ibf/in, measured in accordance with ASTM D 624. 6. Brittleness Temperature: -49 deg F., measured in accordance with ASTM D 746. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 53 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 5 ._ B. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. C. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane; conforming to the following: 1. Thickness: 40 mil. 2. Color: Black. D. Coverboard: Glass mat faced gypsum panels, ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, fire resistant type, 1/4 inch thick. E. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: Rigid cellular foam, complying with ASTM C 1289, medium weight fiber-reinforced felt facer both sides and with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: 20 psi 2. Board Size: 48 x 96 inch. 3. Board Thickness: As indicate on drawings. 4. Board Edges: Square. F. Vapor Barrier: Self-adhesive SBS modified bitumen and a polyethylene woven composite facer. 1. Thickness: 32 mil. 2. Top Face: Polyethylene woven composite facer. 3. Undersurface: Silicone release film. 4. Breaking Strength: 88 Ibf/in. 5. Elongation: 24 percent. 6. Static Puncture: 90 lbs. 7. Tear Resistance: 90 Ibf. 8. Product: "SOPRAVAP'R XD" manufactured by Suprema; or approved equivalent. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Roofing Expansion Joint Flashing: Sheet butyl. B. Stack Boots: Prefabricated flexible boot and collar for pipe stacks through membrane; same material as membrane. C. Cant Strips: Wood; pressure preservative treated. D. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing manufacturer. 1. Length as required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of deck substrate, with metal washers. E. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. —. F. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives. G. Thinners and Cleaners: As recommended by adhesive manufacturer, compatible with membrane. H. Strip Reglet Devices: Galvanized steel, maximum possible lengths per location, with attachment flanges. I. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify deck is supported and secure. C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly sloped and suitable for installation of roof system. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 53 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 5 D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice. E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips _ are in place. 3.02 INSULATION - UNDER MEMBRANE A. Apply vapor retarder to deck surface with adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1. Extend vapor retarder under cant strips and blocking to deck edge. 2. Install flexible flashing from vapor retarder to air seal material of wall construction, lap and seal to provide continuity of the air barrier plane. B. Ensure vapor retarder is clean and dry, continuous, and ready for application of insulation. C. Attachment of Insulation: 1. Mechanically fasten first and second layer of insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's instructions and Factory Mutual requirements. D. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inch from joints of preceding layer. E. Place tapered insulation to the required slope pattern in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. F. On metal deck, place boards parallel to flutes with insulation board edges bearing on deck flutes. G. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing. Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around penetrations through roof. ^ H. Do not apply more insulation than can be covered with membrane in same day. 3.03 MEMBRANE APPLICATION A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching. B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage. C. Fully Adhered Application: Apply adhesive to substrate at rate of recommended by manufacturer. Fully embed membrane in adhesive except in areas directly over or within 3 inches of expansion joints. Fully adhere one roll before proceeding to adjacent rolls. D. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches. Seal permanently waterproof. Apply uniform bead of sealant to joint edge. E. At intersections with vertical surfaces: 1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches onto vertical surfaces. 2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips. F. Around roof penetrations, seal flanges and flashings with flexible flashing. G. Install roofing expansion joints where indicated. Make joints watertight. H. Coordinate installation of roof drains and related fleshings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces. B. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions. C. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 53 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING Waterloo, Iowa Page 4 of 5 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations. B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable materials. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 53 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ELASTOMERIC MEMBRANE ROOFING Waterloo, Iowa Page 5 of 5 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, scuppers and downspouts. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 25 00 -Weather Barriers. B. Section 07 42 13 - Metal Wall Panels: Custom copper wall panels. C. Section 07 53 00 - Elasotmeric Membrane Roofing: Roofing system. D. Section 07 72 00 - Roof Accessories: Roof-mounted units. E. Section 07 90 05 -Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2006a. B. ASTM B 32 -Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004. C. ASTM B 152/ B 152M -Standard Specification for Copper Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Rolled Bar; 2009. D. ASTM B 370 -Standard Specification for Copper Sheet and Strip for Building Construction; 2009. E. ASTM D 4586 -Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000 (Reapproved 2006). F. SMACNA(ASMM) -Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Ccnditioning Contractors' National Association; 2003. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Indicate material profile,jointing pattern, jointing details, fastening methods, fleshings, terminations, and installation details. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual requirements and standard details, except as otherwise indicated. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Stack material to prevent twisting, bending, and abrasion, and to provide ventilation. Slope metal sheets to ensure drainage. B. Prevent contact with materials that could cause discoloration or staining. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum 0.02 inch thick base metal. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 62 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 3 B. Copper: ASTM B 370; cold rolled 20 oz/sq ft thick;finish to match copper wall panels, see Section 07 42 13. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Type as recommended by manufacturer to be compatible with material, with soft A neoprene washers. B. Primer: Zinc chromate type. C. Protective Backing Paint: Zinc molybdate alkyd. D. Sealant: Type E2 specified in Section 07 90 05. E. Plastic Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type I.F. Solder: ASTM B 32; type as recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 FABRICATION _ A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects. B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths. C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch; miter and seam corners. D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated. At moving joints, use sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams. E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs; seam for rigidity, seal with sealant. F. Fabricate vertical faces with bottom edge formed outward 1/4 inch and hemmed to form drip. '- 2.04 GUTTER AND DOWNSPOUT FABRICATION A. Scuppers and Downspouts: Copper, SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual, profile as ._ indicated on drawings. B. Accessories: 1. Anchorage Devices: Stainless steel, copper or copper alloy; type recommended by •— fabricator in accordance with SMACNA requirements. C. Splash Pads: Precast concrete type, of size and profiles indicated; minimum 3000 psi at 28 days, with minimum 5 percent air entrainment. D. Seal metal joints. PART 3 EXECUTION -- 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure. — 3.02 PREPARATION A. Install starter and edge strips, and cleats before starting installation. B. Back paint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film T thickness of 15 mil. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners. Use exposed fasteners only where permitted. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 62 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 3 — B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings. C. Fit flashings tight in place. Make corners square, surfaces true and straight it; planes, and lines accurate to profiles. D. Solder metal joints for full metal surface contact. After soldering, wash metal clean with neutralizing solution and rinse with water. E. Secure scuppers and downspouts in place using concealed fasteners. F. Set splash pads under downspouts. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 62 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 3 SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof hatches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 05 31 00 -Steel Decking. B. Section 05 40 00 - Cold-Formed Metal Framing. C. Section 07 53 00 - Elastomeric Membrane Roofing: EPDM roofing. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. -- 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products under cover and elevated above grade. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF HATCHES A. Manufacturers - Roof Hatches: 1. Nystorm: www.nystorm.com. 2. Acudor Products Inc: www.acudor.com. 3. Bilco Co.: www.bilco.com 4. Dur-Red Products: www.dur-red.com. 5. Milcor Inc: www.milcorinc.com. —. 6. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Roof Hatches: Factory-assembled steel frame and cover, complete with operating and release hardware. 1. Style: Provide flat metal covers unless otherwise indicated. 2. Mounting: Provide frames and curbs suitable for mounting on corrugated metal roof deck. 3. For Equipment Access: Double leaf; 72 x 72 inches. i 4. Product: "RHG -Galvanized Steel Roof Hatches" manufactured by Nystorm; or approved equivalent. C. Frames/Curbs: One-piece curb and frame with integral cap flashing to receive roof flashings; extended bottom flange to suit mounting. 1. Material: Galvanized steel, 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick. 2. Finish: Powder coat finish, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. -- 3. Insulation: 1 inch rigid fiberboard, located on outside face of curb. 4. Curb Height: 12 inches from surface of roof deck, minimum. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 72 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ROOF ACCESSORIES Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 2 D. Metal Covers: Flush, insulated, hollow metal construction. 1. Capable of supporting 40 psf live load. 2. Material: Galvanized steel; outer cover 14 gage, 0.0747 inch thick, liner 22 gage, 0.03 inch thick. 3. Finish: Powder coat finish, color to be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Insulation: 1 inch rigid polystyrene. 5. Gasket: Neoprene, continuous around cover perimeter. E. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. 1. Lifting Mechanisms: Greased compression springs enclosed in telescopic tubes; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf load. _. 2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type. 3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release. 4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release. 5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior. 6. Locking: Padlock hasp on outside. F. Mounting Flange: 3-1/2 inch on single wall curb. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing weather integrity. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 72 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ROOF ACCESSORIES Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 2 SECTION 07 76 00 ROOF PAVERS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pavers for pedestrian traffic on existing pedestals. B. Removal of existing pavers. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Maintenance requirements. 1.03 MOCK-UP A. Construct mock-up, 8 x 8 feet illustrating color, textures and patterns. B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up may remain as part of the Work. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Store products off the ground; if stored on the roof, do not exceed structural capacity of deck. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Deck Pavers: Provide manufacturer's 10 year limited material warranty. 1.06 MAINTENANCE TOOLS A. Paver Lifter: Provide two paver lifting tools for Owner's maintenance; deliver to Owner at location directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Roof Pavers: 1. Wausau Tile, Inc: www.wausautile.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PEDESTRIAN DECK APPLICATIONS A. Plaza Deck Pavers: Precast concrete unit pavers. 1. Compressive Strength: 6500 psi, minimum, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 140. 2. Water Absorption: 6 percent, maximum, when tested in accordance witl- ASTM C 140. 3. Freeze-Thaw Resistance: Maximum 1 percent loss of dry weight, when ested in - accordance with ASTM C 67. 4. Size: 24 by 24 inches, nominal. 5. Thickness: 2 inches. 6. Colors: 3008, 5008 and 7008; as indicated on drawings. 7. Pattern: As indicated on drawings. 8. Product: "Type Three Cotillion FDX Pavers" manufactured by Wausau T ile; or approved Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 76 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ROOF PAVERS Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 2 equivalent. B. Remove existing roof pavers and move in location to be decided by Owner. C. Adjustable Paver Pedestals: Existing shall be salvaged and re-used. Provide new shims and pedestals as required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Roofs: Verify that adequate roof structure load capacity has been determined by professional engineer. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean roof surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Do not damage existing roof membrane. B. Plan sequence of transporting and placing pavers to avoid damage to waterproof membrane and already installed pavers; place 3/4 inch thick plywood in traffic paths or use carts with pneumatic tires. C. Verify roof installers requirements to maintain roof warranty and to prevent damage to roof surfaces. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install pavers on pedestals in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install pavers over entire roof surfaces as indicated on the drawings. C. Install pavers in square grid pattern as indicated on drawings; do not cut pavers unnecessarily; if less than full size pavers will be required, locate less than full size pavers at least conspicuous edges. D. Install pavers with top surface flat and dead level, with minimal difference in height between adjacent pavers; accommodate varying heights due to slope by using adjustable height pedestals; use a reliable method of determining levels. E. When pavers must be cut, use power sawing equipment with masonry blade; do not chip or split; remove dust generated by cutting immediately using high pressure water or air to avoid discoloration of pavers. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean installed work to like-new condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 76 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 ROOF PAVERS Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 2 SECTION 07 90 05 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Joint Sealants, including primers, backer rod and bond breaker tape. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 834 - Standard Specification for Latex Sealants. B. ASTM C 920 -Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. C. ASTM C 1193 -Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants. D. ASTM D 1667 -Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations, and color availability. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacture, during and after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SEALANTS A. Type E1 - General Purpose Exterior Sealant: Polyurethane; ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, Uses M, G, and A; single component, gun grade. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces. 2. Product: NP-1 manufactured by Sonneborn; Dynatrol 1 manufactured by Pecora; PSI 901/RC1 manufactured by Polymeric Systems, Inc.; or approved equivalent. 3. Applications: Use for: a. Expansion joints in floor slab. b. Joints between masonry, and other materials. c. Joints between metal frames and adjacent materials. d. Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated. B. Type E2 - Exterior Metal Joint Sealant: Butyl or polyisobutylene, nondrying, nonskinning, nonduring. 1. Product: Multi-Purpose Sealant manufactured by Sonneborn; BC-158 manufactured by Pecora; PSI 301 manufactured by Polymeric Systems, Inc.; or approved equivalent. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal work. C. Type E3 - Concrete Walk Joint Sealant: Polyurethane, self-leveling; ASTM C -320, Class 25, Uses T, M and A; single component. 1. Color: Gray. 2. Product: SL-1 manufactured by Sonneborn, NR 201 Urexpan manufactured by Pecora, PSI-951 manufactured by Polymeric Systems, Inc., or approved equivalent. - 3. Applications: Use for: a. Expansion and isolation joints in sidewalks and parking lot paving. Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 90 05 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 JOINT SEALERS Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 3 D. Type E4-Low-modulus concrete joint sealant, hot pour, single component, manufactured from virgin polymer asphalt, plasticisers and inert fillers, complying with ASTM D3405 and FS SS-S- 1401 B. 1. Product: Hi-Spec manufactured by W.R.Meadows. 2. Applications: Use for: a. Exterior concrete sawn and formed control or construction joints in paving or walks. E. Type 11 -General Purpose Interior Sealant: Acrylic emulsion latex; ASTM C 834, single component, paintable. 1. Color: Standard colors matching finished surfaces, or paintable. 2. Product: Sonolac manufactured by Sonneborn; AC-20 + Silicone manufactured by Pecora; PSI-701 manufactured by Polymeric Systems, Inc.;or approved equivalent. — 3. Applications: Use for: a. Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. b. Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. C. Joint Backing: Round foam rod compatible with sealant; ASTM D 1667, closed cell PVC; — oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width; Closed Cell Backer Rod manufactured by Sonneborn, or equivalent. D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit — application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION —" A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work. B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. -_ 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. — B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement with masking tape. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions. B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193. C. Protect adjacent materials and surfaces with masking tape at locations that are not to be painted. D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio, neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated. — Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 90 05 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 JOINT SEALERS — Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 3 E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. - H. Tool joints concave. I. Joints in concrete paving and slabs to be level with top surface of concrete. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces of any misplaced sealant. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 07 90 05 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 JOINT SEALERS Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 3 SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Thermally insulated steel doors. B. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 71 00- Door Hardware. B. Section 09 90 00 -Painting and Coating: Field painting. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; International Code Council; 2003. B. ANSI A250.8-SDI-1 00 Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003. C. ANSI A250.10 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (R2004). D. ASTM A 653/A 653M -Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized)or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2005a. E. DHI A115 Series-Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; Door and Hardware Institute; 2000(ANSI/DHI A115 Series). F. NAAMM HMMA 840 -Guide Specifications for Installation and Storage of Hollow Metal Doors -- and Frames,The National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers; 1999. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Materials and details of design and construction, hardware locations, reinforcement type and locations, anchorage and fastening methods, and finishes; and one copy of referenced grade standard. B. Shop Drawings: Details of each opening, showing elevations, glazing, frame profiles, and identifying location of different finishes, if any. C. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published instructions, including any special installation instructions relating to this project. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certification that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND PROTECTION A. Store in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Protect with resilient packaging; avoid humidity build-up under coverings; prevent corrosion. Lower Plaza Project#03072 0811 13 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Doors and Frames: - 1. Assa Abloy Curries or Essex: www.assaabloydss.com. 2. Kewanee Corporation: www.kewaneecorp.com. 3. Steelcraft: www.steelcraft.com. 4. Mesker Door Inc.: www.meskerdoor.com. - 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 DOORS AND FRAMES A. Requirements for All Doors and Frames: 1. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1. 2. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 3. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in '- place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard. 4. Galvanizing for Units: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed), manufacturer's standard coating thickness. - 5. Finish: Factory primed, for field finishing. 2.03 STEEL DOORS A. Exterior Doors: 1. Grade: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, physical performance Level B, Model 2, seamless. 2. Core: Polyurethane. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in - accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. 4. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. 5. Product: "BW18 Flush Door" manufactured by Steelcraft; or approved equivalent. - 2.04 STEEL FRAMES A. General: 1. Comply with the requirements of grade specified for corresponding door. - a. ANSI A250.8 Level 2 Doors: 16 gage frames. 2. Finish: Factory primed,for field finishing. 3. Provide mortar guard boxes for hardware cut-outs in frames to be grouted. - B. Exterior Door Frames: Face welded, seamless with joints filled. 1. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in accordance with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with manufacturer's standard coating thickness. _ 2. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 08 71 00. 3. Product: "F16 Flush Frame" manufactured by Steelcraft; or approved equivalent. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Grout for Frames: Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner pumpable grout is prohibited. B. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center - mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions. C. Temporary Frame Spreaders: Provide for all factory-or shop-assembled frames. - 2.06 FINISH MATERIALS A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard. _ Lower Plaza Project#03072 0811 13 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 3 B. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build,water-resistant, resilient coating. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coat inside of frames to be grouted,with bituminous coating, prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with the requirements of the specified door grade standard and NAAMM HMMA 840. B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction. C. Grout frames using hand trowel methods; brace frames so that pressure of grout before setting will not deform frames. D. Coordinate installation of hardware. E. Touch up damaged factory finishes. 3.04 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Clearances Between Door and Frame: As specified in ANSI A250.8. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 in measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 0811 13 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 3 SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Hardware for hollow metal doors and frames. B. Lock cylinders for doors. C. Thresholds. D. Weatherstripping, seals and door gaskets. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Bu idings and Facilities; International Code Council. — B. DHI (LOCS)- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; Door and Hardware Institute. C. UL (BMD)- Building Materials Directory; Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware, schedules, catalog cuts, and finishes. 2. Hardware schedule showing door numbers, sizes, handing, hardware, mounting heights, finishes. B. Maintenance Data: Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. D. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to owner's representative by secure shipmE-nt. 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS — A. Conform to applicable code for requirements applicable to fire rated doors anc frames. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with doer opening code to match hardware schedule. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware. B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation. C. Coordinate Owner's keying requirements during the course of the Work. Lower Plaza Project#03072 0871 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 DOOR HARDWARE Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 3 1.08 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges: Five knuckle, flush barrel butt hinges, heavy-duty ball bearing, 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 inches, non-removable pins for hinges exposed on exterior of building, maintenance-free; US26D finish i (verify-coordinate with Owner). 1. Product: "BB-4101" manufactured by Lawrence Brothers, Inc; 713-2714" manufactured by McKinney Products Company; 71313179" manufactured by Stanley Hardware Division, The _ Stanley Works; or approved equivalent. B. Lock and Latch Sets: For Bidding Purposes: Yale 540OLN bored lock and latchset, or approved equivalent, lever handles, 6-pin keyway cores keyed to Owner's existing masterkey system, wrought box strikes with curved lips: US26D finish (verify-coordinate with Owner). C. Closers: Overhead surface mounted, ADA compliant, parallel arm if exposed in corridors, with stop function as scheduled, with required mounting plates and accessories, sprayed aluminum finish. 1. Product: "4010 Series" manufactured by LCN; or approved equivalent. D. Wall Stops: Wrought circular metal trim, with convex rubber bumper for doors with locksets and — concave rubber bumper for doors without locksets, gray, concealed fastener: H.B.Ives. E. Silencers: Glynn-Johnson GJ64. F. Weatherstripping Set: Pemko 306AV jamb and head weatherstrip; Pemko 57AV door bottom weatherstrip; Pemko346C door head drip trim. G. Threshold: Mill finish ribbed aluminum, saddle style, 1/2 inch height. 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes. 2. ANSI/ICC A117.1, American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 3. Applicable provisions of NFPA 101, Life Safety Code. — 2.03 KEYING A. Door Locks: Master keyed to system as approved by Owner. Verify requirements. B. Supply keys in the following quantities as indicated by Owner. PART 3 EXECUTION _ 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes. _ B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. C. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware item: — Lower Plaza Project#03072 0871 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 DOOR HARDWARE Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 3 1. Steel Frames: Comply with DHI 'Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Steel Doors and Frames." 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust each operable hardware unit for correct function and smooth operation. Check and re-adjust units no more than one week prior to inspection for Substantial Completion. 3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish. 3.05 SCHEDULE A. Refer to Schedule on drawings. Lower Plaza Project#03072 0871 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 DOOR HARDWARE Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 3 SECTION 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Field application of paints. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and texture:: for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on cardboard, 12 x 12 inch in size. 1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability. B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and 2 maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer. B. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interior: ; 50 degrees F for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply one gallon of each color; store where directed. B. Label each container with color in addition to the manufacturer's label. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Paints: 1. Sherwin-Williams: www.sherwin-williams.com. 2. Benjamin Moore: www.benjaminmoore.com. 3. Diamond-Vogel Paints: www.diamondvogel.com. 4. Pittsburgh Paints: www.pittsburghpaints.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS -GENERAL A. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. Lower Plaza Project#03072 09 90 00 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 PAINTS AND COATINGS Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 3 2.03 PAINT SYSTEMS - EXTERIOR A. Ferrous Metals, Primed, Alkyd, 2 Coat: Includes doors, frames, rooftop items, and miscellaneous steel items: 1. Touch-up with zinc chromate primer. — 2. Satin: Two coats of alkyd enamel. 2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not _ specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality. B. Patching Material: Latex filler.C. Block Filler: As indicated by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION _ 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. _ 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, _ and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. B. Surfaces: Correct defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this section. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. C. Marks: Seal with shellac those which may bleed through surface finishes. D. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. E. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etching primer. F. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer _ and rust. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied. C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied. — D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat. F. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. Lower Plaza Project#03072 09 90 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 PAINTS AND COATINGS _ Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 3 3.05 CLEANING A. Collect waste material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed meta containers, and remove daily from site. END OF SECTION Lower Plaza Project#03072 09 90 00 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 PAINTS AND COATINGS Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 3 SECTION 32 36 23 STONE FABRICATIONS PART GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cut stone benches landscape retaining walls. B. Accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Coordination for anchors to be en1bedded. B. Section 31 23 23 - Fill. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A 167 -Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999 (Reapproved 2009). B. ASTM A 276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2008. C. ASTM C 97/C 97M -Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone; 2009 D. ASTM C 99/C 99M - Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone; 2009. E. ASTM C 170/C 170 M - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone; 2009. F. ASTM C 568 - Standard Specification for Limestone Dimension Stone; 2008. G. ASTM C 881/C 881 M -Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002. H. ASTM C 880/C 880M - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimens on Stone; 2009. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for limestone, stonework accessories and other manufactured products required, including graffiti control products. B. Samples: Submit two stone samples 6 x 3 x 2 inches in size, color range, texture and markings. C. Shop Drawings: Submit cutting and setting drawings indicating sizes, dimensions, sections ` and profiles of stones; arrangement and provisions for jointing, supporting, anchoring, and bonding stonework; and details showing relationship with, attachment to and reception of, related work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Stone: Obtain the limestone from a single quarry with resources to provide materials of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties, including the capacity to cut and finish material without delaying the progress of the work. B. Stone Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating cut stone with minimum ten (10)years of documented experience. C. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Contractor who has completed stone work similar in material, design and extent to that indicated and that has resulted in construction with Lower Plaza Project#03072 32 36 23 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 STONE FABRICATIONS Waterloo, Iowa Page 1 of 5 a record of successful in-service performance. _ 1.06 PROJECT COORDINATION A. Coordinate placement of anchors with Section 03 30 00. 1.07 MOCK-UP A. Construct full-size stone benches landscape retaining walls mock-ups. Coordinate with mock-up specified in Section 03 30 00. - B. Locate where directed. C. Accepted mock-ups may remain as part of the Work. _ 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver masonry materials to project in undamaged condition. B. Store and handle stone to prevent damage due to moisture, contaminants, breakage, chipping or other causes. C. Lift with wide belt-type slings where possible; do not lift with wire ropes. - D. Do not use pinch bars or wrecking bars to handle stone. Do not use equipment that contains substances that might stain. E. Store stone on wood skids or pallets, covered with non-staining, waterproof membrane. F. Protect stored stone from weather with waterproof, non-staining covers or enclosures. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS - A. Protect Stonework during Erection as Follows: Cover top of walls with non-staining waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed structures when work is not in progress. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold securely in place. B. Prevent staining of stone from bonding systems, sealants and other sources. Immediately remove such materials from stone without damage to latter. 1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Cold Weather Requirements: 1. Comply with requirements of ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 or applicable building code, whichever is more stringent. 2. Remove ice or snow formed on stonework beds by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. B. Maintain materials and ambient air to a minimum 40 degrees F prior to, during and 48 hours after completion of work. PART PRODUCTS _ 2.01 FABRICATIOR A. Stone Units: - 1. Weber Stone Company, Product"Anamosa Dolomitic Limestone": www.weberstone.com. 2. Mankato Kasota Stone, Inc; Product"Mankato Dolomitic Limestone: www.mankatokasotastone.com. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. _ Lower Plaza Project#03072 32 36 23 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 STONE FABRICATIONS _ Waterloo, Iowa Page 2 of 5 2.02 STONE -- A. Limestone: Dolomitic Limestone; complying with ASTM C 568 Classification III - High Density. 1. Grade: Select. 2. Absorption: 7 to 8 percent average in accordance with ASTM C 97/C 97M. _ 3. Bulk Specific Gravity: 2 to 2.5 average in accordance with ASTM C 97/C 97M. 4. Density: 130 to 135 Ibs/cu. ft. in accordance with ASTM C 97/C 97M. 5. Compressive Strength: 10,000 psi, minimum, in accordance with ASTM C 170/C 170M. 6. Modulus of Rupture: 1100 psi, minimum, in accordance with ASTM C 99/C 99M. 7. Flexural Strength: 900 psi, minimum, in accordance with ASTM C 880/C 880M. 8. Color: Buff, unless indicated otherwise. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors and Dowels: Stainless steel, Type 302 complying with ASTM A 167, of size and configurations required to support stone. 1. Size: As required for specific application. B. Epoxy Bonding System: Complying with ASTM C 881/C 881 M and of Type required for specific application. C. Neoprene Shims: Commercial grade neoprene rubber, smooth surface, rectangular shape, black in color. 1. Temperature Range: -30 to 220 degrees F. 2. Load Capacity: As required by stone weight. 3. Size: 3 x 3 inches, maximum. 4. Thickness: 1/2 inch, minimum. D. Graffiti Control Products: Clear, solvent-based products specifically formulated to weatherproof limestone and protect treated surfaces without altering natural color. 1. Product: "Sure Klean Weather Seal Blok-Guard and Graffiti Control" manufactured by Prosoco, Inc; or approved equivalent. E. Cleaning Solution: Type that will not harm stone, joint materials, or adjacent surfaces. 2.04 FABRICATION — A. General: Fabricate stonework in sizes and shapes required to comply with requirements indicated, including details on drawings and final shop drawings. B. Comply with recommendations of BSI/MIA/ILI. C. Cut and drill sinkages and holes in stones for anchors, fasteners, supports and lifting devices as indicated. D. Cut stone to produce pieces of thickness, size and shape indicated or required and within fabrication tolerances recommended by BSI/MIA/ILI. E. Finish exposed faces and edges of stone to comply with requirements indicated for finish under -- each type and application of stone required and to match approved samples. F. Carefully inspect finished stones at fabrication plant for compliance with requirements relative to qualities of appearance, material, and fabrication; replace defective stones with ones that do comply. 1. Grade and mark stones for overall uniform appearance when assembled in place. Natural variations in appearance are acceptable if installed stones match range of colors and other appearance characteristics represented in approved samples and field-constructed mock-ups. Lower Plaza Project#03072 32 36 23 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 STONE FABRICATIONS Waterloo, Iowa Page 3 of 5 2.05 FABRICATED ITEMS A. Benches: See drawings for dimensions and layout. 1. Surfaces: a. Front and Back: Splitfaced. b. Top and Bottom: Saw cut. c. Exposed Ends: Splitfaced. d. Saw cut adjoining ends. _ B. Landscape Retaining Walls: See drawings for dimensions and layout. 1. Surfaces: a. Front and Back: Natural cleft or splitfaced. _ b. Top and Bottom: Natural cleft or splitfaced. c. Exposed Ends: Natural cleft or splitfaced. d. Saw cut adjoining ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify compacted subgrade is acceptable and ready to support seatwalls and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. C. Verify concrete is acceptable and ready to support benches and imposed loads. — D. Verify embedded anchors are in proper placement. Report discrepancies to Architect. 3.02 SUBBASE A. See Section 31 23 23 for construction of base course for work of this Section. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Establish layout prior to setting and protect from disturbance. B. Clean stone prior to erection to remove soil, stains and foreign materials. Clean stones by thoroughly scrubbing stones with fiber brushes followed by a thorough drenching with clear water. Use only mild cleaning compounds that contain no caustic or harsh filler or abrasives. Do not use wire brushes or implements that mark or damage exposed surfaces. C. Clean sawn surfaces of rust stains and iron particles. 3.04 INSTALLATION -STONE FABRICATIONS A. Execute dimension stonework by skilled mechanics and employ skilled stone fitters at site to do _ necessary field cutting as stones are set. B. Set stones to comply with requirements indicated on drawings and final shop drawings. Install anchors, supports and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure stonework in place. Shim and adjust as necessary. 3.05 INSTALLATION - GRAFFITI CONTROL A. Apply graffiti control product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Surface to be sealed must be clean and thoroughly dry. Surface and air temperatures should be at least 50 degree F. at time of application and for eight hours following. First application _ shall be at least 28 days after completion of actual stone work. C. Application shall be by brush, roller or airless spray; the surface should be flooded to the point of maximum absorption. Coverage will vary from 150 to 400 square feet per gallon under _ Lower Plaza Project#03072 32 36 23 City of Waterloo City Contract# 763 STONE FABRICATIONS _ Waterloo, Iowa Page 4 of 5 normal weather conditions coating will dry to touch in 50 minutes and dry hard in four hours. After twenty-four hours apply a second coat. Care shall be taken to ensure other finish surfaces and plantings in the area are not coated. 3.06 TOLERANCES A. Split Stone Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation for Splitfaces: +/- 1 inch. 2. Maximum Variation from Face Size: +/- 1/8 inch. 3. Maximum Variation from Flat: +/- 1/8 inch. B. Cut Stone Tolerances: 1. Maximum Variation from Thickness: +/- 1/8 inch for non-finished ends, +/- 1/16 inch for finished end corner pieces. 2. Maximum Variation from Face Size: +/- 1/16 inch. 3. Maximum Variation from Flat: +/- 1/16 inch. 4. Maximum Variation from Square: +/- 1/16 inch. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean soiled surfaces with cleaning solution. ,._ B. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations. 3.08 PROTECTION A. During temporary storage on site, at the end of working day, and during rainy weather, cover stone work exposed to weather with non-staining waterproof coverings, securely anchored. END OF SECTION i Lower Plaza Project#03072 32 36 23 City of Waterloo City Contract#763 STONE FABRICATIONS Waterloo, Iowa Page 5 of 5 SECTION 32 37 00 STEEL BENCH SEATING ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This work includes the construction of steel bench seating assemblies as shown on the plans, including reinforcement bar systems. The work shall include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation required to install the steel bench seating assemblies as shown. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials(ASTM) A36-Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. _ A513-Specification for Electric-Resistance-Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. A500 - Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. — B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANSI/BIFMA X5.4-1997 Lounge Seating C. Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association (BIFMA) ANSI/BIFMA X5.4-1997 Lounge Seating 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data for bench assemblies. B. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings for all bench assemblies shown on the plans. C. Samples: Submit full-size sample of 5-seat"Type 1" bench assembly for approval. PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 BENCH MATERIALS A. Steel Bench Seating Assemblies shall be "Plexus II" straight multi-seat assemblies on custom radius (see details)tube support(backed, no arms, painted black)as supplied by: Landscape Forms — 431 Lawndale Ave. Kalamazoo, MI 49048 Phone: 800-521-2546 STEEL BENCH SEATING ASSEMBLIES CONTRACT NO.763 32 37 00-1 B. Seats: Seats are constructed with a steel wire grid panel and frame. Wires are 1/8", spaced a '/2" o.c, with 5/16" cross wires spaced 2 Y2" o.c. Frame is 7/8"x .120"wall thickness steel tube. '— Optional armrests are constructed of 7/8" o.d. x .120"wall thickness steel tubing. Seats are mechanically fastened to tubular supports with manufacturer supplied hardware (see information on supports). C. Sizes and Shapes: Straight seats with backs are 22"wide and 24" deep. 11-degree angled seats with narrow backs for curved applications are 24"wide in front and 20"wide in back. 11- degree wide-backed seats are 20"wide in front and 24"wide in back. 22-degree angled seats with narrow backs for curved applications are 27"wide in front and 15"wide in back. Straight seat without backs are 22" x 22". 11-degree angled seats without backs for curved applications are 20"wide in front and 24"wide in back; 22-degree angled seats are 21"wide in front and 24" wide in back. Spacing between seats shall be 2 1/". - D. Supports: Horizontal support is 3" o.d. x .120"wall thickness steel tube, with welded tabs to accept seat mounted tab. Vertical support is 2 Y2 o.d. x .120"wall thickness steel tube welded to horizontal support tube. E. Sizes and Shapes: Horizontal tube sections can be connected to form any length and many configurations including circles. Supports must be specified to be embedded, surface mounted, — freestanding or wall mounted. F. Finishes: Finish on metal shall include a rust inhibitor and top coat finish of thermosetting polyester powdercoat that is U.V., chip and flake resistant. Color shall be black. Submit color — sample to Engineer for approval prior to delivery. G. Technical Data: 1. Gloss-According to Garner 60 deg. ASTM D 523: 80-90 -- 2. Cross Hatch Adhesion -ASTM D 3359 method B: pass 100% 3. Mandrel Bending Test-ASTM D 522: 1/8"/3 mm 4. Erichsen Cupping- ISO 1520: 5/16"/8 mm — 5. Impression Hardness -According to Buchholz ISO 2215: 95 6. Impact Test-ASTM D 2794-90: 1/10" distortion up to 160 in/lb 7. Pencil Hardness -ASTM D 3363074: 2H (min.) 8. Drill Mill Tests: OK 9. Saltspray Resistance 1500 hr Test-ASTM B 117: Max. undercutting 1/16"/1 mm 10. Humidity Resistance 1500 hr Test-ASTM D 2247-68: Max. blisters 1/16"/1 mm H. Warranty: Products to be free from defects in material and/or workmanship for a period of three years from the date of invoice. PART 3 -CONSTRUCTION — 3.01 Construction Method. Coordinate and verify final bench locations and layout with Engineer prior to installation. Bench frame shall be securely anchored as detailed and as recommended by — manufacturer. Bench shall be installed as per the detail shown in the plans. Bench shall not rock after installation. PART 4- MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4.01 Measurement: The Engineer shall count the number of steel bench seating assemblies — satisfactorily installed in accordance with the plans, as required by the contract documents. 4.02 Payment: For each steel bench seating assembly installed and counted for payment, the — Contractor shall be paid the contract unit price. This payment shall be full compensation for the steel bench seating assembly. STEEL BENCH SEATING ASSEMBLIES CONTRACT NO.763 32 37 00-2 SECTION 32 80 00 IRRIGATION SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Extent of landscape irrigation system is indicated on the drawings. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. 02930—Turfgrass Sod B. 02950—Plant Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data on all materials used in the work and installation instructions. 1. Piping Specialties 2. Irrigation Heads and Equipment 3. Valves 4. Controllers 5. Wiring/Electrical Specialties B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for the following: 1. Irrigation equipment layout.This shall include layout of all automatic controllers, wiring and electrical locations. 2. Cutting and patching locations of existing concrete, as well as location and size of all borings. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with all applicable provisions of the latest edition of the following codes: 1. UPC Uniform Plumbing Code 2. BOCA Buildings Officials and Codes Administrators 3. UBC Uniform Building Code 4. NEC National Electric Code B. Provide labeled equipment certifying approval, as hereinafter specified, by the following organizations: IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-1 1. NSF National Sanitation Foundation _ 2. UL Underwriters Laboratories C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide underground irrigation system as a complete unit including heads, valves, controls, and accessories. D. Guarantee: The Contractor shall guarantee that the system installed will perform to the intent of the design and that all materials supplied are true to specification for a period of one year beginning at the date of system acceptance. E. Maintenance: The Contractor shall maintain the system until acceptance. 1.06 FEES AND PERMITS A. Work under this Section shall include all fees, permits, licenses, and required inspections by — concerned governing agencies. 1.07 WARRANTY _ A. Provide written warranty of the irrigation system against defect in installation or materials for a period of one year beginning at the date of system acceptance. 1.08 SPARE PARTS A. The following list of items shall be provided to the Owner: 4 quick coupler valve keys 4 hose swivel 2 valve stem keys 4 spare heads of each type specified 2 remote control valves _e PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of the following: 1. Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg., Co. 2. The TORO Co., Irrigation Div. 3. Hunter Industries, Irrigation Div. 4. Approved equal. 2.02 PIPE MATERIALS A. Plastic Pipe: All pipe and hose is free of blisters, internal striations, cracks or any other defects or imperfections. The pipe and hose are continuously and permanently marked with manufacturer's name, material type, size, and schedule or class and quality control identifications. B. Mainline 3" (75 mm)or smaller: Schedule 21 Class 200, Type 1120-1220 polyvinyl chloride (PVC); ASTM D1784 and D1785; uniformly white in color. IRRIGATION SYSTEM - CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-2 C. Lateral: Schedule 21 Class 200, Type 1120-1220 polyvinyl chloride (PVC); ASTM D1784 and D1785; uniformly white in color. D. Steel Pipe (if used): Schedule 40 Carbon steel pipe ASTM Grade B seamless, .138 minimum wall thickness. Welded joints will be used in fabricating sections under pavement. E. Seamless Copper Pipe: ASTM B88, Type K. 1. Copper Unions: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy body, hexagonal stock with ball-and- socket joint, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint, threaded or solder joint, and threaded ends. 2. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME B1.20.1. F. Sleeves: All new sleeves shall be PVC Schedule 40. Install sleeves in locations is shown on the drawings and at the depths specified for lateral and mainlines. 2.03 FITTINGS A. Metallic: Cast bronze with standard iron pipe thread; 125 lb. class rating in conformance with ANSI B16.15. 1. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting with insulating material isolating j&,ied dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. These devices are a combination of copper alloy and ferrous metal; threaded-and solder-end types, matchirg piping system materials. 2. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150 psig or 300- psig minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 3. Transition Fittings: Manufactured assembly or fitting, with pressure rating at least equal to that of system and with ends compatible to piping where fitting is to be installed. B. Copper: ANSI B16.22 wrought copper or cast brass, recessed solder joint type fittings. C. Plastic: 1. Mainline 3" (75 mm)or smaller: Same as lateral. 2. Lateral: 2" (75 mm)and smaller: ASTM D 2467, Schedule 80, socket-type, Type 1, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride (PVC)with solvent weld or threaded connections in +onformance with ASTM D1784 and D2466: uniformly white in color. 2.04 NIPPLES A. Metallic: Schedule 40 red brass (35% copper, 15% zinc) pipe: threaded both ends. Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM B43. B. Plastic: Factory-threaded Schedule 80, Type 1, Grade 1 polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe, threaded both ends. Pipe shall be in conformance with ASTM D1784 and D1785. Color: gray. C. Swing Joints: Rain Bird triple swing joints or approved equal. IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-3 2.05 JOINING MATERIALS A. Solvent Cement: ASTM F 656 primer and ASTM D 2564 solvent cement in color other than orange. B. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloys Sn95 and E. C. Gaskets and Fasteners for Metal and Metal-to-Plastic Flanged Joints: ASME B16.21, _ nonmetallic, asbestos-free, flat, 1/8-inch thickness gaskets and ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers. D. Gaskets for Plastic Flanged Joints: Materials recommended by plastic pipe and fitting's manufacturer. 2.06 VALVES A. Manual Valves 1. Bronze, Non-rising Stem Gate Valves, 3 Inches (50 mm)and Smaller: MSS SP-80, Type — 1, solid wedge; non-rising, copper-silicon-alloy stem; Class 125, body and screw bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze, with threaded or solder joint ends. Include polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE)-impregnated packing, brass packing gland, and — malleable-iron hand-wheel. B. Electric Remote Control Valves: All electric remote control valves shall be of the size and type as specified on the drawings. 1. Rainbird PESB Series 2. Approved equal. C. Quick Coupler: All quick couplers shall be of size and type specified on the drawings and installed as per details on the drawings. The locations of each coupler shall be as per the _ irrigation plan. 1. Rainbird 5RC 2. Approved equal. D. Valve Boxes: Valve Box Cover and Frame: Ametek plastic valve box, manufactured by Plymouth Products or equal. _ 2.07 SPRINKLER HEADS A. All heads shall be as specified on the drawings or approved equal. Nozzle patterns are indicated and shown, however, specific site conditions may require that different nozzle patterns be used. Contractor shall adjust patterns to provide adequate coverage. 1. Rainbird 3500 Series rotors 2. Rainbird 5000 Series rotors 3. 1800-SAM-PRS Series spray heads 4. Approved Equal. 2.08 AUTOMATIC CONTROL SYSTEM IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-4 A. General:The automatic controllers shall be commercial type hybrid electromechanical controllers manufactured expressly for control of automatic circuit valves of landscape irrigation systems. Provide four programs with number of circuits as noted on the drawings. Each controller shall have factory installed lightning and surge arresters for both input/output protections. UL listed. 1. Rainbird ESP-LX Modular Controller 2. Approved equal. B. Control Enclosures: Weatherproof closure with locking cover and 2 matching keys. Enclosure construction complies with NFPA 70 and NEMA 250, type 4, and includes provision for grounding. 1. Material: Molded plastic. 2. Mounting: Wall-mounted as shown on the drawings. C. Circuit Control: Each circuit variable from 1 minute to 9 hours. Include switch for manual or automatic operation of each circuit. Controller shall be capable of up to twelve start times per day per station. D. Timing Device: Shall be installed at locations as shown on the drawings. Adjustable, 24-hour clock, 14-day calendar wheels with dual program and electric surge protection. Manual or semi- automatic operation. Refer to irrigation drawings for additional controller information. E. Provide NI-CAD battery and trickle charger to automatically power the timing device during power outages. 2.09 BACKFLOW PREVENTER A. Description: American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE) backflow preventer, of size indicated for maximum flow rate and maximum pressure loss indicated. B. Working Pressure: 200-psig minimum except where otherwise indicated. 1. 2 Inches and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless steel body with flanged ends. C. Interior Protective Coating: AWWA C550, epoxy coating for backflow preventer with cast-iron or steel body. D. Strainer supplied with and compatible for size and capacity with unit, or inlet, where strainer is indicated. -- E. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. F. Reduced-Pressure Backflow Prevention Assemblies: ASSE 1015, with shutoff valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet includes test cocks with 2 positive-seating check valves for continuous pressure application. Submit description in equipment list for approval. G. Pressure Loss: 12 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. H. Gate valves supplied with and compatible for size and testing of unit on inlet and outlet. Valves 2 inches (50 mm) and smaller may be ball valves if these are unit manufacturer's standard valve for this application. 2.010 MISCELLANEOUS TOOLS & EQUIPMENT IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-5 A. Control wire shall be OF-UL listed color-coded copper conductor direct burial size 14. Use waterproof DBY wire connectors at splices. Provide one color wire for each of the following: 1. Zone control valves 2. Common wire 3. Spare wire 4. Rainstat circuits B. Rain Sensor: Rain Bird RSD-BEx or approved equal. C. Drainage Backfill: Cleaned gravel or crushed stone, graded from 3 inches (75 mm) maximum to 3/4 inch (19 mm) minimum. D. Pressure Gages: ASME B40.1, 4-1/2-inch (115 mm)diameter dial, with dial range of 2 times system operating pressure and bottom outlet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall install all irrigation system components in accordance with the Irrigation Plans, Details and these Specifications. The workmanship of the entire job must in every way be first class, and only experienced and competent persons will be allowed to work on the project. w B. Supervision: The Contractor, personally or through an authorized and competent representative shall supervise the work constantly, and shall as far as possible keep the same foremen and workmen on the job from commencement to completion. The workmanship of the entire job must in every way be first class, and only experienced and competent workmen shall be utilized for installation C. Schedule of Work: The Irrigation Contractor shall be responsible for the installation of the piping and equipment in a manner that will effect the earliest completion of the work in conformance with the construction progress schedules of other Contractors and Trades, and these Specifications. D. Observations: In addition to normal progress inspection, the Contractor shall give at least 48 hours notice to the Landscape Architect for inspection as follows: 1. Layout of the system. 2. Inspection of trenches, backfilling and equipment. 3. Pressure tests and flushing operation. 4. Coverage Adjustment. 5. Automatic Operation. 3.02 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for storage of materials and any damage to the work covered _ by these Specifications before the final acceptance of the work. B. Protect work and materials from damage during construction. Storage of polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe and fittings shall be protected from direct sunlight. Beds on which materials are stored must IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-6 be the full length of the pipe to avoid damage. Any pipe that has been damaged or dented shall not be used in the work. C. Any existing structures, equipment, utilities, pavement, landscaping, etc., damaged by Irrigation Contractor during the course of the work, including any damage caused by leakage or settling of piping systems being or having been installed by them, shall be restored at Contractor's expense and to the Owner's satisfaction. D. Securely cover openings into the system and cover apparatus, equipment, and appliances, both before and after being set in place, to prevent obstruction in the pipes and the breakage, misuse or disfigurement of the apparatus, equipment or appliances. 3.03 LAYOUT AND VERIFICATION A. The Contractor shall stakeout the locations of all pipe, quick coupling valves, and emitters in accordance with the shop drawings. The Contractor shall check and verify dimensions of layout and report variations to the Landscape Architect before proceeding. Layout work as accurately as possible to the drawings. --- B. Minor changes in locations to the above from locations shown shall be made as necessary to avoid existing or proposed planting, piping, utilities, structures, etc., at the Contractor's expense, or when directed by the Landscape Architect, providing such change is ordered before such items or work directly connected to same are installed, and providing no additional materials are required. C. The Contractor will be held responsible for the relocating of any items without first obtaining the Landscape Architect's approval. The Contractor shall remove and relocate such items, at his expense, if so directed by the Landscape Architect. D. Before starting work on irrigation system, carefully check all grades to determine that work may safely proceed, keeping within the specified material depths. The Contractor shall be aware of the fact that the drawings are horizontal dimensions. Actual measurements taken along the slope of a bank will differ from those shown on the drawings. E. No fittings shall be installed on pipe underneath pavement or walls except where noted on the Irrigation drawings. If such a need should occur, the Contractor shall bring it to the attention of the Landscape Architect. F. Exact sprinkler head placement is based on and shall be coordinated with actual planting layout and shall be verified by the Landscape Architect. 3.04 TRENCHING AND BORING A. Perform all trenching excavations as required for the installation of the work including shoring of earth banks to prevent cave-ins. B. Make trenches for main and laterals straight and true with the bottoms graded on uniform slopes to low points. Excavate trenches wide enough to allow a minimum of 4"(100 mm) between parallel pipe lines, 8" (200 mm)from lines of other trades. Do not install lines parallel and directly over one another. Maintain 2" (50 mm)vertical clearance between irrigation lines; minimum transverse angle is 45 degrees. A maximum of 2 lines per trench. No irrigation lines shall extend above subgrade. IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO,763 32 80 00-7 C. Trenches for pipe lines shall be made of sufficient depths to provide the minimum cover from finished grade as follows: 24" (450 mm)over main lines and quick coupling valves. 18" (300 mm)over RCV controlled lines (laterals). D. All concrete pavement crossings are to be accomplished by boring to avoid concrete removal and replacement. Notify Landscape Architect or Owner's Representative if conflicts with existing utilities or other concerns warrant cutting and patching of the concrete. 3.05 PIPELINE ASSEMBLY A. Installation of all pipes and fittings shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's written specifications. Deviations from these specifications shall be permitted only with the written approval of the Engineer. —� B. Plastic pipe and fittings shall be solvent welded using solvents and methods as recommended by manufacturer of the pipe, except where screwed connections are required. Pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust and moisture before applying solvent with a non-synthetic bristle brush. C. Install PVC pipe in dry weather when temperature is above 400 F in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Pipe may be assembled and welded on the surface. Snake pipe from side to side of trench ^ bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. E. Connections between plastic pipe and metal valves shall be made using plastic male adapters and applying the recommended threaded joint compound. F. All metal screwed joints shall be tightened with tongs or wrenches and employ the specified joint compound. Caulking of any kind will not be permitted. 3.06 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. Gravel sumps of size shown on details shall be of clean gravel, shall be located at all automatic control valves and manual gate valves. B. Backflow Prevention: The irrigation system is to be connected downstream of an approved -- backflow preventer as per the mechanical drawings. All installations shall be in accordance with local codes. 3.07 CONTROLLER A. Automatic controller shall be wall-mounted in a locking cabinet and shall be provided direct surge protection. Contractor shall verify power location and type, as well as power connection requirements. Location shall be as shown on the drawings. 3.08 ELECTRICAL CONTROL WIRES A. Electrical control wires shall be installed in the same trench as the main line wherever possible. Wires shall be laid alongside the pipe by"snaking" in to the trench to allow as much slack as possible for contraction and expansion of the wire. All wire connections at remote control valves IRRIGATION SYSTEM -- CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-8 and at all wire splices will be left with two feet of wire so that the splice or the valve manifold can be brought to the surface for repairs without disconnecting the wires. B. It is important that the joint be absolutely waterproof so that there is no chance for leakage of water and corrosion build-up on the connection. All wiring shall be accomplished with a few splices as possible. 3.09 SLEEVING A. All lines to be laid under hard surfaces shall be installed in a PVC Schedule 40 sleeve. Depth of sleeves to be determined by the type of line that is to be placed in sleeve. In the case of new construction, all sleeves are to be place prior to laying of any hard surface. 3.010 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Core drilling for irrigation piping penetrations shall be accomplished in a manner approved by the Owner. Provide metal sleeves for all irrigation lines wherever passing through an interior concrete wall or floor. Provide a water stop or membrane clamp (Link-Seal or approved equal) for every pipe or sleeve penetrating an exterior concrete walls or floor, whichever is appropriate to the waterproofing method. 3.011 CLOSING OF PIPE AND FLUSHING LINES A. Closing: Openings in laterals and main shall be capped or plugged, leaving caps and plugs in place until removal is necessary for completion of installation. Contractor shall take other _. precautions as necessary to prevent dirt and debris from entering pipe or equipment. B. Flushing: Lines shall be thoroughly flushed out before installing quick coupling valves sprinklers or emitters. (After flushing, main line pipe may be partially backfilled, butt joints, fittings and connections shall remain free and visible). C. Test in accordance with paragraph on Hydrostatic Test. Upon completion of the testing, the Contractor shall complete assembly and adjust sprinkler heads for proper distribution. 3.012 PURGING A. Immediately prior to hydrostatic testing, all irrigation lines shall be thoroughly purged of all entrapped air. Introduce water into lines to be tested at full operating head. Observe water flow at end of discharge point until determination is made that all air and residual debris has been expelled from the line. 3.013 HYDROSTATIC TESTING A. While the necessary piping system components are exposed, all mainline piping is to be subjected to a hydrostatic test. Field consultant should be on premises for overall check of the system. B. Pressure gauges shall be read in PSI. Calibration shall be such that accurate determination of potential pressure loss can be ascertained. C. Test supply line and lateral lines at 110 PSI operating pressure for minimum of one hour with an allowable loss of 5 PSI. IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-9 D. Re-test as required until the system meets the requirements. During the tests, regardless of the amount of leakage, all detectable leaks are to be stopped and all defects corrected. 3.014 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING A. Rock free backfill material for mainline pipe is to be tamped in 4 (100 mm) layers under the pipe and uniformly on both sides of the full width of the trench or as shown, and the full length of the pipe. Materials are to be sufficiently damp to permit thorough compaction under and on each side of pipe, to provide support free of voids. PVC pipe is not to rest on concrete, rock, wood blocks, or similar items. B. All pipe is to be immediately backfilled with preliminary backfill sufficient to prevent arching or slipping under pressure. C. Other than for preliminary backfill over pipe, do not allow or cause any of the work to be covered before it has been inspected, tested and approved by the Landscape Architect. D. Upon approval of Landscape Architect, proceed in placing the remaining backfill. Backfill material shall be clear of all debris and rocks larger that 2" (50 mm) in diameter. Finish grade of all trenches must conform to adjacent grades without dips, sunken areas, humps or other irregularities. Dispose of excess spoils as directed by Landscape Architect. Restore all surfaces, existing underground installations, damaged or cut as a result of the excavations to their original ._. condition. 3.015 ADJUSTING THE SYSTEM A. Adjust alignment and coverage of all heads. If it is determined that adjustments in the irrigation equipment will provide proper and more adequate coverage, make all necessary changes or _ make arrangements with the manufacturer to have adjustments made, prior to any planting. These changes or adjustments shall be made without additional cost. 3.016 RECORD DRAWINGS _ A. Indicate actual location of all valves and controls including piping. Show dimensions from easily identifiable existing features such as walls, fences, steps, etc. Submit three copies of diagram to the Landscape Architect for approval and acceptance. B. Maintain progress drawings on the construction site at all times during installation of the irrigation system. Make a daily record of all work installed each day until completion of the work. C. Contractor shall install above the controller a laminated half-size copy of the irrigation plan. 3.017 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Fill and repair all depressions and replace all turf and skinned areas due to the settlement of -- irrigation trenches for one year following the completing and acceptance of the job. Use only approved field materials. B. Drain the irrigation system in the fall of the first year, and start in up the following spring. C. After the system is installed and approved, instruct groundskeeper personnel and maintenance staff in the complete operation and maintenance of the system. IRRIGATION SYSTEM CONTRACT NO.763 32 80 00-10 SECTION 32 91 00 SOIL PREPARATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish three (3)copies of manufacturer literature, samples, certifications, or laboratory analytical data for the following items. 1. Imported topsoil analysis. Analysis to include agriculture suitability test with fertilizer recommendations, particle size analysis, and,percent of organic matter. Topsoil shall be amended as recommended in the agriculture suitability test for turf. 2. Imported compost analysis (certification or laboratory analytical data). 3. Fertilizer(certification or laboratory analytical data). 4. Raised Soil Planter System components(water retention component, filter fabric, soil, aggregate, etc.) PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 IMPORTED NATIVE SOIL A. Topsoil shall be a natural friable soil, possessing characteristics of representative productive soils in the vicinity from which it is obtained. B. Topsoil shall be classified according to the USDA soil textural classification. USDA definitions are as follows: Sand—270 mesh (0.05mm)to 18 mesh (1.0mm) Silt—0.002mm to 0.05mm Clay—< 0.002mm Soil shall meet classification requirements for a sandy loam to silt loam texture. Soils approved for use in specific planting areas shall remain consistent in sand, silt, and clay composition. C. Topsoil shall be blended and contain the following components by percentage: Component Criteria Silt <_20% Clay <20% Sand >_40% H 5 to 7.6 Organic Matter 4 to 6% D. The topsoil shall be reasonably free from subsoil, clay lumps, stones or similar objects larger than -- 1/2 inch in greatest diameter, brush, stumps, roots, objectionable weeds or litter, excess acid or alkali, or any other material or substance which may be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to subsequent smooth grading, planting and maintenance operations. Foreign material shall not exceed 5% by volume or weight. SOIL PREPARATION CONTRACT NO.763 3291 00-1 E. The source of topsoil shall be made known to the Landscape Architect at least 5 days prior to delivery. The topsoil shall be tested and approved prior to placement in the field. 2.02 COMPOST A. Compost shall be an organic substance produced by the biological and biochemical decomposition of source-separated compostable materials separated at the point of waste generation that may include but are not limited to leaf and yard trimmings, food scraps, food processing residues, manure and/or other agricultural residuals,forest residues and bark and soiled and/or unrecyclable paper and biosolids. B. Compost used in the production of compost-amended loam (C.A.L.)shall contain no visible admixture of refuse or other physical contaminants nor any material toxic to plant growth. Compost shall meet the following additional specifications. _ 1. Minimum organic material shall be 30% (dry weight basis)as determined by loss on ignition. 2. Moisture content shall be less than 60%, and the product shall be loose and friable not dusty. 3. Particle size shall be 100% less than 1.0 inch. 4. Soluble salts shall be less than 5.0 mm hos/cm (dSm). 5. Stability—Stable and mature product. 6. Compost pH shall be between 6.0-8.0. C. APPROVED COMPOST SOURCES: Compost provided for this project shall come from an approved source and have documented lab analysis to meet the above specifications. * Bluestein Solid Waste Agency *Organic Matters 6301 Kirkwood Blvd SW, PO Box 2068 500 W Main Cedar Rapids, IA 52406 Robins, IA 52328 * Davenport Compost Facility 2707 Railroad Ave.,PO Box 3606 Davenport, IA 52802 2.03 FERTILIZER A. Fertilizers shall be uniform in composition, delivered to the site fully labeled in conformance with applicable state fertilizer laws and bear the analysis, trade names, or trademark and warranty of the producer. B. Fertilizer shall be applied to supply a minimum of 1-3/4 pounds actual N. per 1,000 square feet, 3 pounds actual Phosphate per 1,000 square feet and 3 pounds of actual Potassium per 1,000 square feet. This is equivalent to 750 pounds of 10-20-20 fertilizer per acre. Any other analysis which gives equivalent amount of N/P/K may be used. Fertilizer shall be distributed evenly over _ the area to be treated. Fertilizer shall be in pellet or granular form. 50%of the nitrogen shall be in slow release form. 2.04 AGRICULTURAL LIME SOIL PREPARATION !- CONTRACT NO.763 3291 00-2 A. Furnish agricultural limestone, finely ground, containing a minimum of a combined total of "calcium and magnesium equivalent" of between 85%to 90%. B. All material shall pass a 3/16"sieve, 90% pass a No. 8 sieve and 15% -20% pass a No. 100 sieve. 2.05 RAISED PLANTER SOIL SYSTEM A. Provide Intensive Soil and associated components of raised planter soil system (RE: Sheet L-1.1) from the following supplier: American Hydrotech, Inc. 303 East Ohio Street Chicago, Illinois 60611-3318 800-877-6125 or 312-337-4998 FAX: 312-661-0731 Web Site: http://www.hydrotechusa.com B. Drainage/Water Retention Component: Three-dimensional, molded panels of recycled polyethylene with drainage channels top and bottom sides and water retention reservoirs top side. -American Hydrotech GardendrainTm GR50 C. Filter Fabric: Non-woven, polymeric, geotextile fabric. -American Hydrotech Systemfilter D. Raised Planter Soil: Custom growing media mix capable of supporting vigorous growth of the specified vegetation, complying with the following specification. 1. Raised Planter Soil (30" soil depth): -American Hydrotech Intensive LiteTop®Growing Media Property Intensive* Grain Size Distribution clay fraction 0-2 % passing#200 sieve 5-15 % -` passing#60 sieve 10-25 % passing#18 sieve 20-50 % passing 1/8-inch sieve 55-95 % — passing 3/8-inch sieve 90-100 % Density Application Density 0.7- 1.1 g/cm3 (44 lbs—68 Ibs/cf) Saturated Density 1.0 - 1.5 g/cm3 (62 Ibs -93 Ibs/cf) ` Dry Density 0.6-1.1 g/cm3 (38 Ibs -68 Ibs/cf) Water&Air Management(% vol.) — saturated water capacity >40 % saturated air content >10 % Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity >0.5 mm/min (>1.0 in/hr) SOIL PREPARATION CONTRACT NO.763 3291 00-3 pH, Lime, and Salt Content pH (saturated paste) 5.5-7.5 carbonate content <25 9/1 salts content(water extract) <3.0 g/I (2.0 mmhos/cm) Organics OM content 6— 12 mass % C/N ratio <20 Nutrients**(plant available) nitrogen (NO3) 3—15 -r phosphorus 1 —7 potassium 6—15 calcium 19—65 magnesium 3—15 CEC Capacity >6 cmol/kg Compost Fraction 1) Meet or exceed USEPA Class A standard, 40 CFR 503.13, Tables 1 &3 (chemical contaminants)and 40 CFR 503.32(a) (pathogens) and/or be permitted in the state of origin to produce Class A material. 2) Meet US Compost Council STA/TMECC criteria or equal for Class I or II stable, mature product. *Values may be adjusted due to availability of local materials or special project conditions related to plant selection and/or environmental conditions. ** Nutrients shall be adjusted with appropriate slow-release fertilizer with micronutrient additions if below lower target range. E. Expanded lightweight aggregate for use as fill material for drainage/water retention component as required. -American Hydrotech LiteTop® Lightweight Aggregate a. 3/8" -3/4" (9.5-20 mm)expanded, lightweight aggregate _ PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall install topsoil and establish a finish graded soil surface ready to receive sod. The surface shall be free of clods, rocks or construction debris larger than 2". The soil surface shall be free of low spots. B. Portions of the site not readily worked by machine shall be worked by hand. Areas adjacent to curbs, walks, signs, existing trees, light poles and other site items shall be hand worked and blended into adjacent grades. C. Do not handle or grade soil when wet or frozen. 3.02 RAISED PLANTER SOIL SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. Subsoil Preparation: Install storm collection and compact subgrade as per civil drawings. B. Planter Walls: Install planter walls as per architectural drawings. SOIL PREPARATION CONTRACT NO.763 3291 00-4 C. Drainage/Water Retention Component: 1. GardendrainTm GR50, shall be installed with holes through the dimples on top, over the compacted subgrade.Adjacent panels may be butt together or overlapped approximately 1 inch (25 mm). Gardendrain®shall be cut to fit with a heavy-duty utility knife or small toothed saw. 2. The cups of the Gardendrain shall be filled with lightweight aggregate level with the top surface of the panels where required due to loading conditions. D. Filter Fabric: 1. A layer of SystemFilter shall be laid over the Gardendrain, lapping adjacent rolls a minimum of 6 inches(150 mm). Enough material shall be left to be drawn up above the anticipated soil level. Any excess shall be trimmed down to the level of the soil. E. Soil Installation 1. LiteTop soil shall be placed carefully to avoid damage or displacement of other materials such as walls, paving, drainage components, filter fabric, etc. r` 2. LiteTop soil shall be placed to within 1 inch greater than final grade or to a depth of no greater than 8 inches and compacted as described below. For final grades less than 8 inches only one round of compaction shall be performed and remaining soil loosely placed such that top of soil exceeds final grade by 1 inch (see below). For final grades greater than 8 inches, place soil at no greater than 6 inches and repeat procedure until soil has been compacted within 1 inch of final grade. 3. Compaction shall be performed with a 200—300 lb. landscape roller or lightly compacted with a hand held mechanical compactor to achieve a 50—60 % compaction as determined by ASTM D1557. 4. After compaction, remaining soil shall be placed at 1 inch greater than final grade and thoroughly watered or jetted over entire area. Low settled areas shall be filled with additional soil and re-wet to achieve uniform prescribed final grade. 3.03 FINISH GRADING A. The words "finished grades,"as used herein, mean the required final grade elevations indicated on the drawings. B. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section. Smooth finish surface to within -- 1"of finish grade, with a loose uniformly fine texture. Site grading shall be finished in a workmanlike manner true to the intent shown on the plans. C. Grading Outside Building Lines: Grade areas adjacent to building lines to drain away from structures and to prevent ponding. Finish surfaces shall be free from irregular surface changes. 3.04 FERTILIZING A. Apply fertilizer to all areas to be seeded or sodded. Apply only when soil is in a tillable condition — (i.e., not excessively wet, dry, or frozen). B. Apply fertilizer at the rate specified, taking care to assure an even distribution of material. Work fertilizer into top 1"of soil by means of disk, spike tooth harrow or other equipment. Re-work as necessary to leave area ready for seeding or sodding operations. SOIL PREPARATION CONTRACT NO.763 3291 00-5 3.05 AGRICULTURAL LIME A. Apply agricultural lime to all areas to be seeded or sodded at a rate of 40 lb. per 1000 square feet or as modified by the soil test recommendations. Application method shall be the same as — fertilizer. 3.06 ACCEPTANCE AND REPAIRING A. The above operations shall be completed and acceptable to the Landscape Architect prior to sodding. B. Contractor shall be responsible for maintenance or repair of damaged, finished graded areas until sodding operations or seeding operations begin. _ 3.07 MAINTENANCE A. Protect newly graded areas from traffic and erosion. B. Remove waste materials, trash and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property. 3.08 BREAKAGE AND DAMAGE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for any breakage, damage, or other injury to the building, underground utilities, or equipment caused directly or indirectly by his operations, and he shall replace any such broken or damaged material, at his own expense. 3.09 CLEANUP A. The Contractor shall leave the site in an orderly condition free of all debris. All areas outside the construction limits, which have been disturbed, shall be restored to their original condition. END OF SECTION 02920 SOIL PREPARATION - CONTRACT NO.763 3291 00-6 SECTION 32 92 23 TURFGRASS SOD PART GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary ` Conditions and Division 1-Specification sections, apply to work of this section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Extent of sodding is all areas disturbed by construction unless covered by pavement, structures or landscape. B. This section covers furnishing live sod from approved sources off the site, placing the sod on the prepared areas, finishing, watering, maintaining and repairing in accordance with this specification at the locations shown on the plans. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS 1. 02810— Irrigation System 2. 02950—Plant Materials 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish three (3) copies of manufacturer literature, samples, certifications, or laboratory analytical data for the following items. 1. Sod: (a) Address of grower (b) Sod certifications and inspections. 2. Fertilizer(certification or laboratory analytical data). 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. The areas to be sodded are to be final graded plus or minus 1". The Contractor is responsible for removing all weed growth, thoroughly cultivating the soil to a weed free condition, reestablishing final grade and sodding as herein specified. The Contractor is also responsible for sodding of all areas disturbed during construction. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during deliver and while they are stored at the site. B. Schedule delivery of sod so that sod will be placed within 36 hours after stripping. Protect sod -- against drying and breaking of rolled strips. SODDING CONTRACT NO.763 32 92 23-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOD A. Nursery grown certified blend of Kentucky bluegrass cultivars as classified in the ASPA GSS. The blend shall include a minimum of four cultivars to satisfy a variety of sun and shade planting constraints as approved by the Landscape Architect. Submit certificates for approval. 2.02 QUALITY FACTORS T A. Thickness of cut: All sod shall be machine stripped at a uniform soil thickness of approximately 5/8 inch, plus or minus 1/4 inch for nursery grown sod. Measurement for thickness shall exclude top growth and thatch and shall be determined at the time of cutting in the field. B. Pad Size: Individual pieces of sod shall be cut to the supplier's standard width and length. Maximum allowable deviation from standard widths and lengths shall be plus or minus'h inch on width and plus or minus 5 percent on length. broken pads and torns or uneven ends will not be acceptable. ._ C. Strength of sod sections: Root development shall be such that standard size pieces will support their own weight and retain their shape when; (a)suspended vertically from a firm grasp on the uppermost 10% of area, or(b)when rolled and unrolled 3 times. " D. Mowing height: Before stripping, sod shall be mowed uniformly at a height of 2 to 2-1/2 inches on bluegrass. E. Diseases and soil borne insects. State Nursery and/or Plant Material laws require that all sod entering commerce be inspected and approved for sale by the State Entomologist. F. Weeds: Sod shall be reasonably free from objectionable grassy and broad leaf weeds. Sod will not be acceptable if it contains any of the following weeds: common Bermuda grass (wiregrass), quickgrass, johnsongrass, poison ivy, nutsedge, nimblewill, canadian thistle, bindweed, wild garlic, ground ivy, perennial sorrel, bromegrass and tall fescue. G. Moisture content: Sod shall not be harvested or transplanted when moisture content(excessively dry or wet) may adversely effect survival of the sod. H. Time limitations: Sod shall be harvested, delivered and installed within a period of 36 hours. Sod not transplanted within this period shall be inspected and is subject to rejection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SOD A. The sod bed shall be in a firm but uncompacted condition with a fine well-aggregated texture at time of sodding. Contact Landscape Architect for approval of sod bed prior to commencement of sodding operations. B. Starter Strip: The first row of sod should, if possible, be laid in a straight line with subsequent rows placed parallel and tightly against one another. Lateral joints shall be staggered as in brick _ laying to promote more uniform growth and strength. Care shall be exercised to insure that the sod is not stretched or overlapped and that all joints are butted tight in order to prevent voids which would otherwise cause air drying of the roots. Screened topsoil shall be used to fill all noticeable cracks between pieces. SODDING CONTRACT NO.763 32 92 23-2 C. Sod laid adjacent to asphalt, sidewalks or curbs shall be laid 1" below the tops of adjacent surfaces. Sod laid adjacent to buildings shall be placed at the finish grade level. �— D. Water and Rolling:The Owner will have adequate water available at the site prior to and during the installation of the sod. The sod shall be watered immediately after installation to prevent drying during progress of the work. The Contractor shall have adequate equipment available to water the sod as specified herein. As sodding is completed in any one section, the entire area shall be thoroughly irrigated to a one-inch depth below the new sod pad. After a short drying period, the sod shall be rolled to firm the sod pad and smooth minor surface irregularities. Subsequent watering should maintain moisture to a depth of at least 4 inches. E. Disclaimer: Contractor shall not be held liable for damages incurred to sod caused by de-icing compounds, fertilizers, pesticides and other material not applied by him or under his supervision, nor those caused by acts of God or vandalism. 3.02 MAINTENANCE OF INSTALLED SOD y A. Mowing: Contractor shall provide all labor and equipment necessary to maintain the sod until all sod is firmly rooted. The first mowing shall not be attempted until the sod is secure in place. Not more than 1/3 of the grass leaf shall be removed by the initial cutting or subsequent cuttings. Grass height shall be maintained between 2-1/2 and 3 inches unless otherwise specified. B. Time limitation: Duration of maintenance responsibilities shall be until the Contractor mows the sod one time. The sod shall be thoroughly knit down prior to mowing. C. Maintenance Fertilizer: Apply maintenance fertilizer approximately 6 to 8 weeks after sodding. Analysis as recommended by soil test. 1 D. Watering: The Contractor shall be responsible for adjusting and properly using the automatic irrigation controllers during the maintenance period of the sod areas. 3.03 GUARANTEE & REPLACEMENT A. Warrant all sod to be uniform in color, overall leaf texture, density and reasonably free of weeds at acceptance. B. Remove and replace all bare spots over 2 square feet. Blend grade and edges of new and old sod. C. Sod will not be accepted in parts. END OF SECTION SODDING CONTRACT NO.763 32 92 23-3 SECTION 32 93 00 PLANT MATERIAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. This section of the specification covers the furnishing of all labor, tools, equipment, and materials for performance of all operations as described below and as shown on the plans. B. Work includes, but is not limited to: Furnishing and planting of trees, shrubs, and groundcovers, including bed edging, preparation, and mulch in accordance with these specifications at the locations shown on the Drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations and codes having jurisdiction at the project site. Contractor shall be responsible for certificates of inspection of plant material that may be required by Federal and Local authorities to accompany shipments of plants. B. Reference Standards: 1. "American Standard of Nursery Stock" by the American Association of Nurseryman. 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI); Publication Z60.1; latest version. C. Landscaping contractor must have at least five (5)years experience in this work in the same geographical area (Upper Midwest). D. Substitutions of plant material will not be permitted unless authorized in writing by Owner's Representative. If proof is submitted that any plant specified is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract Price. Such proof shall be substantiated and submitted in writing to Owner's Representative at least thirty (30)days prior to start of the work under this Section. These provisions shall not relieve Contractor of the responsibility of obtaining specified materials in advance if special growing conditions or other arrangements must be made in order to supply specified materials. -- E. Source- Quality Control: Plants shall be subject to inspection and approval by Owner's Representative at place of growth and upon delivery for conformity to specifications. Such approvals shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the Work. Submit written request for inspection of plant material at place of growth and quantity of plants to be inspected. Owner's Representative reserves right to refuse inspection at this time if, in his judgment, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available for inspection. F. All plants inspected at the nursery by Owner's Representative shall be tagged with self-locking PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-1 tags.Trees delivered to the site without these tags or with broken tags shall be sufficient reason for rejection. G. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for uniform height and spread, and label with number to assure symmetry in planting. .., 1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify finished grades of areas to be planted with those shown on the drawings. Ensure proper seedbed preparation and topsoil requirements have been satisfied. Avoid conditions detrimental to plant growth such as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions. Notify Owner's Representative of any such discrepancies or potential problems prior to proceeding with installation of plant material. B. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid _ possible damage. Hand excavate, if required. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair of any damage occurring as a result of construction activities. C. Install plant material after final grades are established and prior to planting of lawns, unless otherwise directed by the Landscape Architect. If plant installation is to occur after lawn work, protect lawn areas and promptly repair damage to lawns resulting from planting operations. D. Maintain grade stakes, forms, etc. set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 1.05 PACKAGING, DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Plants shall be properly marked for identification and for checking. Each block of plants and at least 25% of each variety of separate plants in any one shipment shall have legible labels securely attached upon delivery to the site. Mark the North side of each tree in the nursery. B. Each shipment shall be certified by state and federal authorities to be free from disease and infestation. Any inspection certificates required by law to this effect shall accompany each shipment, invoice, order, or stock. On arrival, the certificate shall be filed with the Contracting Officer. C. Product Handling: The contractor shall transport plant materials covered with tarpaulin or in enclosed vehicle. D. Dug material should be maintained and watered as required at the nursery to guarantee their !" vitality and health until shipping. E. Protect all trunks, stems, branches, and root balls during tree tying, wrapping and loading , operations from damage. F. Load balls or containers onto transport vehicle and secure in a manner that protects the structural integrity of the root balls. G. The contractor shall be solely responsible for the safe transportation of plants to the site and their condition upon arrival. Trees damaged, dehydrated or abused during transit or storage will be rejected. H. Plant materials shall not be stored on concrete or asphalt or left exposed to the sun. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-2 I. Roots and balls of plants shall be adequately protected at all times from the sun and drying winds. In normal and winter plantings, balled and burlapped plants that cannot be planted within 24 hours of delivery shall be heeled in a bed of bark mulch, or other approved material. J. The Owner or Owner's Representative may inspect any phase of this operation and may reject any plant material improperly handled during any phase of this operation. Nothing in this Section shall be interpreted as relieving the contractor of the responsibility of providing healthy, viable plants, nor shall it have any effect upon the terms of the warranty specified herein. 1.06 PROTECTION OF EXISTING PLANTS TO REMAIN A. Do not store materials or equipment, permit burning, or operate or park equipment under branches of any existing plant material to remain except as actually required for construction in those areas. B. Provide barricades, fences or other barriers as necessary at the drip line to protect existing plants to remain from damage during construction. C. Notify Owner's Representative in any case where the Contractor feels grading or other construction called for by Contract Documents may damage existing plants to remain. D. If any existing tree designated to be saved is damaged by mechanical or other means or is removed without written authorization from the Architect, the contractor shall pay as fixed and agreed liquidated damages 125 percent of the value of that plant as established in the latest edition of the "Guide for Establishing Values of Trees and Other Plants," as prepared by the Council of Tree and Landscape Appraisers under the auspices of the International Society of Arboriculture. The before-mentioned liquidated damages shall be extended to include the fee of a member of the American Society of Consulting Arborists selected by the Landscape Architect to assess the extent of damages. This evaluation shall be accepted by all parties as sole determination. In addition to liquidated damages, the contractor shall bear the cost of removal of damaged tree(s) as directed by the Landscape Architect. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Plant and Material Certifications: 1. Certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. 2. Manufacturers or vendor's certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. �- 3. Label data substantiating that plants, trees, shrubs and planting materials comply with specified requirement. 4. Photographs and sources of specimen plant material (trees to be planted). C. Planting Schedule: Submit schedule indicating dates for each type of landscape work to be performed during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing, after documentation of reasons for delays. D. Maintenance Instructions: Typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of landscape work for one full year. Submit prior to expiration of '— required maintenance period(s). The contractor is to request and review the owner's existing maintenance program and notify the owner if current procedures will cause any unknown problems regarding the one-year warranty period for the plant material. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-3 1. Watering (and not over-watering) 2. Fertilization 3. Maintaining mulch 4. Controlling weeds '- 5. Wrapping and unwrapping the tree 6. Trunk inspection for borers 7. Leaf inspection for aphids PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.01 PLANT MATERIALS A. The following quality requirements apply to commercially grown plant material: 1. Plants shall be typical of their species and variety; have normal growth habits, well developed branches, densely foliated, vigorous, fibrous root systems. 2. Plants shall be free from defects and injuries. A Certificate of Inspection by the State Entomologist's Office of the State Department of Agriculture shall accompany each shipment or delivery of plant stock. All shipments of plant stock shall comply with existing State and Federal laws and regulations governing plant disease and infection and interstate movement of nursery stock. 3. Quality and size of plants, spread of roots, and size of balls shall be in accordance with ANSI-Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock" as published by the American Association of Nurserymen. 4. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing a legible botanical and common name designation. 5. Where formal arrangements or consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown on the Drawings, select stock for uniform height, branching height, and spread, and label with numbers which assure symmetry in planting. 6. Plants shall not be pruned before planting. 7. Plants shall be freshly dug and nursery grown. Collected stock shall be rejected. Nursery grown plants larger than 1-1/2" caliper shall have been transplanted or root pruned at least once in past three years. 8. All trees must have straight trunks with single leader intact. Bark shall be free of abrasion, all cuts over 1-1/4" shall have callused over. _ 9. Trees shall not be accepted which have had their leaders cut (or which have leaders damaged so that cutting is necessary). 10.Trees shall be true to name. Upon request, Contractor shall furnish the Owner's Representative a list indicating the source of each of the different plants to be supplied. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-4 11.AII plants shall be balled and burlapped or container grown unless otherwise indicated on the Plant Schedule. 2.02 FERTILIZER FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. Fertilize trees to be planted with a fertilizer tablet having a slow release nitrogen, phosphorus and potash (20-10-5) plus sulfur and iron formulation. Tablets manufactured by Agriform or equal. B. The Owner's Representative may approve other"dry"fertilizing methods. 2.03 MULCH A. Mulch: Shall be premium grade shredded cedar bark of long, fibrous nature, 2" to 4" in length. Material shall have been stockpiled a sufficient length of time to prevent burning and nitrogen depletion cause by decomposition. Do not use mulch from walnut. 2.04 TREE WRAP A. Tree wrapping shall be first quality, four inch wide bituminous impregnated tape, corrugated or crepe paper, specifically manufactured for tree wrapping and having qualities to resist insect infestation. Jute twine not less than two-ply. 2.05 TREE STAKES A. Tree stakes shall be hardwood free of loose knots and holes. Stakes shall be straight, sound, surfaced four sides, 8' long, not less than 2"x2", if square; 2-1/2" in diameter if round. As an option, standard 8' long steel "T"fence stakes, driven to firm bearing, may be used for all trees up to 3-1/2" in caliper. To protect tree trunks from damage by wires, provide not less than 'h" diameter rubber or plastic hose, cut to required lengths and of uniform color, material, and size. 2.06 STEEL LAWN EDGING A. All planting beds shall be edged with Duraedge 4" x 3/16" steel lawn edging as manufactured by the J.D. Russell Company(800-888-9708)or approved equal. Edging shall be hot rolled steel with an electrostatically applied powder coat surface paint, green in color. 2.07 PRE-EMERGENT WEED KILLER A. Pre-Emergent weed killer shall be granulated and shall be "Treflan" or"Dacthal", or approved 12 month weed preventer. 2.08 WEED PREVENTATIVE FABRIC A. Place fabric below wood mulch in shrub beds. Fabric shall be a woven polypurperene, 3.5 to 4.0 _ ounce products. 2.09 ANTIDESICCANT A. Antidesiccant shall be an emulsion that will provide a film over plant surfaces permeable enough to permit transpiration, and will not damage the plant, such as "Wilt Pruf'or approved equal. Three applications on all evergreens are required. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-5 2.10 PLANT BED SOIL MATERIALS A. Compost: All compost will be decomposed and stable. Carbon to Nitrogen (C:N) ratios will not _ exceed 35:1 or be less than 8:1. All materials will be decomposed through aerobic processes. Material shall be free of debris and stones. Coarse Grade: 100% passing 2.5 inch screen. 60% to 70% passing a '/2 inch screen B. Native Topsoil: Topsoil shall be a natural friable soil, possessing characteristics of representative productive soils in the vicinity from which it is obtained. 1. Topsoil shall be classified according to the USDA soil textural classification. USDA definitions are as follows: Sand —270 mesh (0.05mm)to 18 mesh (1.0mm) Silt—0.002mm to 0.05mm Clay—Less than 0.002mm 2. Soil shall meet classification requirements for a sandy loam to silt loam texture. Soils approved for use in specific planting areas shall remain consistent in sand, silt, and clay composition. 3. As a guide, the topsoil should contain the following components by percentage: Component Criteria Silt _<20% Clay <_20% Sand >_40% Fi 5 to 7.6 Organic Matter 1 4 to 6% _ 4. The topsoil shall be reasonably free from subsoil, clay lumps, stones or similar objects larger than 1/2 inch in greatest diameter, brush, stumps, roots, objectionable weeds or litter, excess acid or alkali, or any other material or substance which may be harmful to plant growth or a hindrance to subsequent smooth grading, planting and maintenance operations. Foreign material shall not exceed 5% by volume or weight. 2.11 PLANT BED SOIL MIXTURE A. Blend native topsoil and course grade compost(as defined in paragraph 2.10) to achieve the following criteria: '— Material Criteria Organic Matter(dry weight) 2.5% to 5.0% Soil reaction H 5.5 to 7.0 B. Plant Bed Soil Mix backfill soil for tree and shrub pits shall consist of a mixture of existing soil excavated from the pit and organic matter such as peat, compost, manure, etc. Use a rich mixture adjacent to the root ball of the plant, making the mixture leaner toward the outside of the pit. C. Plant Bed Soil Mix for shrub and perennial beds shall be prepared by thoroughly incorporating, by tilling, organic matter at the rate of 1/3 by volume to the depth of the preparation (12") in order to provide a rich, friable growing media. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Planting Seasons: Actual planting shall be performed only when weather and soil conditions are —' suitable and in accordance with locally accepted practice and as approved by the Contracting Officer. 1. Fall: September 1 until frozen soil conditions prevent work. 2. Spring: Unfrozen soil condition through June 1. B. Layout: The Landscape Contractor shall stake out the locations of all plants before digging holes, and request approval from the Owner's Representative prior to digging. C. If underground construction, obstructions, or large rocks are encountered in excavation of planting areas, other locations for the planting may be selected by the Owner's Representative. — 3.02 PREPARATION OF PLANTING SOIL A. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple plantings. Stake locations and outline areas and secure Landscape Architect's acceptance before start of planting work. Make minor adjustrients as may be required. B. Before mixing, clean planting mix of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful or toxic to plant growth. C. Plant Bed Sail Mix backfill soil for tree and shrub pits shall consist of a mixture of existing soil excavated from the pit and organic matter such as peat, compost, manure, etc. Use a rich mixture adjacent to the root ball of the plant, making the mixture leaner toward the outside of the pit. D. Plant Bed Scil Mix for shrub and perennial beds shall be prepared by thoroughly incorporating, by tilling, organic., matter at the rate of 1/3 by volume to the depth of the preparation (12") in order to provide a rich,friable growing media. 3.03 PLANTING SOIL MIX INSTALLATION A. Place approximately 1/2 of total amount of planting mix required. Work into top of loosened rotary-tilled sub-grade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting mix. Mix thoroughly into upper 4 inches of topsoil. B. Preparation of Unchanged Grades: Where beds are to be planted in areas that have not been altered or disturbed by excavating, grading, or stripping operations, prepare planting mix for bed planting as fellows:Till to a depth of not less than 4 inches. Apply initial fertilizers as specified. Remove high areas and fill in depressions. Till planting mix and soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture, i`ree of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter. " C. Prior to preparation of unchanged areas, remove existing grass, vegetation and turf. Dispose of such materiel outside of Owner's property. Do not turn existing vegetation over into soil being prepared for beds. D. Allow for mu ch thickness. E. Apply specified commercial fertilizer at rates specified and thoroughly mix into upper 2 inches of bed. Delay application of fertilizer if planting will not follow within a few days. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-7 F. Preparation Under Existing Trees: Where beds are to be planted under the dripline of existing trees, prepare planting mix for bed planting as follows: Lightly till to a depth of not more than 2 inches. Apply initial fertilizers as specified. Remove high areas and fill in depressions without changing existing grades more than 2". Lightly till planting mix and soil to a homogenous mixture of fine texture,free of lumps, clods, stones, roots and other extraneous matter to a depth of not _ more than 2". Do not turn existing vegetation over into soil being prepared for beds. G. Fine grade bed area to smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll, rake, and drag bed areas, remove ridges and fill depressions, as required to meet finish grades. Limit fine _ grading to areas which can be planted immediately after grading. H. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. I. Restore bed areas to specified condition, if eroded or otherwise disturbed, after fine grading and prior to planting. 3.04 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Excavation for planting shall include removal and stacking of soil excavated for trenches, tree holes, plant pits and planting beds. B. Excavate pits, beds, and trenches with vertical sides and with bottom of excavation slightly raised at center to provide proper drainage. Loosen hard subsoil in bottom of excavation. 1. For balled and burlapped (B&B trees and shrubs), make excavations at least twice as wide as the ball diameter and equal to the ball depth. In poorly drained soils, the -- excavation shall be three times as wide as the ball diameter. 2. For container grown stock, excavate as specified for balled and burlapped stock, *— adjusted to size of container width and depth. C. Dispose of subsoil removed from planting excavations. Do not mix with planting soil or use as backfill.D. Fill excavations for trees and shrubs with water and allow water to percolate out prior to planting. E. Prior to installation, rotary till 30 inches around excavated tree pits and shrub trench to aerate existing adjacent soil except under existing tree dripline. F. Where existing turf areas are damaged by planting operations, they shall be replaced by equal ._ quality turf by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. 3.05 SETTING AND BACKFILLING PLANTS A. Do not plant in obviously poor drainage. Notify the Owner's Representative in writing of all soils or drainage conditions considered detrimental to growth of plant material. Report conditions and submit a proposal for correcting conditions, if feasible, including change in cost, if any. B. Orient plants for best appearance from dominant view. C. Set all plants plumb and straight. Set at such a level that after settlement, a normal or natural relationship of the crown of the plant with the ground surface will be established. Locate plant in the center of the pit. In poorly drained soils, plant 4 to 6 inches above previous crown depth. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-8 D. Soil used for backfilling all plants shall consist of suitable soil excavated from the hole thoroughly mixed with sphagnum peat moss or other suitable organic matter. Notify the Owner's Representative in writing of all soils or drainage conditions considered detrimental to growth of plant materia . Report conditions and submit a proposal for correcting conditions, if feasible, including change in cost, if any. E. When planting container grown stock, use soil similar to the soil in the container to amend existing soil excavated from the pit. F. Backfill each plant about 2/3 of the way. Flood the plant and allow soil to settle. Bring the backfill to grade. Wa:er is available through hose bibs on the building or quick couplers from the irrigation system. Any settlement shall be brought to grade with topsoil. G. Balled plants shall be placed in the plant pits on loosened soil. Backfilled soil shall be carefully watered to fill all voids. In no case shall cloth be pulled out from under balls. Do not plant if ball is broken or cracked during the planting process. ALL TIES AND STRINGS SHALL BE CUT PRIOR TO BACKFILLING. H. Container grown plants shall have containers cut open and the plants carefully removed so that the earth around roots of plants remain unbroken. Plants shall then be planted in the same manner as belled plants. I. If deciduous :rees or shrubs are moved when in full-leaf, spray with anti-desiccant at nursery before moving and spray again 2 weeks after planting J. Dish top of backfill to allow for mulching. Mulch to a minimum one foot beyond tree/shrub pit. K. Prune, thin oit, and shape trees and shrubs in accordance with standard horticultural practice. Prune trees tD retain required height and spread. Unless otherwise directed by Landscape Architect, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches from flowering trees, if any. Prunirg shall be done in such a manner as to not change the natural habit or shape of the plant. All cuts shall be made flush, leaving no stubs. On all cuts over 3/4" in diameter and bruises or scars on the bark, the injured cambium shall be traced back to living tissue and removed. WDunds shall be smoothed and shaped so as not to retain water. L. Remove and replace excessively pruned or misformed stock resulting from improper pruning. M. Wrap tree try nks of 2 inches caliper and larger. Start at ground and cover trunk to height of first branches and securely attach. Inspect tree trunks for injury, improper pruning and insect infestation arid take corrective measures before wrapping. 3.06 PREPARATION OF SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER BEDS A. The soil surface shall be cleaned of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps and other extraneous material. So I shall be cultivated to a depth of not less than 8 inches to incorporate the specified fertilizer and organic matter and break up the compacted soil. Beds shall be mulched with wood chips as spe,;ified. B. Shrub beds :;hall receive an approved weed barrier fabric placed throughout the bed and beneath the mulch. 3.07 PLANTING GROUNDCOVER AND PERENNIALS A. Mulch shall be brushed away and holes dug large enough to allow for the root ball. Dig holes large enough to allow for spreading of roots and backfill with planting soil. Soil shall be worked PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-9 around roots to eliminate air pockets, leaving a slight saucer indentation around plant to hold water. Backfill with soil, making sure that roots are planted in soil and not in the mulch. Plants — shall be thoroughly watered after planting taking care not to cover crowns of plants with wet soils. B. Space groundcover and perennial plants as indicated or scheduled. 3.08 STAKING TREES A. All trees shall be staked. Staking shall be installed immediately after trees are positioned and ties removed from the ball of roots. Stakes shall be spaced equally about each tree and shall be driven vertically into the ground in such a manner as not to injure the ball or roots. Stakes shall be of uniform height after placement. 3.09 PLACING LAWN EDGING A. Place edging to separate all planting areas from lawn areas. Install in a smooth line. Install top of the edging one half inch above finish grade of both turf and mulch. Place stakes as specified by manufacturer. — 3.010 APPLICATION OF FERTILIZER A. Apply fertilizer during shrub and groundcover bed preparation as specified. Mix thoroughly into the upper.8 inches of soil. Also apply to pit areas prior to tree and shrub installation. 3.011 INSTALLATION OF WEED PREVENTATIVE FABRIC A. Install fabric for all shrub, groundcover, and perennial beds, as well as parking lot islands, as shown on the plans. Overlap to ensure complete coverage of bed and pin in place as necessary to prevent unwrapping and folding during subsequent planting and mulching operations. 3.012 APPLICATION OF MULCH A. Place mulch after applying pre-emergent weed killer or landscape fabric as required. Place — mulch in all shrubs and perennial beds to the limits of the beds as shown on the drawings. B. Shade and ornamental trees in lawns: apply 3"thick of wood bark mulch in 5-foot diameter circle around trees. Blend mulch into existing ground elevations. — 3.013 PRECAUTIONS AND CLEAN-UP A. During course of planting, excess waste materials shall be continuously and promptly removed, lawn areas kept clear and all reasonable precautions taken to avoid damage to existing structures, plants and grass. Existing grass areas which have been injured by the work shall be regraded and sodded at the Contractor's expense. The entire area, when completed, shall be neat and clean to the satisfaction of the Owner's Representative. B. During landscape work, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. — C. Protect landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other contractors and trades, and trespassers. Maintain protection during installation and _ maintenance periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. PLANT MATERIAL - CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-10 3.014 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Final acceptance of the work under this section will be given when all planting operations are complete and material and installation conforms to the contract requirements. B. When the work under this section is complete, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative and request an inspection for final acceptance. Upon completion of this inspection and correction of any discrepancies discovered, including missing plants and replacement cf dead and dying plants as determined by the Owner's Representative, the Guarantee Period shall begin. The work under this section will not be accepted in parts. 3.015 GUARANTEE PERIOD AND REPLACEMENTS A. Guarantee all plants to leaf-out, not just break bud, the first spring following final acceptance of the contract. 1. At th,a end of the Guarantee Period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative and request an End-of-Guarantee-Period inspection. Approval of all plants and required replacements shall designate completion of the work under this secti cn. At that time, remove stakes and guy wires. B. Replace any plant that dies or partially dies to the point that the main leader has died back or there is a 25 percent or more of the crown dead, as determined by the Owner's Representative. C. Replacements shall be plants of the same size and species, planted within a reasonable time following removal of the dead or dying plant, if seasonal conditions permit, or during the next planting season. D. The Contractor will be liable for any damage to structures, utilities, or surfaces resulting from replacement operations. E. Water for replacements will be supplied on site by the Contractor. 3.016 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all materials beginning immediately after the work is started and continuing until final acceptance. Maintenance will be done by the Owner between the date of final accepts nce and end of the guarantee period. However, the Contractor shall visit the site frequently to satisfy himself that satisfactory maintenance is being performed, including watering. Any deficiency shall be noted in writing by the Contractor and brought to the attention of the Owner. 1. Watering: Maintenance shall include a thorough initial watering with hand watering of tree:5 and shrubs thereafter when soil moisture is below optimum level for establishment and growth, and all other watering that is necessary for the proper growth of all plant mate-rials. 2. Resetting Plants, Stakes, Guys, Saucers: Settled plants shall be reset to proper grade and positions, dead material removed, and guys tightened or repaired within a reasonable time. Correct any displaced mulch. Repair or replace accessories as required. PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-11 3. Pruning: Pruning will include only work that is necessary to maintain the plants in their — normal growth pattern. 4. Replacing Dead and Dying Plants: Plants that are dead or dying shall be replaced within _ reasonable time, if seasonal conditions permit. Dead Plants shall be removed from the premises within 30 days of their decline. 5. Weed Control: Weeding shall be scheduled as necessary to keep all mulched areas weed and grass free. All mulched areas around trees and shrubs and in beds shall be weed and grass free for final acceptance. 6. Control insects and disease. 7. Remedy damage from use of pesticides and herbicides. END OF SECTION 02950 _ PLANT MATERIAL CONTRACT NO.763 32 93 00-12 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Department of Engineering SEC7ION A- Definitions of Terms SEC7ION B -Scope of work SEC7ION C -Control of Materials and Work SEC'rION D- Procedure and Progress SECTION E -Measurements and Payments SEC'rION F -Legal Relations and Responsibility SECTION A-DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1. CITY. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party of the First Part of the accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative. 2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. 3. ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative. 4. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to the detailed inspection of the work or materials therefor and to such other duties as may be delegated to him in these specifications. 5. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Part in the accompanying contract for the improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with the approval of the Council, contracted with the Contractor to execute and perform in his stead all or any part of the contract. 7. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for all or a part of the work provided for in these specifications. 8. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidders or Proposal to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him. 9. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable ` performance of the contract. 10. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner and on the standard corm, for the improvements covered by these specifications. 11. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in which the proposed work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by the City Council, official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk. 12. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein, applying to the contract of which there specifications are a part, which change or supplement these specifications. 13. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting forth the terms unde, which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The —' contract includes all i;onditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to GS-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental — agreements entered into by the parties to the contract. 14. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and conditions for submission of Proposals. 15. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detail the information — relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals. 16. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specifications and approved by the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk. — 17. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in accordance with the plans and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as provided by law or by the specifications. 18. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginning the work to the — specified date of completion, both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council, as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includes the new date of completion. — 19. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and notices relative to the proposed improvement that are required by law to be published in a prescribed manner and that have actually been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. Attention is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of contract obligations. 20. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. 21. WORK. The term "Work"of the Contractor and Subcontractor'includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract. _ 22. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract. SECTION B -SCOPE OF WORK 1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard. _ 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on the work available to the Engineer and to his representatives. _ 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the conformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the — character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this GS-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein _ contained. 4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors r of omission in plans or in the layout as given by said stakes and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform the Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly correct the same. 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary because of errors i i the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or — modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon which the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the work partially completed and such modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agreed upon in writing at the time the changes are ordered and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work not performed. 6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted by agreement or arbitration before such changed work is undertaken. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to increase or decreasE: the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the work included in 1:he contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and the measured quantify of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity specified it the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either party to the contract may request such an adjustment. 8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same. 9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is used, he shall make application to the Waterloo Water Works for a temporary water connection from a fire —' hydrant or by some other connection method. Water usage will be charged at the rate for temporary water service. The rules, regulations, and water rates are available at the Waterloo Water Works offices at 325 Sycamore Straet or their telephone number is 319-232-6280. 10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of �— the work in general harmony. 11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Contractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit the closing of additioial streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may direct. 12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to obstruct the streets, highways, and alleys as little as possible. The Contractor shall carry on the different GS-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. In doing the _ work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done. 13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or upon any street, highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission. 14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences, properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive to the public. 15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, remove from the City's property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be considered completed. The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or disturbed by his work. 16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General — Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special reference in other parts of the contract documents. SECTION C -CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK 1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the _ construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, manner of performance, rate of progress on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. Materials and construction work shall, at all times, be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of these specifications as regards the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work. The Engineer and his representatives shall, at all times, have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority require any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the _ Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the engineer of the date fixed for inspection. Inspections by the Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the Contract, the City shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost. _ 2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement; but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from GS-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in every particular. In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. 3. STA7US OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the work. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide questions which arise in the execution of the work. 4. ENG-NEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interp-etation of the contract documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial consideration involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to arbitration. 5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and necessary opportunities and facilities for setting stakes and making measurements. The Contractor shall not furnish stakes or �nen to set them. He shall not proceed until he has received from the Engineer such stakes and instructions as may be necessary to the progress of the work. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points, and stakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be responsible for any rr istakes that may be caused, by their loss or disturbance. 6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the Engineer. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work using his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other instructions, and shall report at once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission which he may discover. 7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without lines and grade being give, work done beycind lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the Contractor and will n:)t be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. _ 8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials condemned by the engineer as failing to conform to the Contract; whether incorporatec in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. GS-5 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time thereafter, the City may, upon ten (10)days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor. _ 9. MATERIALS EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the work. Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly .— recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the work, whether or not it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use in the performance of the Contract, together with samples of the material. These samples will be — considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source. 11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the work who shall —' refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the work, shall be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not be re-employed unless express permission be _ given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce discipline and good order among his employees. The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within the specified time limit. 12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hire any of the City's employees without the permission of the Engineer. 13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences so far as practicable. _ 14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the City of Waterloo, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Engineer shall approve both such action and the amount charged _ to the Contractor. GS-6 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS ._ 1. ORDI=R OF COMPLETION - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in such order or time as the Engineer may require. The City shall have the right tc take possession of an use completed or partially completed portion of the work at any time, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or —' used, or any part thereof. If such prior use increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such exlra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine. 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality of the finished work a:such time. 3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the Engineer. 4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by an act oi' neglect of the City, or its employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the City; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation, unavoidable casualties, or any cause beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then the time of completion Shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will compensate for such delay. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring.more than thirty (30) days before claim therefor is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary. This article daes not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under provisions in the contract documents. 5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. 6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to the Contractor under '— this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the man in charge of any office used by the Contractor or his foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited in the post office, postpaid, addressed :o the Contractor at his last known place of business. 7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of one-fourth (1/4) of the contract period, one-eighth (1/8)of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of one-half (1/2) of the ;ontract period, three-eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of three-fourths (3/4; of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period. If, at any time;the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written notice to the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall state what action on :he part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten (10) days, to proceed as directed in the said notice, then the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the GS-7 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate _ contract. 8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this creditor; or if a Receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency; or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City, upon the certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy, and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expenses of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor's default shall be certified by the Engineer. 9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulment of this contract before completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor, if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. SECTION E - MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT 1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer according to the United States standard measures. 2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is completed, the Engineer will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified " in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. Payment shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto. 3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have been ordered by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided herein. If work is to be done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefor the actual reasonable cost of the labor and materials entering permanently in such work, plus fifteen percent (15%) of the cost thereof. In computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included: (a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefor, and cost of materials. (b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra work. (c) Liability insurance, prorated, for the extra work. GS-8 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be correct, he shall so certify on the statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work from the materials and receipted freight bills for the same. For any special machine, power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not including small hand tools, which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental thereon, to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added. The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of any character. The fifteen percent (15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all overhead expenses except liability insurance. In no case wi I a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upon which the claim is based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter. 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by drawings or otherwise, involvel extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten (10)days after completion of the work. No such claim shall be valid unless so made. 5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an extra s heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as defined herein, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra compensation. Sucl notice to the engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid for as extra work as provided herein. 6. COM PLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten (10) days after the full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations, omissions, and defe,-ts, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve such statement or peint out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the Engineer shall, within ten (10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be delivered unto the Contractor. The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the Contractor has approved the same. If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or there is a difference of opinion regarding soine item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be submitted to arbitration as hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer shall, within a period of five (5) days, file his completion report. Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also file a written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion report, growing out o-'this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent (10%) of GS-9 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period of thirty (30) days. If no claims are _- filed against the Contractor within thirty (30) days, the final ten percent (10%) shall then be paid to the Contractor. 7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time provided in Article _ 6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City. SECTION F-LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES _- 1. LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict -' with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. 2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor for any part of the improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partially completed and completed work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be required to make good at his own expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior to the filing of the engineer's certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make -" no charge for delay due to such cause. He may, however, be allowed a reasonable extension of time on account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City harmless therefor. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain, or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property. 3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing. 4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which shall save the City harmless and protect the public and any person from injury sustained by the reason of the prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefor, and said Contractor shall also carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law. Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk with proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies, evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten (10) days following the filing of written notice of "- cancellation, protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of carrying on the work involved in the Contract. The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms of insurance protection: -- (a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed by the Contractor. (b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom a portion of the work may have been assigned. GS-10 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 (c) Public; liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a Subcontractor. (d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and property damage liability insurance on all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other perscins, firms, or corporations. (e) The minimum protection shall be as follows: Comprehensive General Liability Insurance General Aggregate Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Each Occurrence Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,000.00 The Contractor shall have the Owner, City of Waterloo, Iowa, and Engineer, AECOM, named as an "Additional Namec Insured". A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall be filed with the Owner. All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City Clerk shall include tha name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the above insurance. 5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets aid Highways" and shall provide, keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer, to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on thE�work. All barricading plans shall be approved by the City Engineer. 6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. — He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified. -- 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements for permanent changos in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the City. 8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and no later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or -- materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him arising out of the .,_ prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid for dismissed. 9. ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assign the contract or sublet any portion of i he work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council. GS-11 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the work and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City. 11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by '— agreement with the Engineer. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the case of an appeal from his decision, within ten (10) days of its receipt, and in any other case, within a reasonable time after cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appealing. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financially interested in the contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor. _ The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three--one named in writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or, if they fail to select a third within ten (10) days, then he shall be chosen by the Comptroller of the State of Iowa. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information demanded in writing, the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte. _ If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding; if three, the decision of any two shall be binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever permitted by law, it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect. The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time, expense, and trouble incident _ to the appeal, and, if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. _ The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objections on account of the form of proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa. In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall be wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in which the work is to be done. 12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. The Contractor shall, at the time of execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City written bonds of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon GS-12 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance and payment by the Contractor of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. These bonds shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract. 13. PER:;ONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon �- the Engineer or his authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City. _ 14. JURIMICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply fully with these provis ons, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk County. 15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of his bond, after the work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion report of the engineer has been filed and approved by the Council. -- 16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements, estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefor, frcm showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the Contactor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract. The City shal not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of _ the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. GS-13 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1. SUBCOIVTRACTS — The cor tractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for the improvements embraced in this contract. — 2. REVIEVV BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have — access to and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided, however, that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the contractor only by the City of — Waterlog through its authorized representative or agents. 3. INSPECTION a. 'The contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any rests which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accordance with the provisions of the Technical Specifications. b. Inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the mprovements embraced in this contract may be made at the place of production, manufacture or shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1) latent defects, (2) departures from specific equirements of the contract, (3) damage or loss in transit, or (4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole or in part will be made at the project site. 4. WARRANTY OF TITLE — No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale, lease-purchase or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and —' equipMMt installed or incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver :he same together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo free from any claims, liens, or charges. Neither':he contractor nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien upon any improvement or appuitenance thereon. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond given —' by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its — provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. SGS-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF F.Y.2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA CITY CONTRACT NO. 763 CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA This contract made a id entered into this day of 20_, by and between the City of Waterloo, lowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as (City), and of (hereinafter referred to as Contractor), WITNESSETH: PAR. 1 Contractor agrees to build and construct the F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA, CITY CONTRACT NO.763 and furnish all necessary tools, equipment, materials, and labor necessary to do all the work called for in the plans and specifications in a workmanshiplike manner and for the prices set forth in Contractor's proposal, which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and agreed to be a part of this contract. PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted by the City Council ordering the construction of the improvement, the Notice to Contractors as published, the Instruction to Bidders, the Form of Proposal, the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all be considered as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract. PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and -- labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of the flans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and to the satisfaction and approval of the City and its engineer. PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is by -- reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten (10) working days after receipt of — "Notice to Proceed"and complete it on or before December 31, 2010 unless an extension of time is granted in writing by the Council of the City. PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefor promptly by the date herein specified, the City may pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount then due the Contractor. C-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys, keeping open passage ways for water, traffic, and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining proper and sufficient barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness, to see that the backfilling is properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be brought against the City by reason of any injuries that may be sustained by any person or property allegedly caused by the Contractor, or his agents, while work is done pursuant to this agreement. — PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City for damages allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its agents, or on account of any injuries allegedly sustained by reason of any obstruction, hole, depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work herein contracted for, that it will defend said suit and save the City harmless therein, and in case judgment is rendered against the City, the Contractor agrees to pay the same promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a sufficient amount to protect the City and those who use the streets of the City. PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review the progress of the work in detail; also, to make any test or any material to be used in such work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting any materials, substance, or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by the City Engineer. PAR. 10 Any material, which has been rejected by the construction reviewer, shall be at once removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer. PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and prosecution of work, but if said work is delayed by the City, the Contractor shall have such extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City. PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims of labor, material, men, or subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement. It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the — Contractor. It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor, material, or men under this contract. PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a form — to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to Bidders, which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and shall be subject — to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the prosecution thereof for a period of thirty(30)consecutive days without reasonable cause, and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten (10)days after a notice to continue or carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City, or after such notice has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material, tools, or -- machinery found along said line of work, doing the work either by contract or as it may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shall be retained by the City from any compensation due, or — to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in an action upon Contractor's bond. C-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions, _ stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work. the City agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors,the amount of money due the Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit prices set out in the Contractor's proposal,which has been accepted by the City. PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract, based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the ._ Contractor's unit bid prices, and for which 100%surety bond is required is$ PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and clean up said streets, and to save the City harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a failure -- to clean up and remove the debris or put the street back in a proper condition for travel. PAR. 18 This iontract is not divisible, but in the event of a conflict between this contract and the various instruments incorporated by reference, this contract shall govern. PAR. 19 Befon� the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contactor to guarantee the completion of the work. PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two (2) years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said work within a period of two (2) years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and after havin13 been given ten (10) days notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the United Staters Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein given, then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof to be recovi:red from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action brought in any court of competent jurisdiction. C-3 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter directed to the Mayor or City — Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four (4) and not less than three (3) months prior to the expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements, in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three (3) months after such notice has been given to the City, and, in any event, until two (2) years after the acceptance of the work. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Mayor City Clerk Contractor BY: — Title: Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, this day of 20_. ATTEST: City Clerk _ Waterloo, Iowa C-4 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we,_ of (hereinafter called the Principal), and of (hereinafter called the Surety), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Waterloo (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the penal sum of Dollars($ _), lawful money of the United States, to payment of which sum, well and truly to be made, the Principal here firmly binds himself/themselves, his/their heirs, executors, and administrators, and the said Surety binds himself, his successors, assigns, executors, and administrators, jointly and severally, firmly by these preserts. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that, WHEREAS the above bounden Principal did, on the Day of 2010, enter into a written contract with the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for the construction of F.Y. 2010 River Renaissance Lower Plaza, City Contract No. 763, a copy of which contract, together with all of its terms, covenants, conditions, and stipulations, is incorporated herein and made a part hereof as full and completely as if said contract were recited at length herein; and WHEREAS, the Principal and Surety on this bond hereby agree to pay to all persons, firms or corporations having contracts directly with the Principal or with subcontractors, all just claims due them for labor performed or m 3terials furnished in the performance of the contract on account of which bond is given when the same are not satisfied out of the portion of the contract price which the public corporation is required to retain until completion of the public improvement, but the Principal and Surety shall not be liable to said persons, firms, or corporation unless the claims of said claimants against said portion of the contract price shall have been established as provided by law. Now, if the Principal shall in all respects fulfill his said contract according to the terms and tenor thereof, and shall sat sfy all claims and demands incurred for the same, and shall fully indemnify and save harmless the Obligee from all costs and damages which it may suffer by reason of failure to do so, and shall fully reimburse and repay the Obligee all outlays and expenses which it may incur in making good any such default, then the obligation is to be void and of no effect, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary notwithstanding, to consent without notice: 1. To any extension of time to the contract in which to perform the contract. 2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or contract when such change does not involve an increase of more than twenty percent(20%) of the total contract price, and shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than one (1) year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Obligee at the time such work was accepted. PFB-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 IN WITNESS WHEREOF,we have hereunto set our hands and seals this day of 12010. Principal By. Surety Attorney-in-Fact PFB-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a hereinafter called Principal, (Corporation, Partnership or Individual) and (Name of Surety) (Address of Surety) hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF WATERLOO. IOWA (Name of Owner) 715 MULBERRY STREET, WATERLOO, IOWA 50703 (Address of Owner) hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successor3, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract with the OW VER, dated the day of 20_, a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: F.Y. 2010 RIVER RENAISSANCE LOWER PLAZA CITY CONTRACT NO. 763 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, '— SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for iaterials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. P13-1 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 Non-Federal PROVIDED, FURTHER, that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS HEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of (number) — which shall be deemed an original, this the day of 20 ATTEST: Principal (Principal) Secretary (SEAL) By (s) (Address) Witness as to Principal (Address) Surety ATTEST: By Attorney-in-Fact Witness as to Surety (Address) (Address) NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. P13-2 RRLowerPlaza-#763-84050.22.000 Non-Federal